HP Hewlett Packard Switch A7284 96002 User Manual

hp StorageWorks  
edge switch 2/16  
service manual  
Part Number: A7284-96002/AA-RS2JA-TE  
First Edition (August 2002)  
This manual describes the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16  
and attached hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM)  
application. For service representatives, it describes diagnostic  
procedures, repair procedures, and the removal and replacement  
procedures for field-replaceable units (FRUs). An illustrated parts  
breakdown is included for all FRUs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbols on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
Rack Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi  
Getting Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
Maintenance Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13  
Remote Workstation Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14  
Minimum Remote Console Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16  
Field Replaceable Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17  
SFP Transceivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19  
Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19  
edge switch 2/16 installation guide  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19  
Connectors and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19  
Initial Machine Load Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20  
Ethernet LAN Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20  
Power and System Error LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20  
FRU Status LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21  
Maintenance Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21  
Software Diagnostic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21  
HAFM Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22  
HAFM Status Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23  
Hardware View Layout and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24  
Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24  
Product Manager Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25  
Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25  
Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26  
LED Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27  
Product Manager Status Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27  
View Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28  
View Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28  
Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35  
Topology Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37  
Zone Set Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38  
HAFM Services Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38  
Event Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39  
Status Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40  
Embedded Web Server Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–41  
SNMP Trap Message Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42  
Maintenance Analysis Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1  
Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1  
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1  
MAP 0000: Start MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7  
MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26  
iv  
edge switch 2/16 installation guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32  
MAP 0300: Console Application Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33  
MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39  
Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2  
Procedural Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2  
Using Log Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3  
HAFM Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3  
HAFM Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3  
Session Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4  
Product Status Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5  
Fabric Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5  
Audit Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6  
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6  
Refresh the Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7  
Clear the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7  
Hardware Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7  
Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9  
Refresh the Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10  
Clear the Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10  
Threshold Alert Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10  
Using Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12  
Port List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12  
FRU List View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14  
Node List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16  
Performance View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17  
Zone Set View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17  
Performing Port Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19  
Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19  
Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20  
Performance View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24  
Perform Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26  
Internal Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26  
edge switch 2/16 installation guide  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
External Loopback Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28  
Perform Channel Wrap Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29  
Swapping Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30  
Collecting Maintenance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31  
Clean Fiber-Optic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33  
Power-On Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34  
Power-Off Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35  
Reset or IPL the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35  
Reset the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36  
IPL the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36  
Set the Switch Online or Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37  
Set Online State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37  
Set Offline State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38  
Block and Unblock Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39  
Block a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39  
Unblock a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39  
Manage Firmware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40  
Determine a Switch Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40  
Add a Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41  
Modify a Firmware Version Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44  
Delete a Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45  
Download a Firmware Version to a Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45  
Manage Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–48  
Remove and Replace FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1  
FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1  
Procedural Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2  
RRP: SFP Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2  
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2  
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
RRP: Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4  
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4  
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5  
vi  
edge switch 2/16 installation guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RRP: Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Miscellaneous Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3  
System Events (000 through 199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–3  
Power Supply Events (200 through 299) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–11  
Fan Module Events (300 through 399) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–15  
Port Events (500 through 599). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–29  
Thermal Events (800 through 899) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–35  
Index  
1–1  
1–2  
1–3  
1–4  
1–5  
1–6  
1–7  
1–8  
1–9  
Switch, HAFM server, and Ethernet Hub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2  
Out-of-Band Product Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4  
Inband Product Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5  
HAFM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12  
12-Port Ethernet Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13  
Typical Network Configuration (One Ethernet Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15  
Typical Network Configuration (Two Ethernet Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16  
Edge Switch 2/16 (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18  
Edge Switch 2/16 (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18  
edge switch 2/16 installation guide  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1–10 Product View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23  
1–11 Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25  
1–12 Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29  
1–13 Port List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31  
1–14 FRU List View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32  
1–15 Node List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33  
1–16 Performance View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34  
1–17 Fabrics View - Topology Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37  
1–18 Fabrics View - Zone Sets Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38  
1–19 HAFM Services Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39  
1–20 Multi-mode and Single-mode Loopback Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43  
1–21 Fiber-Optic Protective Plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44  
1–22 Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44  
3–1  
3–2  
3–3  
3–4  
3–5  
3–6  
3–7  
3–8  
3–9  
HAFM Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4  
Product Status Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5  
Switch Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6  
Hardware Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8  
Link Incident Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9  
Threshold Alert Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11  
Port List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13  
FRU List View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15  
Node List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16  
3–10 Zone Sets View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18  
3–11 Hardware View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20  
3–12 Port Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21  
3–13 Performance View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24  
3–14 Port Diagnostics Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27  
3–15 Channel Wrap On for Port n Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30  
3–16 Swap Ports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31  
3–17 Save Data Collection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32  
3–18 Data Collection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33  
3–19 Clean Fiber-Optic Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34  
5–1  
5–2  
Front-Accessible FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1  
Rear-Accessible FRUs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1–1  
Status Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24  
Operating Status - Status Bar and Switch Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36  
HAFM Services Status Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40  
Factory-Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1  
MAP Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2  
Event Codes versus Maintenance Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2  
Factory-Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2  
ESD Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1  
Front-Accessible FRU Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2  
Rear-Accessible FRU Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3  
Miscellaneous Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3  
1–2  
1–3  
2–1  
2–2  
2–3  
3–1  
4–1  
5–1  
5–2  
5–3  
edge switch 2/16 installation guide  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Guide  
This manual describes the service procedures for the hp StorageWorks edge  
switch 2/16.  
Intended Audience  
This publication is intended for service personnel, and any individuals who monitor,  
configure, and repair the edge switch 2/16.  
Related Documentation  
In addition to this guide, HP provides corresponding information:  
hp StorageWorks product in a SAN environment - planning guide for director  
2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32, A6534-96025/AA-RS2DA-TE  
hp StorageWorks SNMP reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and  
edge switch 2/32, A6534-96026/AA-RQ7BB-TE  
hp StorageWorks CLI reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and  
edge switch 2/32, A6534-96027/AA-RQ7AB-TE  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 installation guide,  
A7283-96001/AA-RSTZA-TE  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 service manual, A7283-96002/AA-RS2GA-TE  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 product manager user guide,  
A7283-96003/AA-RS2HA-TE  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 release notes, A7283-96004/AV-RSU0A-TE  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/32 flexport upgrade instructions,  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 installation guide,  
A7284-96001/AA-RSU2A-TE  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
About this Guide  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 product manager user guide,  
A7284-96003/AA-RS2KA-TE  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 release notes, A7284-96004/AV-RSU3A-TE  
hp StorageWorks edge switch rack mount installation instructions,  
A7283-96004/AA-RT4MA-TE  
hp StorageWorks HAFM server installation guide, A6582-96001/AA-RT4KA-TE  
hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user guide, A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE  
hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager release notes, A6575-96004/AV-RQZJC-TE  
hp StorageWorks SFP transceiver installation instructions,  
A6534-96030/AA-RSS3A-TE  
Document Conventions  
The conventions included in Table 1 apply.  
Table 1: Document Conventions  
Element  
Convention  
Blue text: Figure 1  
Bold  
Cross-reference links  
Key names, menu items, buttons, and  
dialog box titles  
File names, application names, and text Italics  
emphasis  
User input, command names, system  
responses (output and messages)  
Monospace font  
COMMAND NAMES are uppercase  
unless they are case sensitive  
Variables  
Monospace, italic font  
Website addresses  
Sans serif font (http://thenew.hp.com)  
xiv  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About this Guide  
Symbols in Text  
These symbols may be found in the text of this manual. They have the following  
meanings.  
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions  
in the warning could result in bodily harm or loss of life.  
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could  
result in damage to equipment or data.  
IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying information or specific instructions.  
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents commentary, sidelights, or interesting points of  
information.  
Symbols on Equipment  
Any enclosed surface or area of the equipment marked with these  
symbols indicates the presence of electrical shock hazards. Enclosed  
area contains no operator serviceable parts.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from electrical shock hazards, do  
not open this enclosure.  
Any RJ-45 receptacle marked with these symbols indicates a network  
interface connection.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, or damage to the  
equipment, do not plug telephone or telecommunications connectors into  
this receptacle.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About this Guide  
Any surface or area of the equipment marked with these symbols  
indicates the presence of a hot surface or hot component. Contact with  
this surface could result in injury.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the  
surface to cool before touching.  
Power supplies or systems marked with these symbols indicate the  
presence of multiple sources of power.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury from electrical shock,  
remove all power cords to completely disconnect power from the  
power supplies and systems.  
Any product or assembly marked with these symbols indicates that the  
component exceeds the recommended weight for one individual to  
handle safely.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the  
equipment, observe local occupational health and safety requirements  
and guidelines for manually handling material.  
Rack Stability  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment, be  
sure that:  
The leveling jacks are extended to the floor.  
The full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.  
In single rack installations, the stabilizing feet are attached to the rack.  
In multiple rack installations, the racks are coupled.  
Only one rack component is extended at any time. A rack may become  
unstable if more than one rack component is extended for any reason.  
xvi  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About this Guide  
Getting Help  
If you still have a question after reading this manual, contact an HP authorized service  
provider or access our website: http://thenew.hp.com.  
HP Technical Support  
In North America, call technical support at 1-800-652-6672, available 24 hours a day,  
7 days a week.  
NOTE: For continuous quality improvement, calls may be recorded or monitored.  
Outside North America, call technical support at the nearest location. Telephone  
numbers for worldwide technical support are listed on the HP website under support:  
Be sure to have the following information available before calling:  
Technical support registration number (if applicable)  
Product serial numbers  
Product model names and numbers  
Applicable error messages  
Operating system type and revision level  
Detailed, specific questions  
HP Website  
The HP website has the latest information on this product, as well as the latest drivers.  
website, select the appropriate product or solution.  
HP Authorized Reseller  
For the name of your nearest HP Authorized Reseller:  
In the United States, call 1-800-345-1518  
In Canada, call 1-800-263-5868  
Elsewhere, see the HP website for locations and telephone numbers:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
General InformationI  
The hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 provides dynamic switched connections  
between Fibre Channel servers and devices in a storage area network (SAN)  
environment. SANs introduce the concept of server-to-device networking and  
multi-switch fabrics, eliminate requirements for dedicated connections, and enable the  
enterprise to become data centric.  
A SAN provides speed, high capacity, and flexibility for the enterprise, and is  
primarily based upon Fibre Channel architecture. The switch implements Fibre  
Channel technology that provides a bandwidth of 2.125 gigabits per second,  
redundant switched data paths, a scalable number of active ports, and long  
transmission distances (up to 35 kilometers).  
This chapter describes the switch and attached hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager  
(HAFM) server. The chapter specifically discusses:  
Switch management, error-detection and reporting features, serviceability  
features, zoning, multi-switch fabrics, and specifications.  
The HAFM server and minimum hardware specifications.  
Remote workstation configurations and hardware specifications.  
Maintenance approach.  
Field-replaceable units (FRUs).  
Connectors and indicators.  
Software diagnostic features.  
Tools and test equipment.  
Switch Description  
The switch can be installed on a table or desk top, or mounted in an equipment cabinet  
or in any standard equipment rack.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
General InformationI  
Multiple switches and the HAFM server communicate on a local area network (LAN)  
through one or more 10/100Base-T Ethernet hubs. One or more 12-port Ethernet hubs  
are optional and can be ordered with the switch. Up to three hubs are daisy-chained as  
required to provide additional Ethernet connections as more switches (or other  
Hewlett Packard managed products) are installed on a customer network.  
Figure 1–1 illustrates the switch, HAFM server, and Ethernet hub.  
HAFM Server  
HP Hub  
ProCurve  
10/100 Hu  
1
7
2
8
3
H
P
J
3
2
9
4
A
b
12  
4
5
6
Link  
100  
1
2X  
Power  
Fault  
11 12 Link  
100  
Port  
3X  
1
Only  
4X  
5X  
6X  
Reset  
Act  
Col  
MDI-X  
(out)  
MDI  
(
in)  
7
11X  
12X  
Storag  
eWork  
s
direc  
tor 2/6  
4
10/100  
RST  
PWR  
ERR  
Switch  
Figure 1–1: Switch, HAFM server, and Ethernet Hub  
The switch provides dynamic switched connections for servers and devices, supports  
mainframe and open-systems interconnection (OSI) computing environments, and  
provides data transmission and flow control between device node ports (N_Ports) as  
dictated by the Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling Interface (FC-PH 4.3). Through  
interswitch links (ISLs), the switch can connect additional switches to form a Fibre  
Channel multi-switch fabric.  
The switch provides connectivity for devices manufactured by multiple original  
equipment manufacturers (OEMs). To determine if an OEM product can communicate  
through connections provided by the switch, or if communication restrictions apply,  
refer to the supporting publications for the product or contact your Hewlett Packard  
marketing representative  
1–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General InformationI  
Switch Management  
Out-of-band (non-Fibre Channel) management access to HP products is provided  
through an Ethernet LAN connection to a switch front panel. The following  
out-of-band management access methods are provided:  
Management through the HAFM application. The HAFM application includes the  
edge switch 2/16 Product Manager application. This GUI resides on the HAFM  
server and provides a single point of management for all directors and switches.  
Operators at remote workstations can connect to the HAFM server through the  
local HAFM application and associated Product Manager applications to manage  
and monitor switches controlled by the HAFM server. A maximum of nine  
concurrent users (including a local user) can log in to the HAFM application.  
Management using simple network management protocol (SNMP). An SNMP  
agent is implemented through the HAFM application that allows administrators  
on SNMP management workstations to access product management information  
using any standard network management tool. Administrators can assign Internet  
Protocol (IP) addresses and corresponding community names for up to six SNMP  
workstations functioning as SNMP trap message recipients.  
Management through the Internet using the EWS interface installed on the switch.  
This interface supports configuration, statistics monitoring, and basic operation of  
the product, but does not offer all the capabilities of the corresponding Product  
Manager application. Administrators launch the web server interface from a  
remote PC by entering the product’s IP address as the Internet uniform resource  
locator (URL), then entering a user name and password at a login screen. The PC  
browser then becomes a management console.  
Management through a customer-supplied remote workstation communicating  
with the HAFM server through a corporate intranet.  
Management through the command line interface (CLI). The CLI allows you to  
access many HAFM and Product Manager applications while entering commands  
during a telnet session with the switch. The primary purpose of the CLI is to  
automate management of a large number of switches using scripts. The CLI is not  
an interactive interface; no checking is done for pre-existing conditions and no  
prompts display to guide users through tasks. Refer to the hp StorageWorks CLI  
reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32  
(A6534-96027/AA-RQ7AB-TE).  
Figure 1–2 illustrates an example of out-of-band product management. In the figure,  
the managed product is an edge switch 2/16.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
General InformationI  
2
10/100 Mbps  
10/100 Mbps  
Corporate LAN  
Corporate LAN  
3
1
ProCur  
ve 10/100  
1
7
2
8
Hub 12  
3
9
4
5
HP J3294  
6
Link  
100  
A
1
Power  
Fault  
1
0
1
1
12 Link  
100  
Port  
Only  
2X  
8X  
3X  
9X  
1
4X  
5X  
6X  
Reset  
Act  
Col  
MDI-X  
(out)  
MDI  
(in)  
10X  
2
4
Internet  
Connection  
Storag  
eWork  
s
direc  
tor 2/6  
4
10/100  
RST  
PWR  
R  
6
5
SHR-2314d  
1
SNMP management  
workstation  
4
5
6
HAFM server  
Web browser  
Edge switch 2/16  
2
3
Remote user workstation  
HP Ethernet hub  
Figure 1–2: Out-of-Band Product Management  
The following inband management access methods are provided as options:  
Management through the product’s open-system management server (OSMS) that  
communicates with an application client. The application resides on an  
open-systems interconnection (OSI) device attached to a switch port, and  
communicates using Fibre Channel common transport (FC-CT) protocol. Product  
operation, port connectivity, zoning, and fabric control are managed through a  
device-attached console.  
Management through the product’s Fibre Connection (FICON) management  
server (FMS) that communicates with the IBM System Automation for OS/390  
(SA OS/390) operating system. The operating system resides on an IBM  
System/390 or zSeries 900 Parallel Enterprise Server attached to a director or  
switch port, and communicates through a FICON channel. Control of connectivity  
and statistical product monitoring are provided through a host-attached console.  
1–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
General InformationI  
Figure 1–3 on page 1-5 illustrates inband product management. In the figure, the  
managed product is an edge switch 2/16. The figure shows the following elements:  
1
4
FICON  
2
Channel  
31  
29  
25  
23  
TM  
21  
19  
30  
17  
16  
28  
1
14  
Fibre Channel  
Connection  
26  
13  
12  
2
11  
22  
9
8
20  
7
6
18  
5
4
3
2
1
0
10  
PWR  
ERR  
3
SHR-2364b  
1
2
S/390 or zSeries 900 parallel  
Enterprise Server  
3
4
Edge switch 2/16  
OSI server  
Host-attached console  
Figure 1–3: Inband Product Management  
Error-Detection, Reporting, and Serviceability Features  
The switch provides the following error-detection, reporting, and serviceability  
features:  
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on switch FRUs and adjacent to Fibre Channel  
ports that provide visual indicators of hardware status or malfunctions.  
System and threshold alerts, event logs, audit logs, link incident logs, threshold  
alert logs, and hardware logs that display switch, Ethernet link, and Fibre Channel  
link status at the HAFM server or on a remote workstation.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
General InformationI  
Diagnostic software that performs power-on self-tests (POSTs) and port  
diagnostics (internal loopback, external loopback, and Fibre Channel (FC) wrap  
tests). The FC wrap test applies only when the switch is configured to operate in  
S/390 mode.  
Automatic notification of significant system events (to support personnel or  
administrators) through e-mail messages or the call-home feature.  
An internal modem in the HAFM server for HP call-home support  
NOTE: For directors and switches installed in some legacy environments, call-home  
notification requires installation of HP Proactive Service software. This service is offered at no  
additional charge for subsystems covered under an on-site warranty or on-site storage  
hardware support contract. To register or order Proactive Service software, contact your HP  
customer service representative.  
An RS-232 maintenance port at the rear of the switch (port access is password  
protected) that enables installation or service personnel to change the switch’s  
internet protocol (IP) address, subnet mask, and gateway address; or to run  
diagnostics and isolate system problems through a local or remote terminal.  
Redundant FRUs; (small form factor pluggable (SFP)) optical transceivers, power  
supplies, and cooling fans that are removed or replaced without disrupting switch  
or Fibre Channel link operation.  
A modular design that enables quick removal and replacement of FRUs without  
tools or equipment.  
Concurrent port maintenance. SFPs and Fiber-optic cables are removed and  
attached to ports without interrupting other ports or switch operation.  
Beaconing to assist service personnel in locating a specific port or switch. When  
port beaconing is enabled, the amber LED associated with the port flashes. When  
unit beaconing is enabled, the system error indicator on the front panel flashes.  
Beaconing does not affect port or switch operation.  
Data collection through the product manager application to help isolate system  
problems. The data includes a memory dump file and audit, hardware, and  
engineering logs.  
Status monitoring of redundant FRUs and alternate Fibre Channel data paths to  
ensure continued switch availability in case of failover. The HAFM application  
queries the status of each backup FRU daily. A backup FRU failure is indicated by  
an illuminated amber LED.  
1–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
General InformationI  
Simple network management protocol (SNMP) management using the Fibre  
Alliance MIB that runs on the HAFM server. Up to 12 authorized management  
workstations can be configured through the HAFM application to receive  
unsolicited SNMP trap messages. The trap messages indicate operational state  
changes and failure conditions.  
SNMP management using the Fibre Channel Fabric Element MIB, transmission  
control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) MIB-II definition (RFC 1213), and a  
product-specific MIB, all of which run on each switch. Up to 12 authorized  
management workstations can be configured through the product manager  
application to receive unsolicited SNMP trap messages. The trap messages  
indicate switch operational state changes and failure conditions.  
NOTE: For more information about SNMP support provided by Hewlett Packard products, refer  
to the hp StorageWorks SNMP reference guide for director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge  
switch 2/32 (A6534-96026/AA-RQ7BB-TE).  
Zoning Feature  
The switch supports a name server zoning feature that partitions attached devices into  
restricted-access groups called zones. Devices in the same zone can recognize and  
communicate with each other through switched port-to-port connections. Devices in  
separate zones cannot communicate with each other.  
Zoning is configured by authorizing or restricting access to name server information  
associated with device N_Ports that attach to switch fabric ports (F_Ports). A zone  
member is specified by the port number to which a device is attached, or by the  
eight-byte (16-digit) worldwide name (WWN) assigned to the host bus adapter (HBA)  
or Fibre Channel interface installed in a device. A device can belong to multiple  
zones.  
CAUTION: If zoning is implemented by port number, a change to the switch fiber-optic  
cable configuration disrupts zone operation and may incorrectly include or exclude a  
device from a zone.  
If zoning is implemented by WWN, removal and replacement of a device HBA or Fibre  
Channel interface (thereby changing the device WWN) disrupts zone operation and  
may incorrectly include or exclude a device from a zone.  
In Open Fabric mode, only zoning by WWN is supported. Zoning by port numbers is  
not.  
Zones are grouped into zone sets. A zone set is a group of zones that is enabled  
(activated) or disabled across all switches in a multi-switch fabric. Only one zone set  
per fabric can be enabled at one time.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
General InformationI  
Multi-Switch Fabrics  
A Fibre Channel topology that consists of one or more interconnected switches or  
switch elements is called a fabric. Operational software provides the ability to  
interconnect switches (through expansion port (E_Port) connections) to form a  
multi-switch fabric. The data transmission path through the fabric is typically  
determined by fabric elements and is user-transparent. Subject to zoning restrictions,  
devices attached to any interconnected switch can communicate with each other  
through the fabric.  
Because a multi-switch fabric is typically complex, maintenance personnel should be  
aware that several factors can degrade fabric performance or cause connectivity  
failures. These factors include:  
Domain ID assignment - Each switch in a fabric is identified by a unique domain  
ID that ranges from 1 through 31. A domain ID of 0 is invalid. If two operational  
fabrics join, they determine if any domain ID conflicts exist between the fabrics.  
If one or more conflicts exist, the E_Ports that form the interswitch link (ISL)  
segment to prevent the fabrics from joining.  
Zoning - In a multi-switch fabric, zoning is configured on a fabric-wide basis, and  
any change to the zoning configuration is applied to all switches in the fabric. To  
ensure zoning is consistent across a fabric, the following rules are enforced when  
two fabrics (zoned or unzoned) join:  
Fabric A unzoned and Fabric B unzoned - The fabrics join successfully,  
and the resulting fabric remains unzoned.  
Fabric A zoned and Fabric B unzoned - The fabrics join successfully, and  
fabric B automatically inherits the zoning configuration from fabric A.  
Fabric A unzoned and Fabric B zoned - The fabrics join successfully, and  
fabric A automatically inherits the zoning configuration from fabric B.  
Fabric A zoned and Fabric B zoned - The fabrics join successfully only if  
the zone configurations can be merged. If the fabrics cannot join, the  
connecting ports segment and the fabrics remain independent.  
Zone configurations for two fabrics are compatible (the zones can join) if the  
active zone set name is identical for each fabric, and if zones with the same name  
have identical elements.  
Port segmentation - When an ISL activates, the switches exchange operating  
parameters to determine if they are compatible and can join to form a single  
fabric. If incompatible, the connecting E_Port at each switch segments to prevent  
1–8  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
General InformationI  
the creation of a single fabric. A segmented link transmits only Class F traffic; the  
link does not transmit Class 2 or Class 3 traffic. The following conditions cause  
ports to segment:  
Incompatible operating parameters - either the resource allocation time-out  
value (R_A_TOV) or error-detect time-out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent  
between switches. To prevent port segmentation, the same E_D_TOV and  
R_A_TOV must be specified for each switch.  
Duplicate domain IDs - one or more domain ID conflicts are detected.  
Incompatible zoning configurations - zoning configurations for the  
switches are not compatible.  
Build fabric protocol error - a protocol error is detected during the process  
of forming the fabric.  
No principal switch - no switch in the fabric is capable of becoming the  
principal switch.  
NOTE: At least one director or switch in a multi-switch fabric must be set to either principal or  
default, making it capable of becoming principal switch. If all directors and switches are set to  
never principal, all ISLs will segment (Reason code 05).  
Unresponsive switch - Each switch in a fabric periodically verifies operation  
of all attached switches. An ISL segments if the attached switch does not  
respond to a verification request.  
ELP retransmission failure timeout-a switch that exhibits a hardware  
failure or connectivity problem cannot transmit or receive Class F frames. The  
switch did not receive a response to multiple exchange link protocol (ELP)  
frames, did not receive a fabric login (FLOGI) frame, and cannot join an  
operational fabric.  
Switch Specifications  
This section lists the physical characteristics, storage and shipping environment,  
operating environment, and service clearances for the switch.  
Physical Characteristics  
Dimensions:  
Width: 17.5 inches (44.5 centimeters)  
Depth: 25 inches (63.5 centimeters)  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Weight: 26 pounds (11.8 kilograms)  
Power Requirements:  
Input voltage: 100 to 230 VAC  
Input Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz  
Plan for single phase or phase-to-phase connections and 5-ampere dedicated  
service  
Airflow Clearance in Rack:  
Sides: None  
Top and Bottom: None  
Front and Rear: 3.0 inches (7.6 centimeters)  
Heat Dissipation:  
410 BTU/Hr  
Shock and Vibration Tolerance:  
60 Gs for 10 milliseconds without nonrecoverable errors  
Acoustical Noise:  
70 dB “A” scale  
Inclination:  
°
10 maximum  
Storage and Shipping Environment  
Protective packaging must be provided to protect the switch under all shipping  
methods (domestic and international).  
Shipping temperature:  
°
°
°
°
-40 F to 140 F (-40 C to 60 C)  
Storage temperature:  
°
°
°
°
34 F to 140 F (1 C to 60 C)  
Shipping relative humidity:  
5% to 100%  
Storage relative humidity:  
1–10  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General InformationI  
5% to 80%  
Maximum wet-bulb temperature:  
°
°
84 F (29 C)  
Altitude:  
40,000 feet (12,192 meters)  
Operating Environment  
Temperature:  
°
°
°
°
40 F to 104 F (4 C to 40 C)  
Relative humidity:  
8% to 80%  
Maximum wet-bulb temperature:  
°
°
81 F (27 C)  
Altitude:  
10,000 feet (3,048 meters)  
HAFM Server Description  
The HAFM server (Figure 1–1) is a notebook personal computer (PC) that provides a  
central point of control for up to 48 LAN-connected directors or edge switches.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Figure 1–4: HAFM Server  
The server is mounted in a slide-out drawer in an HP-supplied equipment rack. The  
HAFM server or Internet access to the embedded web server interface is required to  
install, configure, and manage the switch.  
Although a configured switch operates normally without HAFM server intervention,  
an attached server should operate at all times to monitor switch operation, log events  
and configuration changes, and report failures.  
The HAFM server provides an auto-detecting 10/100 Mbps LAN connection,  
provided by an internal Ethernet adapter card. This LAN port attaches to the  
customer’s public intranet to allow access from remote user workstations. An optional  
Ethernet adapter card (not supplied by HP) can be installed in the personal computer  
memory card international association (PCMCIA) slot to provide a connection to a  
private LAN segment for dedicated switch communication.  
HAFM Server Specifications  
The following list summarizes hardware specifications for the HAFM server notebook  
platform. Current platforms may ship with more enhanced hardware, such as a faster  
processor, additional random- access memory (RAM), or a higher-capacity hard drive  
or removable disk drive.  
HP Omnibook 6200 PC with color monitor, keyboard, keyboard-mounted  
trackpad (mouse), and U. S. power cord.  
®
Intel Pentium III™ processor with an 800 megahertz (MHz) or greater clock  
speed, running the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system.  
1–12  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
General InformationI  
Eighteen gigabyte (GB) or greater internal hard drive.  
160 megabyte (MB) or greater RAM.  
Removable DVD/CD-ROM drive.  
®
Removable 100 MB disk (Zip ) drive.  
56K internal modem.  
One internal 10/100 Mbps Ethernet adapter with RJ-45 connector (provides public  
LAN interface to switches and remote clients).  
Ethernet Hub  
The HAFM Server and managed switches connect through a rack- mounted 10/100  
Base-T Ethernet hub. Figure 1–5 illustrates the optional 12-port hub.  
ProCur  
ve  
HP  
J32  
94A  
10/100  
1
7
2
8
Hub  
3
9
12  
4
5
6
Link  
100  
1
10  
2X  
Power  
Fault  
11  
12  
3X  
Link  
100  
Por  
t
1
O
nly  
4X  
5X  
6X  
Reset  
Act  
Col  
MDI-X  
(out)  
MDI  
(in)  
7X  
8X  
9X  
10X  
11X  
12X  
Figure 1–5: 12-Port Ethernet Hub  
Embedded Web Server Interface  
Administrators or operators with a browser-capable PC and an Internet connection can  
monitor and manage the switch through an embedded web server interface. The  
application provides a graphical user interface (GUI) similar to the product manager  
application, and supports switch configuration, statistics monitoring, and basic  
operation.  
Maintenance Approach  
Whenever possible, the maintenance approach instructs service personnel to perform  
fault isolation and repair procedures without degrading or interrupting operation of the  
switch, attached devices, or associated applications. Switch fault isolation begins  
when one or more of the following occur:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
General InformationI  
System event information displays at the attached HAFM server, a remote  
workstation communicating with the HAFM server, or the embedded web server  
interface.  
LEDs on the switch front panel or FRUs illuminate to indicate a hardware  
malfunction.  
An unsolicited SNMP trap message is received at a management workstation,  
indicating an operational state change or failure.  
Notification of a significant system event is received at a designated support  
center through an e-mail message or the call-home feature.  
System events can be related to a:  
Switch or HAFM server failure (hardware or software).  
Ethernet LAN communication failure between the switch and HAFM server  
Link failure between a port and attached device.  
ISL failure or segmentation of an E_port.  
Fault isolation and service procedures vary depending on the system event  
through maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs) documented in Chapter 3. MAPs  
consist of step-by-step procedures that prompt service personnel for information or  
describe a specific action to be performed. MAPs provide information to interpret  
system event information, isolate a switch failure to a single FRU, remove and replace  
the failed FRU, and verify switch operation. The fault isolation process normally  
begins with "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7.  
Ensure the correct switch is selected for service (if the HAFM server manages  
multiple switches or other Hewlett Packard products) by enabling unit beaconing at  
the failed switch. The amber system error LED on the switch front panel blinks when  
beaconing is enabled. Instructions to enable beaconing are incorporated into MAP  
steps.  
Remote Workstation Configurations  
Using a standard web browser, the HAFM and product manager applications can be  
downloaded and installed on remote user workstations that are LAN-attached to the  
HAFM server. Operators at these workstations can manage and monitor switches  
controlled by the HAFM server. A maximum of nine concurrent users (including a  
local user) can log in to the HAFM application.  
1–14  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General InformationI  
Each remote workstation must have access to the LAN segment on which the HAFM  
server is installed. Switch administrative functions are accessed through the LAN and  
HAFM server. The LAN interface can be:  
Part of the customer’s public 10/100 Mbps LAN segment that provides access to  
managed switches. This switch-to-HAFM server LAN connection is part of the  
equipment rack installation and is required. Connection of remote workstations  
through the hub is optional. This type of network configuration using one Ethernet  
connection through the HAFM server is shown in Figure 1–6.  
This single-Ethernet connection is supported by HP, is Open View-Storage Node  
Manager (OV-SNM) compatible, and is the recommended configuration for a  
typical HP installation at a customer site. LAN security is provided by restricting  
password access and disabling the SNMP agent, embedded Web server interface,  
and command line interface (telnet access) for each managed switch.  
NOTE: The Ethernet adapter in the HAFM server provides an auto-detecting 10/100 Mbps  
connection. Depending on speed restrictions imposed by other LAN-attached devices, the LAN  
segment that connects the HAFM server to manage directors and switches operates at either  
ten or 100 Mbps.  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Storag  
eWork  
s
direc  
tor 2/6  
4
10/100  
RST  
PWR  
ERR  
Customer Intranet  
Customer Intranet  
(10/100 Mbps)  
(10/100 Mbps)  
Remote  
Workstation  
Storag  
eWork  
s
direc  
tor 2/6  
4
10/100  
RST  
PWR  
ERR  
Switch  
Figure 1–6: Typical Network Configuration (One Ethernet Connection)  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General InformationI  
Part of a second HAFM server interface that connects to a customer’s private  
intranet and allows operation of the product manager application from remote user  
PCs or workstations. Connection to this LAN segment is optional and depends on  
customer requirements. A network configuration using both Ethernet connections  
is shown in Figure 1–7.  
Remote  
Workstation  
10/100  
RST  
31  
30  
29  
28  
25  
24  
TM  
23  
22  
0  
19  
17  
13  
1
1
8
5
4
3
18  
0
16  
12  
PWR  
ERR  
10  
Switch  
HAFM  
Server  
Customer Intranet  
Customer Intranet  
(10/100 Mbps)  
(10/100 Mbps)  
ProCurve 10  
1
7
/100 Hub 12  
2
8
3
9
4
5
H
P
J
3
2
9
4
A
6
k  
0  
1
2X  
Power  
Fault  
10  
11 12 k  
0  
Port  
Only  
1
3X  
4X  
5X  
6X  
Reset  
Act  
Col  
MDI-X  
(out)  
MDI  
(in)  
7X  
8X  
9
0
X  
HP Hub  
10/100  
RST  
31  
29  
28  
25  
24  
TM  
23  
22  
0  
19  
18  
17  
13  
30  
1
1
6
5
4
3
0
16  
Remote  
Workstation  
14  
2  
PWR  
ERR  
10  
Switch  
Figure 1–7: Typical Network Configuration (Two Ethernet Connections)  
Although this dual Ethernet connection is supported by HP, it is not OV-SNM  
compatible, requires installation of an additional PCMCIA LAN adapter card (not  
supplied by HP), and is not the recommended configuration for a typical new HP  
installation at a customer site.  
Refer to the hp StorageWorks product in a SAN environment: planning guide for  
director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32  
(A6534-96025/AA-RS2DA-TE) for additional information about network  
configurations.  
CAUTION: Prior to servicing a switch or HAFM server, determine the Ethernet LAN  
configuration. Installation of switches and the HAFM server on a public customer  
intranet can complicate problem determination and fault isolation.  
Minimum Remote Console Hardware Specifications  
Client HAFM and product manager applications download and install to remote  
workstations (from the HAFM server) using a standard web browser. The applications  
operate on platforms that meet the following minimum system requirements:  
1–16  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Desktop or notebook PC with color monitor, keyboard, and mouse, using an Intel  
®
Pentium processor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, and using the  
®
®
®
Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Linux  
2.2 operating system.  
UNIX workstation with color monitor, keyboard, and mouse, using a:  
®
®
— Hewlett-Packard HA PA-RISC processor with a 400 MHz or greater clock  
®
speed, using the HP-UX 11 or higher operating system.  
®
— Sun Microsystems UltraSPARC™-II processor with a 400 MHz or greater  
clock speed, using the SunOS™ version 5.5.1 or higher operating system, or  
Solaris™ version 2.5.1 or higher operating system.  
®
— IBM PowerPC microprocessor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, or  
POWER3™ microprocessor with a 400 MHz or greater clock speed, using the  
AIX version 4.3.3 or higher operating system.  
At least 24 MB available on the internal hard drive.  
128 MB or greater RAM.  
Video card supporting 256 colors at 800 x 600 pixel resolution.  
Ethernet network adapter.  
®
Java™-enabled Internet browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer (version  
®
4.0 or later) or Netscape Navigator (version 4.0 or later).  
Field Replaceable Units  
The switch provides a modular design that enables quick removal and replacement of  
FRUs small form factor pluggable SFP optical transceivers, power supplies, and fans.  
Figure 1–8 illustrates the front of the switch. The switch front panel includes:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General InformationI  
StorageWorks edge switch 2/16  
PWR  
ERR  
IML  
1
2
5
6
3
4
5
6
7
Initial machine load (IML) button  
Ethernet LAN connector  
8
9
Port LEDs  
Error LED (amber)  
SFP fiber optic connectors  
10 Power LED (green)  
Figure 1–8: Edge Switch 2/16 (front view)  
2
3
3
2
4
1
1
2
Cooling fan (4)  
3
4
Power switches on power supplies (2)  
RS-232 maintenance port  
Power supply (2)  
Figure 1–9: Edge Switch 2/16 (rear view)  
Figure 1–9 illustrates the rear of the switch. The FRUs on the rear panel include two  
power supplies and three individual cooling fan FRUs with each fan FRU comprised  
of two individual fans.  
1–18  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General InformationI  
SFP Transceivers  
A single-mode or multi-mode fiber-optic cable attaches to a port through a pluggable  
small form factor (SFP) transceiver. The SFP provides a duplex LC interface, and can  
be detached from the switch port for easy replacement. Two fiber-optic transceiver  
types are available:  
Shortwave laser—Shortwave laser SFPs provide short-distance connections (2 to  
500 meters) through 50-micron or 62.5-micron multi-mode fiber.  
Longwave laser—Longwave laser SFPs provide long-distance connections (up to  
10 kilometers) through 9-micron single-mode fiber.  
Extended reach laser—Extended reach laser SFPs provide long-distance  
connections (up to 35 kilometers) through 9-micron single-mode fiber.  
Cooling Fans  
Three 2-fan FRUs (a total of six fans) provide cooling for the switch power supplies  
and the control processor (CTP) card, as well as redundancy for continued operation if  
a single fan fails.  
Each fan FRU can be replaced while the switch is operating.  
Power Supplies  
Redundant, load-sharing power supplies step down and rectify facility input power to  
provide 3.3 volts direct current (VDC), 5 VDC, and 12 VDC to the CTP card. The  
power supplies also provide input filtering, overvoltage protection, and overcurrent  
protection. Either power supply can be replaced while the switch is operational.  
Each power supply has a separate CTP card connection to allow for independent AC  
power sources. The power supplies are input-rated at 100 to 230 volts alternating  
current (VAC).  
Connectors and Indicators  
Connectors and indicators include the:  
Initial machine load (IML) button.  
Green power (PWR) and amber system error (ERR) LEDs.  
Green and amber status LEDs associated with FRUs.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
General InformationI  
RS-232 maintenance port.  
Initial Machine Load Button  
When the IML button (Figure 1–8) is pressed and held for three seconds, the switch  
performs an IML that takes approximately 30 seconds and resets the:  
Microprocessor and functional logic for the CTP card and loads firmware from  
FLASH memory.  
Ethernet LAN interface, causing the connection to the HAFM server to drop  
momentarily until the connection automatically recovers.  
Ports, causing all Fibre Channel connections to drop momentarily until the  
connections automatically recover.  
An IML should only be performed if a CTP card failure is indicated. Do not IML the  
switch unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support. As a  
precaution, the IML button is flush mounted to protect against accidental activation.  
Ethernet LAN Connector  
The front panel provides a 10/100 megabit per second (Mbps) RJ-45 twisted-pair  
connector (Figure 1–8) that attaches to an Ethernet LAN to provide communication  
with the HAFM server or an SNMP management workstation. Two green LEDs are  
associated with the LAN connector. When illuminated, the left LED indicates LAN  
operation at 10 Mbps, and the right LED indicates LAN operation at 100 Mbps.  
The PWR LED (Figure 1–8) illuminates when the switch is connected to facility AC  
power and powered on. If the LED extinguishes, a facility power source, power cord,  
or power distribution failure is indicated.  
The ERR LED (Figure 1–8) illuminates when the switch detects an event requiring  
immediate operator attention, such as a FRU failure. The LED remains illuminated as  
long as an event is active. The LED extinguishes when the Clear System Error Light  
function is selected from the product manager application. The LED blinks if unit  
beaconing is enabled. An illuminated ERR LED (indicating a failure) takes  
precedence over unit beaconing.  
1–20  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
General InformationI  
FRU Status LEDs  
Amber and green LEDs associated with switch FRUs provide status information as  
follows:  
Port SFP - Amber and green LEDs to the left of the port (Figure 1–8) illuminate,  
extinguish, or blink to indicate various port states (operational with active Fibre  
Channel traffic, operational but not communicating, beaconing, blocked, failed,  
inactive, or running diagnostics).  
Fan - An amber LED at the upper left corner of each fan FRU (Figure 1–9)  
illuminates if the fan fails or rotates too slowly.  
Power Supply - A green LED on each power supply (Figure 1–9) illuminates if  
the power supply is operational and receiving AC power.  
Maintenance Port  
The rear panel provides a 9-pin RS-232 maintenance port (Figure 1–9) that provides a  
connection for a local terminal or dial-in connection for a remote terminal. Although  
the port is typically used by authorized maintenance personnel, operations personnel  
can use the port to configure switch network addresses.  
Software Diagnostic Features  
The switch provides the following diagnostic software features that aid in fault  
isolation and repair of problems:  
FRUs provide on-board diagnostic and monitoring circuits that continuously  
report FRU status to the HAFM and product manager applications. These  
applications provide system alerts and logs that display failure and diagnostic  
information at the HAFM server or a remote workstation communicating with the  
HAFM server.  
The HAFM Services application that runs as a Windows 2000 service and  
provides an additional user interface to display operational status.  
The embedded web server interface that provides Internet access to isolate  
problems for a single switch.  
Unsolicited SNMP trap messages that indicate operational state changes or  
failures can be transmitted to up to 12 authorized management workstations.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
General InformationI  
E-mail messages or call-home reports from the HAFM server provide automatic  
notification of significant system events to designated support personnel or  
administrators.  
HAFM Diagnostics  
The HAFM application provides a Java-based GUI to manage, monitor, and isolate  
problems for multiple switches and multi-switch fabrics. The user interface operates  
locally on the HAFM server, or through an Ethernet LAN connection from a remote  
user workstation. The application starts automatically when the HAFM server is  
powered on or rebooted, and the default display is the main HAFM window, or  
Product View (Figure 1–10). If you are using a remote user workstation, see Log Into  
the HAFM in the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 product manager user guide  
(A7284-96003/AA-RS2KA-TE). Managed products (including switches) appear as  
icons in the window, and a set of view tabs appear at the top of the window. A status  
bar displays below the view area of the screen.  
Figures containing HAFM and product manager screens in this manual are included  
for illustration purposed only. These illustrations may not match exactly what you see  
through your server or workstation. Title bars have been removed from the  
illustrations, and fields in the illustrations may contain different data than the screens  
displayed on your system.  
NOTE: Icons shown in the Product View will vary, based on what is installed in the particular  
fabric being represented.  
The HAFM application is independent from the switch or other products managed by  
the HAFM server. Service personnel can perform the following maintenance and  
diagnostic functions:  
Display the operational status for each managed product.  
Display logs that provide service and diagnostic-related information.  
Open a product manager application to monitor or fault-isolate a specific switch.  
Select the Products tab to view hardware, node list, port list, performance, and  
FRU list views and to configure and diagnose hardware problems.  
Select the Fabrics tab to monitor or fault-isolate multi-switch fabric problems.  
1–22  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General InformationI  
Figure 1–10: Product View  
HAFM Status Symbols  
A status bar at the bottom of the Product View displays a colored symbol that  
indicates the worst-case status of any managed product in the Product View, that  
fabrics are persisted in the Fabrics View (double-click the Fabrics tab), and the status  
of the HAFM server. Table 1–1 illustrates and explains the meaning of the status  
symbols. If a switch is degraded but all other managed products are fully operational,  
a yellow triangle displays in the status bar, and adjacent to the icon representing the  
degraded switch. The remaining icons have a green circle adjacent to them. By  
double-clicking an icon or selecting from the View menu, service personnel can open  
a specific product manager application.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
A label below each icon identifies the switch by its configured name or IP address,  
and a colored status symbol beside each icon indicates the operational status of the  
switch.  
Table 1–1: Status Symbols  
Alert Symbol  
Meaning  
Green circle  
Status Bar: All managed products are fully operational and  
no failures are indicated.  
Next to Icon: The switch is fully operational and no failures are  
indicated.  
Yellow  
Status Bar: At least one managed product is operating in  
triangle  
degraded mode.  
Next to Icon: A redundant component failed or the switch is  
operating in degraded mode. Service is required.  
Red diamond  
(with yellow  
background)  
Status Bar: At least one managed product is not operational.  
Next to Icon: A critical failure occurred and the switch is not  
operational. Immediate service is required.  
Grey square  
Status Bar: The status of at least one managed product is  
unknown.  
Next to Icon: The switch status is unknown because of a network  
connection failure between the switch and HAFM server.  
Hardware View Layout and Function  
Double-click a switch icon on the Product View to open the product manager for that  
switch. When the application opens, the default display is the Hardware View  
(Figure 1–11). The main product manager window (Hardware View) is divided into  
five main areas as shown in Figure 1–11 menu bar, view tabs, status table, view panel,  
and status bar. Use features in these panels to configure switch operation, monitor  
performance, and access maintenance features.  
Menu Bar  
The menu bar on the product manager window displays tabs for the following menus:  
Product  
Configure  
Logs  
Maintenance  
1–24  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
General InformationI  
Help  
Click one of the tabs to display a list of menu options. Click an option to open a dialog  
box that allows you to perform configuration and maintenance tasks and view logs. If  
a menu option contains a check box, click in the box to add a check mark and enable a  
function. Click a check box containing a check mark to remove the check mark and  
disable the function.  
Product Manager Diagnostics  
The product manager application provides a Java-based GUI to manage, monitor, and  
isolate problems for a specific switch. The application operates locally on the HAFM  
server, or through an Ethernet LAN connection from a remote user workstation.  
Hardware View  
The hardware view (Figure 1–11)illustrates the following elements:  
1
2
Menu Bar  
View Tabs  
3
4
View Panel  
Status Bar  
Figure 1–11: Hardware View  
Service personnel can perform the following maintenance and diagnostic functions  
from the application:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
General InformationI  
Observe the operational status and state, name, description, and location for the  
selected switch at the status table at the top of the Hardware View.  
Observe green and amber LEDs that illuminate on graphical FRUs. These LEDs  
emulate LED operation on corresponding switch FRUs.  
Observe graphical FRUs that emulate the hardware configuration and operational  
status of the corresponding switch. Colored symbols appear on graphical FRUs to  
represent failed or degraded status. The colors and shapes are consistent with  
other status displays.  
Select a view tab to perform maintenance functions or display logs that provide  
service and diagnostic-related information.  
Select graphical FRUs with the mouse to display maintenance-related dialog  
boxes or perform maintenance functions.  
Status Table  
The switch status table displays the selected switch operational status, operational  
state, port state, name, description, and location. The Status field shows one of the  
following:  
Fully Operational - all switch FRUs and ports are fully operational, and no  
failures are indicated.  
Redundant Failure - a redundant FRU failed (power supply or fan FRU) and the  
switch is operational. In addition to the text message, the Status and State fields  
change to a yellow background (refer to Figure 1–12, Hardware View).  
Minor Failure - a failure occurred that decreased the operational capability of the  
switch (port SFP failure), but has not affected normal switching operations. In  
addition to the text message, the Status and State fields change to a yellow  
background (refer to Figure 1–12).  
Not Operational - the switch failed, is not operational, and requires immediate  
service. In addition to the text message, the Status and State fields change to a  
yellow background (refer to Figure 1–12).  
No Link - if the switch-to-HAFM server link is down, No Link appears in the  
Status field, the Status and State fields change to a yellow background, the Name,  
Description, and Location fields do not display, and the State field changes to a  
Reason field with a brief description of the link loss condition. For a description  
of link loss conditions, refer to MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication on  
page 2–39.  
The State field shows one of the following:  
1–26  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General InformationI  
Online - when the switch is set online, an unblocked port and all unbypassed ports  
are awaiting device login and are able to attach to a device. This state is  
configured through the Set Online State dialog box or following an IML.  
Offline - when the switch is set offline, all ports are offline and cannot accept a  
login from an attached device that requires a switch connection. This state is  
configured through the Set Online State dialog box.  
Coming online - this is a transitional state that occurs just prior to the switch  
going online. Unless a problem occurs, this state appears only briefly. The switch  
automatically transitions through this state after a power-up or reset procedure.  
Going offline - this is a transitional state that occurs just prior to the switch going  
offline. Unless a problem occurs, this state appears only briefly.  
LED Emulation  
At the Hardware View for the selected switch, simulated LEDs illuminate on FRUs  
and adjacent to port SFPs to emulate the operation of LEDs on the corresponding  
hardware. Simulated PWR and ERR LEDs also illuminate to emulate the operation of  
LEDs on the corresponding switch front panel. For an explanation of LED operation,  
refer to FRU Status LEDs.  
Product Manager Status Symbols  
A status bar at the bottom of the window displays a colored symbol (green circle,  
yellow triangle, red diamond with yellow background, or grey square) that indicates  
the worst-case status of the selected switch. The meaning of the status symbol is  
consistent with the icon explanations in Table 1–1.  
As an example, for a single SFP, fan, or power supply failure, a blinking red and  
yellow diamond displays at the FRU illustration in the Hardware View. However, the  
status bar displays a yellow triangle to indicate degraded operation. If a blinking red  
and yellow diamond displays over multiple FRUs, the status bar displays a red and  
yellow diamond, indicating a critical failure and the switch is not operational.  
The following colored symbols overlay graphical FRUs to represent failed or  
degraded status for the corresponding switch FRU.  
Failed FRU indicator - a blinking (color reversing) red and yellow diamond  
overlaying a FRU indicates the FRU failed and immediate service is required.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Attention indicator - a yellow triangle overlaying the top of a port SFP indicates  
the port is in a nonstandard mode or configuration, but did not actually fail. The  
indicator appears for any port having a state other than online, failed, blocked,  
bypassed, or loss of light. The indicator also appears to indicate a link incident  
(LIN) alert or a segmented port.  
View Tabs  
Click one of the view tabs across the top of the product manager window to display  
the following views in the View panel.  
Hardware  
Node List  
Port List  
Performance  
FRU List  
View Panel  
Views, selected from the view tabs, display in the view panel.  
Hardware View  
The Hardware View is the default view that displays in the view panel when you open  
the switch product manager. To return to this view from another view, click the  
Hardware view tab. Refer to Figure 1–12 for an example of this view.  
1–28  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
General InformationI  
Figure 1–12: Hardware View  
In the Hardware View, colored indicators reflect the status of actual LEDs on the  
switch FRUs. The status bar displays a symbol to represent the most degraded status  
currently reported by any of the switch FRUs. For example, for a port failure,  
indicated by a blinking red and yellow diamond on a port, a yellow triangle displays  
on the status bar to indicate a degraded condition. However, if a blinking red and  
yellow diamond displays over both power supplies, the status bar displays a blinking  
red and yellow diamond, which indicates a failure requiring immediate attention. For  
an explanation of the different status symbols and the reasons they display in the  
Hardware View or Port List View, refer to Table 1–1.  
Switch Menu  
Double-click the switch graphic away from a FRU to display the Switch Properties  
dialog box. Right-click a hardware graphic away from a FRU to display the following  
options:  
Switch Properties  
Enable Unit Beaconing  
Clear System Error Light  
Set Switch Date and Time  
Set Switch Online State  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
General InformationI  
Port Menu  
Double-click a port to display the Port Properties dialog box. Right-click a port to  
display the following options:  
Node Properties  
Port Technology  
Block Port  
Enable Beaconing  
Channel Wrap (S/390 mode only)  
Swap Ports (S/390 mode only)  
Port Diagnostics  
Clear Link Incident Alert(s)  
Reset Port  
Port Binding  
Clear Threshold Alert(s)  
Note that these same options are available when you click a port on the Hardware  
View and select the port secondary menu from the Product menu on the menu bar.  
NOTE: For Node Properties, if a node is not logged in a message box displays indicating that  
node information is not available.  
Port List View  
Select the Port List view tab. A table listing the port number, port name, port address  
(S/390 mode only), the block/unblock configuration, operating state, port type,  
operating speed, and alert condition displays in the view panel. Figure 1–13 shows an  
example of the Port List View.  
1–30  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Figure 1–13: Port List View  
The Port List View displays information about all ports installed in the switch. All data  
is dynamic and updates automatically. Double-click any row in this view to display  
the Port Properties dialog box for the port.  
Right-click a port row to display the same menu options that display when you  
right-click a port in the Hardware View or a port’s bar graph in the Performance View.  
These include:  
Port Properties  
Node Properties  
Port Technology  
Block Port  
Enable Beaconing  
Port Diagnostics  
Channel Wrap (S/390 mode only)  
Swap Ports (S/390 mode only)  
Clear Link Incident Alert(s)  
Port Binding  
Clear Threshold Alert(s)  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Note that these options are also available when you click a port row and select the Port  
secondary menu from the Product menu on the menu bar.  
FRU List View  
Select the FRU List view tab. A table with information about each of the FRUs  
installed in the switch displays in the view panel. All data is dynamic and updates  
automatically. Figure 1–14 shows an example of the FRU List View.  
Figure 1–14: FRU List View  
Node List View  
Select Node List from view tabs. Figure 1–15 on page 1-33 shows an example of the  
Node List View. This view displays a table with information about all node  
attachments or N_Ports that have logged into existing F_Ports on the switch. Only  
N_Ports display in the Node List View after nodes have logged in to the fabric. The  
1–32  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
General InformationI  
columns that display in the table include: port number where the node is attached, the  
port’s address (S/390 mode only), node type, WWN of the attached node (device), and  
BB_Credit used by the attached node.  
Double-click a port row to highlight it and display the Node Properties dialog box for  
that port.  
Right-click a port row to display the following menu options:  
Node Properties: Displays the Node Properties dialog box.  
Port Properties: Displays the Port Properties dialog box.  
Define Nickname. Displays the Define Nickname dialog box, where you can  
define a nickname to display for the attached device instead of the device's 8-byte  
WWN.  
Display options. Allows you to display attached devices listed under the Port  
WWN column in the Node List View by the device’s nickname configured through  
the Define Nickname menu option or the device's WWN.  
Figure 1–15: Node List View  
Note that these options are also available when you click a port row, then select the  
Port secondary menu from the Product tab on the menu bar.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General InformationI  
Performance View  
Select the Performance view tab from the menu. Figure 1–16 shows an example of the  
Performance View. This view provides a graphical display of performance for all 16  
ports. The top portion of the Performance View displays bar graphs that show the level  
of transmit/receive activity for each port. This information updates every five seconds.  
Each bar graph also shows the percentage link utilization for the port. A red arrow  
marks the highest utilization level reached since the Performance View was opened. If  
the system detects activity on a port, it represents minimal activity with at least one  
bar.  
When an end device (node) is logged into a port, moving the cursor over the port’s bar  
graph in the Performance View highlights the graph and displays a message with the  
world-wide name of the connected node. If the connected node has more than one  
port, this is the world-wide name of the specific port on the node. When a port is  
functioning as an expansion port (E_Port), the message is “E_Port.” When a port is  
not logged into an end-device (not functioning as an F_Port) or to another switch (not  
functioning as an E_Port), the message is the port’s current online state.  
Figure 1–16: Performance View  
Right-click a bar graph to display a menu of port-related actions. The options  
available on this menu are the same as those that are available when you right-click a  
port in the Hardware View or right-click a row in the Port List View. These include:  
1–34  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Port Properties  
Node Properties  
Port Technology  
Block Port  
Enable Beaconing  
Port Diagnostics  
Channel Wrap (S/390 mode only)  
Swap Ports (S/390 mode only)  
Clear Link Incident Alert(s)  
Reset Port  
Port Binding  
Clear Threshold Alert(s)  
Note that these same options are also available when you click a port’s graph, then  
select the Port secondary menu from the Product menu on the menu bar.  
The bottom portion of the Performance View displays cumulative statistical  
information for the port selected in the bar graph. Click the Refresh button to update  
the data with current data from the port.  
Click the Clear button to clear all of the counters to zero for the selected port and to  
place an entry in the audit log indicating that statistics for the port have been cleared.  
NOTE: Clearing the counters clears the statistics for all users.  
Status Bar  
The status bar is located along the bottom of the product manager window. This  
includes a symbol that displays at the left side of the bar and messages that display in  
the panel to the right of the symbol. The symbol indicates the current operating status  
of the switch and the messages display to provide more description of menu options as  
you move the cursor over the options under menu bar menus. Refer to Table 1–2 for the  
meaning of these status symbols and of the corresponding alert text that displays in the  
Edge-16 Status table at the top of the Hardware View in the view panel.  
If a gray square displays in the status bar (no Ethernet connection), a reason for the  
status displays in the Status table at the top of the Hardware View.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Table 1–2: Operating Status - Status Bar and Switch Status Table  
Symb  
ol  
Status  
Bar  
Switch Status  
Table Text  
Meaning  
Green  
Circle  
Fully Operational  
All components and installed  
ports are operational; no  
failures.  
Yellow  
Triangle  
Redundant Failure  
A redundant component has  
failed, such as a power supply,  
and the backup component  
has taken over operation.  
Minor Failure  
A failure occurred which has  
decreased the switch  
operational ability. Normal  
switching operations are not  
affected.  
One or more ports failed, but  
at least one port is still  
operational.  
A fan has failed or is not  
rotating sufficiently.  
Blinking  
Red and OPERATIONAL  
Yellow  
Diamond  
NOT  
A critical failure prevents the  
switch from performing  
fundamental switching  
operations.  
All fans failed.  
All installed ports failed.  
Both power supplies failed.  
Gray  
Square  
Never Connected  
Link Timeout  
Switch status is unknown. This  
occurs if the Ethernet network  
connection between the  
HAFM server and the switch  
cannot be established or if the  
CTP fails.  
Protocol Mismatch  
Duplicate Session  
Unknown Network  
Address  
Incorrect Product  
Type  
1–36  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Messages display to the right of the status symbol as you move the cursor over options  
under the menu bar menus. These messages provide additional details about tasks that  
you can perform through the menu option.  
Fabrics View  
Access the Fabrics View by clicking the Fabrics tab on the HAFM application  
window. The left panel of this view is the Fabric Tree, which is the expandable list of  
fabrics, products in fabrics, and nodes connected to products. The view area for the tab  
is to the right of the Fabric Tree.  
Click the Topology and Zone Set tabs at the bottom of the view area to change the  
views. The Topology tab (default) is illustrated in Figure 1–17 and the Zone Sets tab is  
illustrated in Figure 1–18.  
Figure 1–17: Fabrics View - Topology Tab  
Topology Tab  
The view area of the Topology tab provides details on all fabrics known to the HAFM  
server and HAFM application. This area displays product icons like those in the  
Products view, each representing switches and directors in fabrics that you select from  
a Fabric Tree on left panel of the view. Interswitch links (ISLs) display between the  
product icons as black lines. Fabrics are initially listed in the Fabric Tree by the world  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
General InformationI  
wide name (WWN) of the fabric’s principal switch, but if the fabric is “persisted,”  
they could have various names configured by the user. The selected fabric’s name  
displays above the icons at the top of the tab.  
Zone Set Tab  
This tab displays the currently active zone set for fabrics that you select from the left  
side of the view. The zones and zone members that make up the zone set display in a  
scrollable tree structure below the name of the active zone set. Menu options available  
in this tab allow you to quickly determine fabric zoning structure (zone sets, zones,  
and zone members), determine logged in and logged out zone members, save active  
zones under another name, determine the default zone members, deactivate/activate  
zone sets, and change the default zone.  
Figure 1–18: Fabrics View - Zone Sets Tab  
HAFM Services Application  
The hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) Services application provides both  
a central control point and server-side functionality (in a client-server environment)  
for all Hewlett Packard managed products. The application runs as a Windows 2000  
service and starts automatically when the HAFM server is powered on.  
1–38  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
General InformationI  
The user interface consists of the HAFM Services window (Figure 1–19), which  
provides HAFM application status and diagnostic information. The HAFM Services  
window consists of:  
An event table that displays HAFM Services events that occurred since the  
HAFM application was started.  
A status line at the bottom of the panel that provides a status indicator and  
message area.  
Figure 1–19: HAFM Services Window  
Event Table  
The event table displays the last ten events that occurred since the HAFM application  
was started. Events that occurred during a prior instance of the application do not  
display. If a new event occurs while ten events display, the oldest event is discarded. A  
deeper event history is maintained in the form of a log file viewed through the HAFM  
application.  
The events are internal error conditions detected by the HAFM application, and are  
not related to product-specific events reported by a switch. Events typically relate to  
HAFM audit log and file corruption, invalid product definition and firmware files,  
missing product services class, or missing version information.  
The event table contains the following columns:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Viewed - this column provides a check box associated with each event. Each  
check box allows service personnel to mark an event as viewed (acknowledged  
with appropriate action taken).  
Date/Time - the date and time the event was reported to the HAFM server.  
Product - the product associated with the event. Some events are associated with  
the HAFM application, while others are associated with a specific instance of the  
product manager application. In the latter case, the switch and configured name  
(or IP address) associated with the instance are displayed.  
Event - the numeric event code and a brief description of the event.  
Status Line  
The status line provides a status indicator and message area. HAFM status symbols  
are explained in Table 1–3.  
The HAFM application icon (upper left corner of the window) is dynamic and  
matches the status indicator. This feature allows users and service personnel to  
observe the status when the application is minimized to the Windows 2000 task bar.  
The message area briefly displays messages during HAFM application startup to  
indicate the progress of startup activities.  
Table 1–3: HAFM Services Status Symbols  
Alert Symbol  
Blank  
Meaning  
The status indicator is blank during HAFM  
application initialization.  
Green circle  
All events are viewed (acknowledged with  
appropriate action taken).  
Yellow  
triangle  
One or more nonfatal events have not  
been viewed.  
Red diamond  
(with yellow  
background)  
A fatal error occurred.  
1–40  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General InformationI  
Embedded Web Server Diagnostics  
If the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) server access is not available, the  
embedded web server interface provides a GUI accessed through the Internet (locally  
or remotely) to manage, monitor, and isolate problems for a single switch. This  
interface is available with switch firmware Version 1.2 (or later) installed, and does  
not replace nor offer the full management capability of the HAFM and switch product  
manager applications.  
The embedded web server interface can be opened from a standard web browser  
®
running Netscape Navigator 4.6 or higher or Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or  
higher. At the browser, enter the IP address of the switch as the Internet uniform  
resource locator (URL). When prompted at a login screen, enter a user name and  
password. When the interface opens, the default display is the View panel. Service  
personnel can perform the monitoring, configuration, maintenance and diagnostic  
functions as follows:  
View panel - quickly inspect and determine the operational status of the switch,  
and inspect switch properties and operating parameters, FRU properties, and Fibre  
Channel port properties.  
Configure panel - configure or change:  
— Switch ports.  
— Switch identification, date and time, operating parameters, and network  
addresses.  
— SNMP trap message recipients.  
— User passwords.  
Monitor panel - inspect and monitor:  
— Fibre Channel ports and port performance statistics.  
— The active zone set.  
— Event log entries, and clear the IML LED at the front panel.  
— Information about attached devices (nodes).  
Operations panel - perform the following operations and maintenance tasks:  
— Enable port beaconing and perform port diagnostics (internal and external  
— Reset Fibre Channel ports.  
— Set the switch online state.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General InformationI  
— Upgrade switch firmware.  
General tasks performed through the web server interface are similar in form and  
function to tasks performed through the HAFM and product manager applications,  
and are therefore not documented in this publication. For task information and  
descriptions, open the online user documentation (Help selection) that supports the  
interface.  
This publication provides instructions for switch installation and fault isolation using  
the embedded web server interface. Refer to the hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16  
installation guide, (A7284-96001/AA-RSU2A-TE) for installation and configuration  
tasks. Refer to Chapter 2 for fault isolation tasks.  
SNMP Trap Message Support  
Unsolicited SNMP trap messages that indicate switch operational state changes or  
failure conditions can be customer-configured to be transmitted to up to 12  
management workstations. If installed on a dedicated Ethernet LAN, the workstations  
communicate directly with each switch. If installed on a customer intranet, the  
workstations communicate with switches through the HAFM server.  
SNMP data and trap messages are defined in the Fibre Channel FE-MIB definition, a  
subset of the TCP/IP MIB-II definition (RFC1213), and a custom, switch-specific  
MIB. Customers can install these MIBs (in standard ASN.1 format) on any SNMP  
management workstation.  
Although SNMP trap messages are typically transmitted to customer personnel only,  
the messages may be provided to service personnel as initial notification of a switch  
problem or as information included in the fault isolation process. Generic SNMP traps  
include:  
coldStart - reports that the SNMP agent is reinitializing due to a switch reset.  
warmStart - reports that the SNMP agent is reinitializing due to a switch IPL.  
authorizationFailure - reports access by an unauthorized SNMP manager. This  
trap is configurable, and is disabled by default.  
Switch-specific SNMP traps specified in the custom MIB include Fibre Channel port  
operational state changes and FRU operational state changes.  
If authorized through the Configure SNMP dialog box in the product manager  
application, users at SNMP management workstations can modify MIB variables.  
Switch modifications performed through SNMP management work stations are  
recorded in the associated switch Audit Log and are available through the product  
manager application.  
1–42  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General InformationI  
For additional information, refer to the hp StorageWorks SNMP reference guide for  
director 2/64, edge switch 2/16, and edge switch 2/32  
(A6534-96026/AA-RQ7BB-TE).  
E-Mail and Call-Home Support  
If e-mail notification and call-home support are configured for the switch as part of  
the customer support process, service personnel may be:  
Notified of a switch problem by e-mail message, either directly or through a  
system administrator at the customer site or call center.  
Assigned a service call from call center personnel upon receipt and confirmation  
of a switch call-home event.  
Tools and Test Equipment  
This section describes tools and test equipment that may be required to install, test,  
service, and verify operation of the switch and attached HAFM server.  
Tools Supplied with the Switch  
The following tools are supplied with the switch. Use of the tools may be required to  
perform one or more installation, test, service, or verification tasks. These tools are  
supplied with the switch or must be supplied by service personnel.  
Fiber-optic loopback plug - An SFP multi-mode (shortwave laser) or single-mode  
(longwave laser) loopback plug is required to perform port loopback diagnostic  
tests. One loopback plug is shipped with the switch, depending on the type of port  
transceivers installed. Both plugs are shipped if shortwave laser and longwave  
laser transceivers are installed. The plug is shown in Figure 1–20.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
General InformationI  
Fiber-optic protective plug - For safety and port transceiver protection,  
fiber-optic protective plugs must be inserted in all port SFPs without fiber-optic  
cables attached. The switch is shipped with protective plugs installed in all ports.  
A protective plug is shown in Figure 1–21.  
Figure 1–21: Fiber-Optic Protective Plug  
Null modem cable - An asynchronous RS-232 null modem cable is required to  
configure switch network addresses and acquire event log information through the  
maintenance port. The cable has nine conductors and DB-9 male and female  
connectors. A null modem cable is not a standard (straight-through) RS-232  
cable. Refer to Figure 1–22.  
Figure 1–22: Null Modem Cable  
Tools Supplied by Service Personnel  
The following tools are expected to be supplied by service personnel performing  
switch installation and maintenance actions. Use of the tools may be required to  
perform one or more installation, test, service, or verification tasks.  
Scissors or pocket knife - A sharp cutting edge (scissors or knife blade) may be  
required to cut the protective strapping when unpacking the switch, HAFM server,  
Ethernet hub, or replacement FRUs.  
1–44  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
General InformationI  
Standard flat-tip and cross-tip (Phillips) screwdrivers - Screwdrivers are  
required to remove, replace, adjust or tighten various connector or chassis  
components, and to remove and replace power supplies.  
Maintenance terminal (desktop or notebook PC) - the PC is required to  
configure switch network addresses and acquire event log information through the  
maintenance port. The PC must have:  
— The Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows Millennium Edition  
operating system installed.  
— RS-232 serial communication software (such as ProComm Plus™ or  
HyperTerminal) installed. HyperTerminal is provided with Windows  
operating systems.  
Fiber-optic cleaning kit - The kit contains tools and instructions to clean  
fiber-optic cable, connectors, loopback plugs, and protective plugs.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
1–45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Diagnostics  
This chapter describes diagnostic procedures used by service representatives to isolate  
hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 (edge switch 2/16) problems or failures to the  
field-replaceable unit (FRU) level. The chapter specifically describes how to perform  
maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs).  
Maintenance Analysis Procedures  
The MAPs provide fault isolation and related service procedures. They are  
step-by-step procedures that prompt service personnel for information and describe a  
maintenance action. They provide information to interpret system events, isolate a  
switch failure to a single FRU, remove and replace the failed FRU, and verify switch  
operation.  
Factory Defaults  
Table 2–1 lists the defaults for the passwords, and IP, subnet, and gateway addresses.  
Table 2–1: Factory-Set Defaults  
Item  
Customer password  
Maintenance password  
IP address  
Default  
password  
level-2  
10.1.1.10  
255.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Gateway address  
Quick Start  
Table 2–2 lists the MAPs in this chapter. Fault isolation normally begins at "MAP 0000:  
Start MAP" on page 2-7.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Diagnostics  
However, Table 2–3 lists the event codes and the corresponding MAPs. It is a quick  
MAP  
Page  
page 2–7  
page 2–26  
MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis  
MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis  
page 2–39  
page 2–58  
page 2–63  
page 2–79  
MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port  
Problem Determination  
MAP 0800: Console PC Problem Determination  
page 2–90  
Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
001  
System power-down.  
Power on  
switch.  
011  
021  
031  
051  
052  
061  
Login server database invalid.  
Name server database invalid.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
SNMP request received from  
unauthorized community.  
name.  
Management server database invalid. Go to MAP  
0700.  
Management server internal error.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
Fabric controller database invalid.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
2–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
062  
Maximum interswitch hop count  
exceeded.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
070  
071  
072  
E_Port is segmented.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
Switch is isolated.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
E_Port connected to an unsupported  
switch.  
Go to MAP  
0700.  
080  
200  
Unauthorized world wide name  
Power supply ac voltage failure.  
Go to MAP  
0100.  
201  
202  
203  
204  
Power supply DC voltage failure.  
Power supply thermal failure.  
Go to MAP  
0100.  
Go to MAP  
0100.  
Power supply ac voltage recovery.  
Power supply DC voltage recovery.  
No action  
required.  
No action  
required.  
206  
207  
Power supply removed.  
Power supply installed.  
Replace FRU.  
required.  
208  
300  
301  
302  
303  
Power supply false shutdown.  
First cooling fan failed.  
Go to MAP  
0100.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Second cooling fan failed.  
Third cooling fan failed.  
Fourth cooling fan failed.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
304  
305  
310  
311  
312  
313  
314  
315  
400  
410  
411  
421  
423  
430  
431  
432  
Fifth cooling fan failed.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Sixth cooling fan failed.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
First cooling fan recovered.  
Second cooling fan recovered.  
Third cooling fan recovered.  
Fourth cooling fan recovered.  
Fifth cooling fan recovered .  
Sixth cooling fan recovered.  
Power-up diagnostic failure.  
CTP card reset.  
No action  
required.  
No action  
required.  
No action  
required.  
No action  
required.  
required.  
No action  
required  
Go to MAP  
0200.  
No action  
required.  
Firmware fault occurred.  
Go to MAP  
0200.  
Firmware download complete.  
CTP firmware download initiated.  
Excessive Ethernet transmit errors.  
Excessive Ethernet receive errors.  
Ethernet adapter reset.  
required.  
required.  
Go to MAP  
0400.  
Go to MAP  
0400.  
Go to MAP  
0400.  
2–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
433  
Non-recoverable Ethernet fault.  
Go to MAP  
0400.  
440  
502  
504  
505  
506  
507  
508  
510  
512  
513  
514  
581  
582  
583  
584  
Embedded port hardware failure.  
Port module anomaly detected.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
No action  
required.  
Port module failure - error threshold  
exceeded.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Port module revision not supported.  
required.  
Fibre Channel port failure.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Loopback diagnostics port failure.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Fibre Channel port anomaly detected. Go to MAP  
0600.  
SFP hot-insertion initiated.  
No action  
required.  
SFP nonfatal error.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
SFP hot-removal completed.  
SFP failure.  
required.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Implicit incident.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Bit-error threshold exceeded.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Loss of signal or loss of  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Not operational primitive sequence  
(NOS) received.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Table 2–3: Event Codes versus Maintenance Action (Continued)  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
585  
586  
602  
604  
605  
800  
801  
802  
805  
806  
807  
810  
811  
812  
850  
Primitive sequence timeout.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
Invalid primitive sequence received  
for link state.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
SBAR module anomaly detected.  
required.  
SBAR module failure.  
Go to MAP  
0600.  
SBAR module revision not supported. Go to MAP  
0600.  
High-temperature warning (port  
module thermal sensor).  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Critically hot temperature warning  
(port module thermal sensor).  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Port module shutdown due to thermal Go to MAP  
violations.  
0500.  
High-temperature warning (SBAR  
module thermal sensor).  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Critically hot temperature warning  
(SBAR module thermal sensor).  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
SBAR module shutdown due to  
thermal violations.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
High-temperature warning (CTP  
thermal sensor).  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
Critically hot temperature warning  
(CTP thermal sensor).  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
CTP shutdown due to thermal  
violations.  
Go to MAP  
0500.  
System shutdown due to CTP thermal Go to MAP  
violations. 0500.  
2–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
MAP 0000: Start MAP  
This MAP describes initial fault isolation for the switch. Fault isolation begins at the  
hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) server, failed switch, or  
Internet-connected personal computer (PC) running the embedded web server  
interface.  
1
Prior to fault isolation, acquire the following information from the customer:  
A system configuration drawing or planning worksheet that includes the HAFM  
server, switches, other Hewlett Packard products, and device connections.  
The location of the HAFM server and all switches.  
The internet protocol (IP) address, gateway address, and subnet mask for the  
switch reporting the problem.  
If performing fault isolation using the HAFM server:  
— The Windows 2000 user name and password. These are required when  
prompted during any MAP or repair procedure that directs the HAFM server  
to be rebooted.  
— The user name, maintenance password, and HAFM server name. All are  
case sensitive and required when prompted at the HAFMHAFM Login dialog  
box.  
If performing fault isolation using the embedded web server interface, the switch  
user name and password. Both are case sensitive and required when prompted  
at the Username and Password Required dialog box.  
Continue.  
2
Are you at the HAFM server?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 24.  
3
Display an application warning or error message, or  
Not display an application warning or error message, or  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Diagnostics  
Display a Dr. Watson for Windows 2000 dialog box?  
NO  
YES  
An HAFM server application problem is indicated. Event codes are not  
recorded. Go to "MAP 0300: Console Application Problem Determination" on  
page 2-33.  
4
Did the HAFM server crash and display a blue screen with the system dump file in  
hexadecimal format (blue screen of death)?  
NO  
YES  
An HAFM server application problem is indicated. Event codes are not  
recorded. Go to "MAP 0300: Console Application Problem Determination" on  
page 2-33.  
5
Is the HAFM application active?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 7.  
6
Reboot the HAFM server PC.  
a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.  
b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows  
dialog box appears.  
c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click  
Yes to power off the PC.  
d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the  
Begin Logon dialog box displays.  
e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog  
box. Type a user name and password (obtained in step 1) and click OK. The  
HAFM Services and HAFM applications start, and the HAFM Login dialog box  
displays.  
2–8  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server  
name (obtained in step 1, and all are case sensitive), and click Login. The  
application opens and the Product View displays.  
Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?  
YES  
NO  
An HAFM server hardware problem is indicated. Event codes are not  
recorded. Go to "MAP 0800: Console PC Problem Determination" on page 2-90.  
7
Inspect the alert panel at the lower left corner of the Product View. The indicator  
shows the status of managed switches or the status of the link between the HAFM  
server and managed switches as follows:  
A green circle indicates all switches are operational.  
A yellow triangle indicates at least one switch is operating in degraded mode.  
A red diamond with yellow background indicates at least one switch is not  
operational.  
A grey square indicates the status of at least one switch is unknown  
The grey square indicates the HAFM server cannot communicate with the switch  
because:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed.  
Ac power distribution in the switch failed.  
The control processor (CTP) card failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU,  
CTP failure requires replacing the switch.  
Does a grey square appear at the alert panel and as the background to the icon  
representing the switch reporting the problem?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 10.  
8
At the switch reporting the problem, ensure the power switch is set to the Power On  
(1) position. Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:  
At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.  
Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.  
Audio emanations and airflow from fans.  
Does the switch appear powered on?  
YES  
NO  
A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes.  
If no event codes are found, go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis" on  
page 2-26.  
9
Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event codes are found:  
a. Fault isolate the least severe failure indicated (Ethernet link problem). Go to  
"MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication" on page 2-39.  
b. If MAP 400 does not isolate the problem, fault isolate the CTP card problem. Go  
to "MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis" on page 2-32.  
10  
Does a red diamond with yellow background (failure indicator) appear at the alert  
panel and as the background to the icon representing the switch reporting the  
problem?  
YES  
NO  
2–10  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Go to step 14.  
11  
Click the icon representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View  
displays. At the Hardware View:  
Observe whether the edge switch 2/16 Status table is yellow and switch status is  
NOT OPERATIONAL.  
Inspect FRUs for a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) that  
Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a Fibre Channel port graphic?  
NO  
YES  
A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no  
event codes are found, go to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis"  
on page 2-63.  
12  
Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a fan graphic?  
NO  
YES  
A fan failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event  
13  
A blinking red and yellow diamond overlays a power supply graphic.  
A power supply failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event  
codes are found, go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis" on page 2-26.  
14  
Does a yellow triangle (attention indicator) appear at the alert panel and as the  
background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 18.  
Click the icon representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View  
displays. At the Hardware View:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Observe whether the edge switch 2/16 Status table is yellow and switch status is  
Minor Failure or Not Installed.  
Inspect FRUs for a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) that  
Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a Fibre Channel port graphic?  
NO  
YES  
A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no  
event codes are found, go to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis"  
on page 2-63.  
16  
Does a blinking red and yellow diamond overlay a fan graphic?  
NO  
YES  
A fan failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event  
17  
A blinking red and yellow diamond overlays a power supply graphic.  
A power supply failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event  
codes are found, go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis" on page 2-26.  
18  
A green circle appears at the alert panel and as the background to the icon  
representing the switch reporting the problem. Although the switch is operational, a  
minor problem may exist.  
Click the icon representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View  
displays. At the Hardware View, inspect ports for a yellow triangle (attention indicator)  
that overlays a port graphic.  
Does a yellow triangle overlay the port graphic?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 22.  
19  
Inspect the port state and LED status for all ports with an attention indicator.  
2–12  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
a. At the Hardware View, click the port graphic with the attention indicator. The Port  
Properties dialog box displays.  
b. Inspect the Beaconing and Operational State fields.  
Does the Operational State field display a Beaconing message and the Beaconing  
field display an On message?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 21.  
20  
Port beaconing is enabled.  
a. Consult with the customer and next level of support to determine the reason port  
beaconing is enabled.  
b. Disable port beaconing:  
1. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.  
2. Click Enable Beaconing. The check mark disappears from the box adjacent to  
the option, and port beaconing is disabled.  
Was port beaconing enabled because port failure or degradation was suspected?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Go to step 2.  
21  
At the Port Properties dialog box, does the Operational State field display a  
Segmented E_Port message?  
NO  
YES  
E_Port segmentation is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no  
event codes are found, go to "MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port  
Problem Determination" on page 2-79.  
A message displays indicating a link incident or port problem. Go to step 23 to obtain  
event codes. If no event codes are found, go to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link  
Incident Analysis" on page 2-63.  
22  
A link incident may have occurred, but the LIN alerts option is not enabled for the port  
and the attention indicator does not appear.  
At the Hardware View, select Link Incident Log from the Logs menu on the navigation  
control panel. The Link Incident Log displays.  
If a link incident occurred, the affected port number is listed with one of the following  
messages.  
Link interface incident - implicit incident.  
2–14  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
Link interface incident - bit-error threshold exceeded.  
Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.  
Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.  
Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.  
Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.  
Did one of the listed messages appear in the Link Incident Log?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
A link incident problem is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event  
codes are found, go to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis" on page 2-63.  
23  
Obtain event codes from the switch Event Log.  
NOTE: If multiple event codes are found, note all codes and associated severity levels. Record  
the date, time, and listed sequence, and determine if the codes are related to the reported  
problem. Begin fault isolation with the most recent event code with the highest severity level.  
Other codes may accompany this event code, or may indicate a normal indication after a  
problem is recovered.  
a. At the Hardware View, select Event Log from the Logs menu on the navigation  
control panel. The Event Log displays.  
b. Record the event code, date, time, and severity (Informational, Minor, Major, or  
Severe).  
c. Record all event codes that may relate to the reported problem.  
Were one or more event codes found?  
NO  
YES  
Go to Table 2–3 on page 2-2.  
Return to the MAP step that sent you here.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
24  
Are you at the switch reporting the problem?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 36.  
25  
Is the PWR LED at the switch front panel illuminated?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 30.  
26  
Is the power switch set to the Power On (1) position?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 29.  
27  
Power on the switch. Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:  
At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.  
Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.  
Does the switch appear powered on?  
YES  
NO  
A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event  
codes. If no event codes are found, go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution  
Analysis" on page 2-26.  
28  
Is the PWR LED at the switch front panel illuminated?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 30.  
A faulty PWR LED is indicated, but Fibre Channel port operation is not disrupted.  
2–16  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
a. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is acceptable to the  
customer, do not perform any repair action.  
b. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is not acceptable to the  
customer, remove and replace the switch.  
29  
Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:  
At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.  
Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.  
Does the switch appear powered on?  
YES  
NO  
A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event  
codes. If no event codes are found, go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution  
Analysis" on page 2-26.  
A faulty PWR LED is indicated, but Fibre Channel port operation is not disrupted.  
a. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is acceptable to the  
customer, do not perform any repair action.  
b. If continued operation without benefit of the PWR LED is not acceptable to the  
customer, remove and replace the switch.  
Exit MAP.  
30  
Is the ERR LED blinking?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 32.  
31  
Unit beaconing is enabled for the switch.  
a. Consult the customer and next level of support to determine the reason unit  
beaconing is enabled.  
b. Disable unit beaconing.  
1. At the Hardware View, right-click the front bezel graphic (away from a FRU). A  
pop-up menu appears.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
2. Click Enable Unit Beaconing. The check mark disappears from the box  
adjacent to the option, and unit beaconing is disabled.  
Was unit beaconing enabled because an switch failure or degradation was  
suspected?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
Go to step 25.  
32  
Is the ERR LED illuminated?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational. Verify operation at the HAFM server. Go to  
step 3.  
33  
Check FRUs (port SFPs, fans, power supplies) for failure symptoms.  
Is the amber LED adjacent to a port SFP illuminated?  
NO  
YES  
A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no  
event codes are found, go to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis"  
on page 2-63.  
34  
Is the amber LED at the lower left corner of a fan illuminated?  
NO  
YES  
A fan failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no event  
codes are found, go to "MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis" on page 2-58.  
35  
Is the green LED on a power supply extinguished?  
NO  
YES  
A power supply failure is indicated. Go to step 23 to obtain event codes. If no  
event codes are found, go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis" on page  
2-26.  
2–18  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
The switch appears operational.  
36  
Are you at a PC with a web browser (such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet  
Explorer) and an Internet connection to the switch reporting the problem.  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 52.  
37  
Is the web browser PC powered on and communicating with the switch through the  
Internet connection?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 39.  
38  
Boot the web browser PC.  
a. Power on the PC in accordance with the instructions delivered with the PC. The  
Windows desktop appears.  
b. Launch the PC browser application by double-clicking the appropriate icon at the  
Windows desktop.  
c. At the Netsite field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field (Internet Explorer), type  
http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the switch  
(obtained in step 1). The Username and Password Required dialog box appears.  
d. Type the user name and password obtained in step 1, and click OK. The  
embedded web server interface opens with the View panel (Switch tab)  
displayed.  
Continue.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
39  
Does the embedded web server interface appear operational with the view panel  
displayed?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 44.  
40  
A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 - file not found,  
or other similar message appears. The message indicates the web browser PC  
cannot communicate with the switch because:  
The switch-to-PC Internet link could not be established.  
AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.  
The switch’s CTP failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, CTP failure  
requires replacing the switch.  
Continue.  
41  
Inspect the switch for indications of being powered on, such as:  
At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.  
Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.  
Audio emanations and airflow from fans.  
2–20  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Does the switch appear powered on?  
YES  
NO  
A power distribution problem is indicated. Go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution  
Analysis" on page 2-26.  
42  
Either a switch-to-PC Internet link problem (Internet too busy or IP address typed  
incorrectly) or a CTP card failure is indicated.  
a. Wait approximately five minutes, then attempt to login to the switch again.  
b. At the Netsite field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field (Internet Explorer), type  
http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the switch  
(obtained in step 1). The Username and Password Required dialog box appears.  
c. Type the user name and password obtained in step 1, and click OK. If the View  
panel does not display, wait another five minutes and perform this step again.  
Does the embedded web server interface appear operational with the View panel  
displayed?  
YES  
NO  
A CTP card failure is indicated. Go to "MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure  
Analysis" on page 2-32.  
43  
At the View panel, inspect the Status field.  
Does the switch status indicate Operational?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
44  
Inspect the port operational state.  
a. At the View panel, click the Port Properties tab. The View panel (Port Properties  
tab) displays.  
b. Inspect the Beaconing and Operational State fields.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Does the Operational State field display a Beaconing message and the Beaconing  
field display an On message?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 46.  
45  
Port beaconing is enabled.  
a. Consult the customer and next level of support to determine the reason port  
beaconing is enabled.  
b. Disable port beaconing:  
1. At the View panel, select Operations at the left side of the panel. The  
Operations panel opens with the Port Beaconing page displayed.  
2. Click the Beaconing State check box for the port. The check mark disappears  
from the box and port beaconing is disabled.  
2–22  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
3. Return to the View panel (Port Properties tab).  
Continue.  
46  
At the View panel, does the Operational State field display a Segmented message?  
NO  
YES  
Port segmentation is indicated. Go to step 51 to obtain event codes. If no  
event codes are found, go to "MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port  
Problem Determination" on page 2-79.  
47  
At the View panel, does the Operational State field display a message indicating a link  
incident or port problem?  
NO  
YES  
A port problem is indicated. Go to step 51 to obtain event codes. If no event  
codes are found, go to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis" on  
page 2-63.  
48  
Is a link incident or port problem indicated for any of the ports?  
NO  
YES  
A link incident problem or port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 51 to obtain  
event codes. If no event codes are found, go to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and  
Link Incident Analysis" on page 2-63.  
49  
Inspect the power supply operational states.  
a. At the View panel, click the Component Properties tab. The View panel  
(Component Properties tab) displays.  
b. Inspect the State fields for both power supplies.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
Does the State field display a Failed message for either power supply?  
NO  
YES  
A power supply failure is indicated. Go to step 51 to obtain event codes. If no  
event codes are found, go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis" on page  
2-26.  
50  
Inspect the State fields for Fan 0, and Fan 1 through Fan 3 (fans).  
Does the State field display a Failed or Not Installed message for any of the fans?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
A fan failure is indicated. Continue to the next step to obtain event codes. If no event  
codes are found, go to "MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis" on page 2-58.  
51  
Obtain event codes from the embedded web server event log.  
NOTE: If multiple event codes are found, note all codes and associated severity levels. Record  
the date, time, and listed sequence, and determine if the codes are related to the reported  
problem. Begin fault isolation with the most recent event code with the highest severity level.  
Other codes may accompany this event code, or may indicate a normal indication after a  
problem is recovered.  
2–24  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
a. At the View panel, select Monitor at the left side of the panel. The Monitor panel  
opens with the Status page displayed.  
b. At the Monitor panel, click the Log tab. The Monitor panel (Log tab) displays.  
c. Record the event code, date, time, and severity (Informational, Minor, Major, or  
Severe).  
d. Record all event codes that may relate to the reported problem.  
Were one or more event codes found?  
YES  
NO  
Return to the MAP step that sent you here.  
Go to Table 2–3 on page 2-2.  
52  
The link incident record provides the attached switch port number(s) and one or more  
of the following event codes and messages. Record all event codes that may relate to  
the reported problem.  
581 - Link interface incident - implicit incident.  
582 - Link interface incident - bit-error threshold exceeded.  
583 - Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
584 - Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.  
585 - Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.  
586 - Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.  
Were one or more event codes found?  
YES  
NO  
Perform switch fault isolation at the HAFM server.  
Go to step 3.  
Go to Table 2–3 on page 2-2.  
MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis  
This MAP describes fault isolation for the switch power distribution system, including  
defective AC power cords or power supplies.  
1
Was an event code 200, 201, 202, or 208 observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM  
server) or at the embedded web server event log?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 3.  
2
The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and the  
associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
200  
Power supply AC voltage failure. Go to step 6.  
Power supply DC voltage failure. Go to step 10.  
201  
202  
Power supply thermal failure.  
Power supply false shutdown.  
Go to step 10.  
Go to step 6.  
208  
3
Is remote fault isolation being performed at the HAFM server?  
YES NO  
2–26  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
Remote fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server  
interface. Go to step 20.  
4
Does inspection of a power supply indicate a failure (green LED extinguished)?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 6.  
5
Does a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appear to overlay a  
power supply graphic at the HAFM server Hardware View?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 11.  
6
A redundant power supply is disconnected from facility AC power, not properly  
installed, or has failed.  
Verify the indicated power supply is connected to facility power.  
Ensure the AC power cord (PS0 or PS1) is connected to the rear of the switch and a  
facility power receptacle. If not, connect the cord as directed by the customer.  
a. Ensure the associated facility circuit breaker is on. If not, ask the customer set  
the circuit breaker on.  
b. Ensure the AC power cord is not damaged. If damaged, replace the cord.  
Was a corrective action performed?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 8.  
7
Verify power supply operation.  
a. Inspect the power supply and ensure the green LED illuminates.  
b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphic representing the power supply and  
ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.  
Is a failure indicated?  
YES  
NO  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
The switch appears operational.  
8
Ensure the power supply is correctly installed and seated in the CTP card. If required,  
partially remove and reseat the power supply.  
Was a corrective action performed?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 10.  
9
Verify power supply operation.  
a. Inspect the power supply and ensure the green LED illuminates.  
b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphic representing the power supply and  
ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.  
Is a failure indicated?  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
10  
A redundant power supply failed and must be removed and replaced. (RRP: Power  
Supply on page 4-4).  
This procedure is concurrent and can be performed while the switch is powered  
on.  
Perform the data collection procedure after FRU removal and replacement.  
Did power supply replacement solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
11  
At the Product View, does a grey square appear at the alert panel and as the  
background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?  
The grey square indicates the HAFM server cannot communicate with the switch  
because:  
2–28  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed.  
AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.  
The switch’s CTP failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, CTP failure  
requires replacing the switch.  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
12  
Ensure the power switch is set to the Power On (1) position. Inspect the switch for  
indications of being powered on, such as:  
At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.  
Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.  
Audio emanations and airflow from fans.  
Does the switch appear powered on?  
NO  
YES  
Analysis for an Ethernet link or CTP card failure is not described in this MAP.  
Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7. If this is the second time at this  
step, contact the next level of support.  
13  
Verify facility AC power connections.  
a. Ensure both AC power cords (PS0 and PS1) are connected to the rear of the  
switch and to facility power receptacles. If not, connect the cords as directed by  
the customer.  
b. Ensure associated facility circuit breakers are on. If not, ask the customer set the  
circuit breakers on.  
c. Ensure the AC power cords are not damaged. If damaged, replace the cords.  
Was a corrective action performed?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 15.  
Verify operation of both power supplies.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
a. Inspect the power supplies and ensure the green LEDs illuminate.  
b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphics representing the power supplies and  
ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.  
Is a failure indicated?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
15  
Ensure both power supplies are correctly installed and seated in the CTP card. If  
required, partially remove and reseat the power supplies.  
Was a corrective action performed?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 17.  
16  
Verify operation of both power supplies.  
a. Inspect the power supplies and ensure the green LEDs illuminate.  
b. At the Hardware View, observe the graphics representing the power supplies and  
ensure a failure symbol (blinking red and yellow diamond) does not appear.  
Is a failure indicated?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
17  
Inspect the switch for indications the power supplies are operational, but the switch is  
not receiving DC power. Indications include:  
Green LEDs illuminated on one or both power supplies.  
PWR and ERR LEDS extinguished at the switch front panel.  
All green and amber port LEDs extinguished.  
Does the switch appear powered off while the power supplies appear operational (one  
or both power supply LEDs illuminated)?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 19.  
2–30  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
18  
Both power supplies failed and must be removed and replaced (RRP: Power Supply  
on page 4-4). Perform the data collection procedure after FRU removal and  
replacement.  
Did replacement of both power supplies solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
19  
One or both power supplies appear operational, but the CTP card is not receiving DC  
power. An in-card circuit breaker may have tripped due to a power surge or the CTP  
card failed.  
Reset the switch ("Reset the Switch" on page 3-36).  
Did a switch reset solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
A CTP card failure is indicated. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, replace the  
switch  
20  
Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 22.  
21  
A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 - file not found,  
or other similar message appears. The message indicates the web browser PC  
cannot communicate with the switch because:  
The switch-to-PC Internet (Ethernet) link could not be established.  
AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.  
The switch CTP card failed.  
Go to step 12.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
22  
Inspect the power supply operational states at the embedded web server interface.  
a. At the View panel, click the Component Properties tab. The View panel  
(Component Properties tab) displays.  
b. Inspect the State fields for Power Supply 0 and Power Supply 1.  
Does the State field display a Failed or Not Installed message for either power  
supply?  
NO  
YES  
A redundant power supply failure is indicated. Go to step 6.  
The switch appears operational.  
MAP 0200: POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis  
When the switch is powered on, it performs a series of power-on self-tests (POSTs).  
When POSTs complete, the switch performs an initial program load (IPL) that loads  
firmware and brings the unit online. This MAP describes fault isolation for problems  
that may occur during the POST/IPL process.  
If an error is detected, the POST/IPL process continues in an attempt to initialize the  
switch and bring it online. But an event code 400 displays when the switch completes  
the POST/IPL process.  
1
Was an event code 400 or 411 observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at  
the embedded web server event log?  
YES  
NO  
Analysis for the failure is not described in this MAP. Go to "MAP 0000: Start  
MAP" on page 2-7.  
2–32  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
2
The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and the  
associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Power-up diagnostic failure.  
Firmware fault occurred.  
Action  
Go to step 3.  
Go to step 4.  
400  
411  
3
POST/IPL diagnostics detected a CTP card failure as indicated by an event code 400  
with supplementary bytes of event data.  
Byte 0 is a FRU code (02) that indicates a failed CTP card.  
Byte 1 is the slot number (00) for the CTP card.  
Because the CTP card is not a FRU, replace the switch.  
4
POST/IPL diagnostics detected a firmware failure (as indicated by event code 411)  
and performed an online dump. All Fibre Channel ports reset after the failure and  
attached devices momentarily logout, login, and resume operation.  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
MAP 0300: Console Application Problem  
Determination  
This map describes isolation of HAFM server application problems, including  
problems associated with the Windows operating system and HAFM and switch  
product manager.  
1
Did the HAFM server lock up or crash without displaying a warning or error message?  
YES  
NO  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Diagnostics  
Go to step 4.  
2
An application or operating system problem is indicated. Close the HAFM application.  
a. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete. The Windows Security dialog box  
displays.  
b. At the Windows Security dialog box, click Task Manager. The Windows Task  
Manager dialog box displays with the Applications page open.  
c. Select (highlight) the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) application  
entry and click End Task. The HAFM application closes.  
Continue.  
3
Attempt to clear the problem by rebooting the HAFM server PC.  
a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.  
b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows  
dialog box displays.  
c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click  
d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the  
Begin Logon dialog box displays.  
e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog  
box. Type a user name and password (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on  
page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog  
box displays.  
2–34  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server  
name (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7) and click Login. The  
application opens and the Product View displays.  
Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?  
NO  
YES  
The problem is transient and the HAFM server appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
4
Did the HAFM application display a dialog box with the message Connection to  
HAFM server lost - click OK to exit application or HAFM error n (where n is an  
error message number 1 through 8 inclusive)?  
An HAFM application error occurred. Click OK to close the dialog box and  
close the HAFM application. Go to step 3.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
5
Did the HAFM application display a dialog box with the message The software  
version on this HAFM server is not compatible with the version on the remote  
HAFM server?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 8.  
6
The HAFM applications running on the HAFM server and client workstation are not at  
compatible release levels. Recommend to the customer that the downlevel version be  
upgraded.  
Does the customer want the HAFM application upgraded?  
YES  
NO  
Power off the client workstation.  
7
Upgrade the downlevel HAFM application ("Install or Upgrade Software" on page 3-51).  
Did the software upgrade solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The HAFM server appears operational  
Contact the next level of support.  
8
Did the product manager application display a dialog box with the message Product  
Manager error 5001 or Product Manager error 5002?  
NO  
YES  
A product manager application error occurred. Click OK to close the dialog  
box and close the HAFM and product manager applications. Go to step 3.  
9
Did the product manager application display a dialog box with the message Send  
firmware failed?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 11.  
2–36  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10  
An attempt to download a firmware version from the HAFM server hard drive to the  
switch failed. Retry the operation ("Manage Firmware Versions" on page 3-40).  
Did the firmware version download to the switch?  
NO  
YES  
The HAFM server appears operational.  
A CTP card failure is suspected. Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate  
the problem.  
11  
Did the product manager application display a dialog box with the message The data  
collection process failed?  
YES  
Go to step 13.  
12  
The data collection process failed. Retry the process using a new Zip disk("Collecting  
Maintenance Data" on page 3-31).  
Did the data collection process complete?  
NO  
YES  
Exit MAP.  
Contact the next level of support.  
13  
Did the HAFM server lock up or crash and display a Dr. Watson for Windows dialog  
box?  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
NO  
YES  
A Windows operating system or HAFM application error occurred. Click  
Cancel to close the dialog box and HAFM application. Go to step 3.  
14  
Did the HAFM server crash and display a blue screen with the system dump file in  
hexadecimal format (blue screen of death)?  
YES  
NO  
The HAFM server appears operational.  
15  
Attempt to clear the problem by power cycling the HAFM server PC.  
b. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the  
Begin Logon dialog box displays.  
c. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog  
box. Type a user name and password (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on  
page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog  
box displays.  
d. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server  
name (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7), and click Login. The  
application opens and the Product View displays.  
2–38  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?  
NO  
YES  
The problem is transient and the HAFM server appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
MAP 0400: Loss of Console Communication  
This MAP describes fault isolation of the Ethernet communication link between a  
switch and the HAFM server, or between a switch and a web browser PC running the  
embedded web server interface. Failure indicators include:  
At the Product View, a grey square at the alert panel and as the background to  
the icon representing the switch reporting the problem.  
At the Hardware View, a grey square at the alert panel, a No Link status and  
reason at the switch Status table, and no FRUs visible for the switch.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
At the web browser PC, A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server,  
HTTP 404 - file not found, or other similar message.  
An event code 433 recorded only in nonvolatile random-access memory  
(NV-RAM) on the switch’s CTP card.  
An event code 430, 431, 432, 440 recorded at the switch Event Log or embedded  
web server event log.  
When the logical connection between the switch and HAFM server is initiated, it may  
take up to five minutes for the link to activate at the Product View, and a green circle to  
appear at the alert panel and the background to the icon representing the switch. This  
delay is normal.  
CAUTION: Prior to servicing a switch or HAFM server, determine the Ethernet LAN  
configuration. Installation of switches and the HAFM server on a public customer  
intranet can complicate problem determination and fault isolation.  
1
Was an event code 430, 431, 432, or 440 observed at the switch Event Log (HAFM  
server) or at the embedded web server event log?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 5.  
2
A transmission control protocol (TCP) reset command from the HAFM server caused  
the Ethernet connection to terminate. The connection recovers if the HAFM server is  
powered on and the HAFM Services application is running.  
Verify the HAFM server is powered on and the HAFM application is running. The  
application runs in the background as a Windows service and starts automatically  
when the HAFM server is powered on.  
2–40  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Click HAFM Services at the Windows task bar. The HAFM Services window displays.  
Is the HAFM server powered on and the HAFM application running?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 4.  
3
Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
4
Reboot the HAFM server PC.  
a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.  
b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows  
dialog box appears.  
c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click  
Yes to power off the PC.  
d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the  
Begin Logon dialog box displays.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog  
box. Type a user name and password (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on  
page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog  
box displays.  
f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server  
name (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7), and click Login. The  
application opens and the Product View displays.  
Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
5
Is fault isolation being performed at the switch or HAFM server?  
YES  
NO  
2–42  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Remote fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server  
interface. Go to step 25.  
6
At the Product View, does a grey square appear at the alert panel and as the  
background to the icon representing the switch reporting the problem?  
YES  
NO  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
The grey square indicates the HAFM server cannot communicate with the switch  
because:  
The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed.  
AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.  
The switch CTP card failed. Because the CTP card is not a FRU, replace the  
switch.  
Continue.  
7
Inspect the switch reporting the problem for indications of being powered on, such as:  
At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.  
Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.  
Audio emanations and airflow from fans.  
Does the switch appear powered on?  
YES  
NO  
Analysis for an ac power distribution or CTP card failure is not described in  
this MAP. Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7. If this is the second time  
at this step, contact the next level of support.  
8
The switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link failed. Click the icon with the grey square  
representing the switch reporting the problem. The Hardware View displays. At the  
Hardware View:  
A grey square appears at the alert panel.  
No FRUs are visible for the switch.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
The switch Status table is yellow, the Status field displays No Link, and the  
Reason field displays an error message.  
The following table lists the error messages and associated steps that describe fault  
isolation procedures.  
Error Message  
Never connected.  
Action  
Go to step 9.  
Go to step 9.  
Go to step 15.  
Go to step 18.  
Go to step 21.  
Go to step 23.  
Link timeout.  
Protocol mismatch.  
Duplicate session.  
Unknown network address.  
Incorrect product type.  
9
Errors for the switch Ethernet adapter exceeded a threshold, the switch-to-HAFM  
server link was not connected, or the switch-to-HAFM server link timed out. A problem  
with the Ethernet cable, hub or hubs, or other LAN-attached device is indicated.  
Verify the switch is connected to the HAFM server through one or more Ethernet hubs.  
a. Ensure an RJ-45 Ethernet cable connects the switch front panel to an Ethernet  
hub. If not, connect the cable as directed by the customer.  
b. Ensure an RJ-45 Ethernet cable connects the HAFM server adapter card to an  
Ethernet hub. If not, connect the cable as directed by the customer.  
c. Ensure both Ethernet cables are not damaged. If damaged, replace the cables.  
Was a corrective action performed?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 1.  
10  
Does the LAN configuration use multiple Ethernet hubs that are daisy-chained?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 12.  
11  
Verify the hubs are correctly interconnected.  
2–44  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Was a corrective action performed?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 1.  
12  
Verify operation of the Ethernet hub or hubs. Inspect each hub for indications of being  
powered on, such as:  
Green Status LEDs illuminated.  
Is a hub failure indicated?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 14.  
13  
Replace the Ethernet hub. Refer to the supporting documentation shipped with the  
hub for instructions.  
Did hub replacement solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
14  
A problem with another LAN-attached device is indicated.  
If the problem is associated with another switch or HAFM server, go to "MAP  
0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate the problem for that device.  
If the problem is associated with an unrelated device, notify the customer and  
have the system administrator correct the problem.  
Did repair of an unrelated LAN-attached device solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
A switch Ethernet port failure is indicated. Go to step 29.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
15  
The HAFM application (running on the HAFM server) and the firmware running on the  
switch are not at compatible release levels. Recommend to the customer that the  
downlevel version (software or firmware) be upgraded.  
Does the HAFM application require upgrade?  
YES  
Go to step 17.  
16  
At the HAFM server, upgrade the HAFM application ("Install or Upgrade Software" on  
page 3-51).  
Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?  
NO  
YES  
Contact the next level of support.  
17  
A switch firmware upgrade is required.  
Download the firmware ("Download a Firmware Version to a Switch" on page 3-45). After  
the download, perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett  
Packard for analysis.  
Did the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet connection recover?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
18  
An instance of the HAFM application is open at another HAFM server and  
communicating with the switch. Notify the customer and either:  
Power off the HAFM server running the second instance of the application, or  
Configure the HAFM server running the second instance of the application as a  
client workstation.  
Does the customer want the second HAFM server configured as a client?  
2–46  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
YES  
NO  
Power off the HAFM server reporting the Duplicate Session communication  
problem.  
19  
Determine the internet protocol (IP) address of the HAFM server running the first  
instance of the HAFM application.  
a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.  
b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Settings. From the menu that displays,  
select Control Panel. The Control Panel window displays.  
c. At the Control Panel window, double-click the Network icon. The Network dialog  
box displays with the Identification page open.  
d. Click the Protocols tab. The Protocols page opens.  
e. Select (highlight) the TCP/IP Protocol entry from the list box and click Properties.  
The Microsoft TCP/IP Properties dialog box displays with the IP Address page  
open (as shown in the following figure).  
f. Record the IP address, then click OK to close the dialog box.  
g. At the Network dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
h. Close the Control Panel window.  
Continue.  
20  
Configure the HAFM server reporting the Duplicate Session communication problem  
as a client.  
a. At the Product View, select Logout from the Logout/Exit menu on the navigation  
control panel. The HAFM Login dialog box displays.  
b. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name and password (obtained in  
"MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 3-7).  
c. Type the IP address of the HAFM server running the first instance of the HAFM  
application in the HAFM server field.  
d. Click Login. The HAFM application opens as a client and the Product View  
displays.  
Did the HAFM server reconfigure as a client and did the Ethernet connection recover?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and the second HAFM  
server appears operational as a client.  
2–48  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Contact the next level of support.  
21  
The IP address defining the switch to the HAFM application is incorrect or unknown  
and must be verified. A maintenance terminal (desktop or notebook PC) and  
asynchronous RS-232 modem cable are required to verify the switch IP address. Both  
tools are provided by installation or service personnel. To verify the switch IP address:  
a. Remove the protective cap from the 9-pin maintenance port at the rear of the  
switch (a flat-tip screwdriver may be required). Connect one end of the RS-232  
modem cable to the port.  
b. Connect the other cable end to a 9-pin communication port (COM1 or COM2) at  
the rear of the maintenance terminal PC.  
c. Power on the maintenance terminal. After the PC powers on, the Windows  
desktop displays.  
d. At the Windows desktop, click the Windows Start button. The Windows  
Workstation menu displays.  
NOTE: The following steps describe inspecting the IP address using HyperTerminal serial  
communication software.  
e. At the Windows Workstation menu, sequentially select Programs, Accessories,  
and HyperTerminal. The Connection Description dialog box displays.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
f. Type Edge-16 in the Name field and click OK. The Connect To dialog box  
displays.  
g. Ensure the Connect using field displays COM1 or COM2 (depending on the  
serial communication port connection to the switch) and click OK. The COMn  
dialog box displays (where n is 1 or 2).  
h. Configure the Port Settings parameters as follows:  
— Bits per second - 57600.  
— Data bits - 8.  
2–50  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
— Parity - None.  
— Stop bits - 1.  
— Flow control - Hardware.  
When the parameters are set, click OK. The HyperTerminal window displays.  
i. At the > prompt, type the user-level password (the default is password) and press  
Enter. The password is case sensitive. The HyperTerminal window displays with  
software and hardware version information for the switch, and an C> prompt at  
the bottom of the window.  
j. At the C> prompt, type the ipconfig command and press Enter. The  
HyperTerminal window displays with configuration information listed (including  
the IP address).  
k. Record the switch IP address.  
l. Select Exit from the File pull-down menu to close the HyperTerminal application.  
The following message box appears:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
m. Click Yes. The following message box appears:  
n. Click No to exit and close the HyperTerminal application.  
o. Power off the maintenance terminal.  
p. Disconnect the RS-232 modem cable from the switch and the maintenance  
terminal. Replace the protective cap over the maintenance port.  
Continue.  
22  
Define the switch’s correct IP address to the HAFM server.  
a. At the Product View, right-click the icon with the grey square representing the  
switch reporting the problem. A pop-up menu displays.  
b. Select Modify. The Modify Network Address dialog box displays.  
c. Type the correct IP address and click OK.  
Did the IP address below the switch icon change to the new entry and did the Ethernet  
connection recover?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
23  
An incorrect product type is defined to the HAFM server  
a. At the Product View, right-click the icon with the grey square representing the  
product reporting the problem. A pop-up menu displays.  
2–52  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
b. Select Delete. A Warning dialog box displays asking if the product is to be  
deleted.  
c. Click Yes to delete the product.  
d. At the Product View, select New Product from the Configure menu on the  
navigation control panel. The New Product dialog box displays.  
e. Type the configured IP address in the Network Address field.  
f. Select Edge-16 from the Product Type list box and click OK.  
Did the IP address below the switch icon change to the new entry and did the Ethernet  
connection recover?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-HAFM server connection is restored and appears operational.  
24  
The product at the configured IP address is not a Hewlett Packard managed product.  
Notify the customer of the problem.  
a. At the Product View, right-click the icon with the grey square representing the  
product reporting the problem. A pop-up menu displays.  
b. Select Delete. A Warning dialog box displays asking if the product is to be  
deleted.  
c. Click Yes to delete the product.  
Exit MAP.  
25  
Does the embedded web server application appear operational?  
NO  
YES  
The switch-to-web server PC connection is restored and appears operational.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
26  
A Page cannot be found, Unable to locate the server, HTTP 404 - file not found,  
or other similar message appears. The message indicates the web browser PC  
cannot communicate with the switch because:  
The switch-to-PC Internet (Ethernet) link could not be established.  
AC power distribution in the switch failed, or AC power was disconnected.  
The switch CTP card failed.  
Continue.  
27  
Inspect the switch reporting the problem for indications of being powered on, such as:  
At the front panel, an illuminated PWR or ERR indicator.  
Green LEDs illuminated on the power supplies.  
Audio emanations and airflow from fans.  
Does the switch appear powered on?  
YES  
NO  
Analysis for an AC power distribution or CTP card failure is not described in  
this MAP. Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7. If this is the second time  
at this step, contact the next level of support.  
28  
Either a switch-to-PC Internet link problem (Internet too busy or IP address typed  
incorrectly) or a switch Ethernet port failure is indicated.  
a. Wait approximately five minutes, then attempt to login to the switch again.  
b. At the Netsite field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field (Internet Explorer), type  
http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the switch  
(obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7). The Username and Password  
Required dialog box appears.  
c. Type the user name and password (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page  
2-7) and click OK. If the View panel does not display, wait another five minutes  
and perform this step again.  
Does the embedded web server interface appear operational with the View panel  
displayed?  
NO  
YES  
2–54  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
The switch-to-web server PC connection is restored and appears operational.  
29  
An unrecoverable Ethernet fault (reported as event code 433) is indicated. The event  
code is not reported to the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event log,  
and must be verified through the switch maintenance port. A maintenance terminal  
(desktop or notebook PC) and asynchronous RS-232 modem cable are required to  
verify the reporting of event code 433. Both tools are provided by installation or  
service personnel. To verify the event code:  
a. Remove the protective cap from the 9-pin maintenance port at the rear of the  
switch (a flat-tip screwdriver may be required). Connect one end of the RS-232  
modem cable to the port.  
b. Connect the other cable end to a 9-pin communication port (COM1 or COM2) at  
the rear of the maintenance terminal PC.  
c. Power on the maintenance terminal. After the PC powers on, the Windows  
desktop displays.  
d. At the Windows desktop, click the Windows Start button. The Windows  
Workstation menu displays.  
NOTE: The following steps describe inspecting event code 433 using HyperTerminal serial  
communication software.  
e. At the Windows Workstation menu, sequentially select Programs, Accessories,  
and HyperTerminal. The Connection Description dialog box displays.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
f. Type Edge-16 in the Name field and click OK. The Connect To dialog box  
displays.  
g. Ensure the Connect using field displays COM1 or COM2 (depending on the  
serial communication port connection to the switch), and click OK. The COMn  
dialog box displays (where n is 1 or 2).  
h. Configure the Port Settings parameters as follows:  
— Bits per second - 57600.  
— Data bits - 8.  
2–56  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
— Parity - None.  
— Stop bits - 1.  
— Flow control - Hardware.  
When the parameters are set, click OK. The HyperTerminal window displays.  
i. At the C> prompt, type the user-level password (the default is password) and  
press Enter. The password is case sensitive. The HyperTerminal window  
displays with software and hardware version information for the switch, and a C>  
prompt at the bottom of the window.  
j. At the C> prompt, type the displaylog command and press Enter. The  
HyperTerminal window displays with the event log (from switch NV-RAM) listed.  
k. If listed in the REAS column, record the event code 433.  
l. Select Exit from the File pull-down menu to close the HyperTerminal application.  
The following message box appears:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
m. Click Yes. The following message box appears:  
n. Click No to exit and close the HyperTerminal application.  
o. Power off the maintenance terminal.  
p. Disconnect the RS-232 modem cable from the switch and the maintenance  
terminal. Replace the protective cap over the maintenance port.  
Was event code 433 reported?  
NO  
YES  
An unrecoverable Ethernet fault (CTP card failure) occurred. Because the  
CTP card is not a FRU, replace the switch.  
Contact the next level of support.  
MAP 0500: Fan and CTP Failure Analysis  
This MAP describes fault isolation for the CTP card (which is not a FRU) and fan  
FRUs. Failure indicators include:  
The amber LED on a fan illuminates.  
The amber emulated LED on a fan graphic at the Hardware View illuminates.  
A blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appears at the Product  
View or Hardware View.  
An event code recorded at the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event  
log.  
A Failed or Not Installed message associated with a fan at the embedded web  
server interface.  
2–58  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
1
Was an event code 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307; or 604, 605, 607; or 800,  
801, 802, 805, 806, 807, 810, 811, 812, or 850 observed at the switch Event Log  
(HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 3.  
2
The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and associated  
steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
First cooling fan failed.  
Second cooling fan failed.  
Third cooling fan failed.  
Fourth cooling fan failed.  
Action  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
300  
301  
302  
303  
304  
Fifth cooling fan failed (does not apply Go to step 8.  
to edge switch 2/16).  
305  
Sixth cooling fan failed (does not apply Go to step 8.  
to edge switch 2/16).  
604  
605  
607  
SBAR failure.  
Go to step 14.  
Go to step 12.  
Go to step 14.  
SBAR revision not supported.  
Switch contains no operational SBAR  
assemblies.  
800  
801  
802  
805  
806  
High-temperature warning (port  
module sensor)  
Go to step 8.  
Critically hot temperature warning (port Go to step 8.  
module thermal sensor)  
Port module shutdown due to thermal  
violations.  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
High-temperature warning (SBAR  
Critically hot temperature warning  
(SBAR assembly thermal sensor).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
807  
SBAR assembly shutdown due to  
thermal violation.  
Go to step 8.  
810  
811  
812  
850  
High temperature warning (CTP card  
thermal sensor).  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
Go to step 8.  
Critically hot temperature warning  
(CTP card thermal sensor).  
CTP card shutdown due to thermal  
violation.  
System shutdown due to CTP card  
thermal violations.  
3
Is remote fault isolation being performed at the switch or HAFM server?  
YES  
NO  
Remote fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server  
interface. Go to step 6.  
4
Does a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appear to overlay a fan  
(cooling fan assembly) graphic at the Hardware View?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 8.  
5
Does inspection of a fan indicate a failure? Indicators include:  
The amber LED at the upper left corner of a fan illuminates.  
The fan is not rotating.  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 8.  
The switch appears operational.  
2–60  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
6
Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?  
YES  
NO  
Analysis for an Ethernet link, AC power distribution, or CTP card failure is not  
described in this MAP. Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7. If this is the  
second time at this step, contact the next level of support.  
7
Inspect the fan operational states at the embedded web server interface.  
a. At the View panel, click the Component Properties tab. The View panel  
(Component Properties tab) displays.  
b. Inspect the State fields for Fan 0 through Fan 3.  
Does the State field display a Failed message for any fan?  
YES  
NO  
The switch appears operational.  
8
A fan failed or is improperly installed.  
a. Partially remove a fan from the chassis.  
b. Reseat the fan in the chassis.  
Does the fan appear to function?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
9
A fan failed and must be removed and replaced ("RRP: Cooling Fan" on page 4-6.  
Does the fan appear to function?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
10  
Have the customer inspect and verify that facility power is within specifications. These  
specifications are:  
One single-phase connection for each power supply.  
Input power between 120 and 230 Vac.  
Input current between 2 and 4 amps.  
Input frequency between 47 and 63 Hz.  
Is facility power within specifications?  
YES  
NO  
Ask the customer to correct the facility power problem. When facility power is  
corrected, verify switch temperature cools to within the operational limit.  
11  
Inspect the fans. Do one or more fans appear to rotate at insufficient angular velocity  
(failure pending)?  
NO  
Remove and replace the affected fan ("RRP: Cooling Fan" on page 4-6 or.  
After fan replacement, verify switch temperature cools to within the  
operational limit.  
A power supply problem is indicated. Go to "MAP 0100: Power Distribution Analysis" on  
page 2-26.  
12  
An SBAR module is not recognized by switch firmware because the firmware version  
is not supported or the SBAR module failed. Advise the customer of the problem and  
determine the correct firmware version to download from the HAFM server.  
Download the firmware ("Download a Firmware Version to a Switch" on page 3-45).  
Perform the data collection procedure after the download.  
Continue.  
13  
Did the firmware download solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
2–62  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
14  
The SBAR on the CTP card failed. Because the SBAR is not a FRU, SBAR failure  
requires replacing the switch.  
Contact the next level of support.  
MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis  
This MAP describes fault isolation for small form factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers  
and Fibre Channel link incidents. Failure indicators include:  
The amber LED adjacent to a Fibre Channel port illuminates.  
The amber emulated LED adjacent to a port graphic at the Hardware View  
illuminates.  
A blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) or yellow triangle  
(attention indicator) appears at the Product View or Hardware View.  
An event code recorded at the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event  
log.  
A port failure message at the Port Properties dialog box or embedded web server  
interface.  
A link incident message at the Link Incident Log or Port Properties.  
1
Was an event code 080, 440, 504, 506, 507, 508, 512, 514, or 604 observed at the  
switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 3.  
2
Was an event code 581, 582, 583, 584, 585, or 586 observed at the console of an OSI  
or FICON server attached to the switch reporting the problem.?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 4.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
3
The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and associated  
steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
080  
Unauthorized world wide name  
Embedded port hardware failure.  
Go to step 21  
Go to step 11.  
Go to step 11.  
440  
504  
Port module failure - error threshold  
exceeded.  
506  
507  
508  
512  
514  
581  
582  
583  
584  
Fibre Channel port failure.  
Loopback diagnostics port failure.  
Fibre Channel port anomaly detected.  
SFP nonfatal error.  
Go to step 11.  
Go to step 12.  
Go to step 12.  
Go to step 11.  
Go to step 11.  
Go to step 32.  
Go to step 34.  
Go to step 32.  
Go to step 32.  
SFP failure.  
Implicit incident.  
Bit-error threshold exceeded.  
Loss of signal or loss of synchronization.  
Not operational primitive sequence  
(NOS) received.  
585  
586  
Primitive sequence timeout  
Go to step 33.  
Go to step 33.  
Invalid primitive sequence received for  
link state.  
604  
SBAR module failure.  
Go to step 32.  
4
Is fault isolation being performed at the switch or HAFM server?  
YES  
NO  
Fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server  
interface. Go to step 35.  
5
Is the amber LED adjacent to a Fibre Channel port illuminated, but not blinking?  
2–64  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 11.  
6
Does a blinking red and yellow diamond (failed FRU indicator) appear to overlay a  
port graphic at the Hardware View?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 11.  
7
Did a Fibre Channel port fail a loopback test?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 12.  
8
Perform link incident or failure analysis for the port.  
Does a yellow triangle (attention indicator) overlay the port graphic at the Hardware  
View?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 10.  
9
Inspect the port state and LED (green and amber) status.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
a. At the Hardware View, click the port graphic. The Port Properties dialog box  
displays.  
b. Inspect the Operational State field and the emulated green and amber LEDs  
adjacent to the port at the Hardware View.  
c. The following table lists LED and port operational state combinations, and  
associated MAP 0600 (or other) steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Operational  
State  
Green  
LED  
Amber  
LED  
Action  
Go to step 11.  
Go to step 14.  
Go to step 14.  
Port Failure  
Offline  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Not  
Operational  
No Light  
Testing  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Go to step 14.  
Blinking  
Internal loopback  
test in process.  
Testing  
On  
Blinking  
Blinking  
External loopback  
test in process.  
Beaconing  
Off or On  
Go to step 15.  
2–66  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Operational  
State  
Green  
LED  
Amber  
LED  
Action  
Inactive  
Off  
Off  
See Reason Field  
of Port Properties  
dialog box.  
Not Installed  
Off  
Off  
The port optics are  
not installed or the  
feature that  
providesadditional  
port function is not  
enabled.  
Invalid  
On  
Off  
Go to step 16  
attachment  
Link Reset  
Link Incident  
Segmented  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Go to step 24.  
Go to step 25.  
Go to MAP 0700.  
10  
A link incident may have occurred, but the LIN alerts option is not enabled for the port  
and the attention indicator does not appear.  
At the Hardware View, select Link Incident Log from the Logs menu on the navigation  
control panel. The Link Incident Log displays. If a link incident occurred, the affected  
port number is listed with one of the following messages.  
Implicit incident.  
Bit-error threshold exceeded.  
Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.  
Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence (NOS) received.  
Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.  
Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.  
Did one of the listed messages appear in the Link Incident Log?  
NO  
YES  
Go to step 25.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
11  
A Fibre Channel port SFP failed and must be removed and replaced.  
a. Determine the type of SFP to be removed and replaced. This procedure is  
concurrent and can be performed while switch power is on (RRP: SFP  
Transceiver on page 4-2).  
b. Perform an external loopback test on the port SFP as part of FRU removal and  
replacement.  
c. Perform the data collection procedure as part of FRU removal and replacement.  
Did port SFP replacement solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
12  
A Fibre Channel port SFP failed an internal or external loopback test.  
a. Reset the failed port.  
1. At the Hardware View, right-click the port. A pop-up menu appears.  
2. Select Reset Port. A Reset Port n message box displays, where n is the port  
number (0 through 15).  
3. Click OK. The port resets.  
b. Perform an external loopback test for the port SFP.  
Did resetting the port solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
2–68  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
13  
The port SFP may be improperly seated in the chassis. Partially remove and reseat  
the SFP, then perform an external loopback test for the SFP.  
Did reseating the port SFP solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational.  
Go to step 11.  
14  
The fabric is initializing or a problem with the port-attached device is indicated as  
described by one of the following operational state messages:  
Offline - the port is blocked and transmitting the offline sequence (OLS) to the  
attached switch, or the port is unblocked and receiving the OLS, indicating the  
attached switch is set offline.  
Not Operational - the port is receiving the Fibre Channel not operational  
sequence (NOS), indicating the attached switch failed.  
No light (any port) - no signal (light) is received by the port. This is a normal  
condition when there is no cable attached to the port SFP or when the attached  
switch or fabric device is powered off.  
Inform the customer an attached switch or fabric device is powered off, set offline, or  
failed.  
15  
Beaconing is enabled for the port.  
a. Consult with the customer and next level of support to determine the reason port  
beaconing is enabled.  
b. Disable port beaconing:  
1. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.  
2. Click Enable Beaconing. The check mark disappears from the box adjacent to  
the option, and port beaconing is disabled.  
Was port beaconing enabled because port failure or degradation was suspected?  
YES  
NO  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
The switch appears operational.  
Go to step 4.  
16  
The port has an invalid attachment. The information in the Port Properties dialog box  
specifies the reason as listed in the following table.  
Reason  
Action  
Unknown  
Contact the next  
level of support.  
ISL connection not allowed on  
this port.  
Go to step 17.  
Incompatible switch at other end Go to step 18.  
of ISL.  
External loopback adapter  
connected to the port.  
Go to step 19.  
Go to step 17.  
Go to step 18.  
Go to step 21.  
Go to step 22.  
N-Port connection not allowed  
on this port.  
Non-Hewlett Packard switch at  
other end of the ISL.  
Port binding violation -  
Unauthorized WWN.  
Unresponsive node connected  
to port.  
17  
The port connection conflicts with the configured port type. Either an  
expansion port (E_Port) is incorrectly cabled to a Fibre Channel device or a  
fabric port (F_Port) is incorrectly cabled to a fabric element (director or switch).  
a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, click the Configure icon at the navigation  
control panel and select Ports from the Configure menu. The Configure Ports  
dialog box (open systems mode) displays.  
2–70  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
b. Use the vertical scroll bar as necessary to display the information row for the port  
indicating an invalid attachment.  
c. Select (click) the Type field and configure the port from the list box as follows:  
Select fabric port (F_Port) if the port is cabled to a device (node).  
Select expansion port (E_Port) if the port is cabled to a fabric element  
(director or switch) to form an ISL.  
d. Click the Activate button to save the configuration information and close the  
dialog box.  
Did reconfiguring the port type solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.  
Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.  
18  
The switch is configured for Open Fabric mode and the switch at the other end of the  
ISL is a Hewlett Packard director or switch configured for Homogeneous mode. Or the  
switch is connected to a non-Hewlett Packard switch and interop mode is set to  
Configure the switch operating mode:  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
a. Ensure the switch is set offline. For instructions, refer to "Set Offline State" on  
page 3-38 and return here.  
b. At the Hardware View for the selected switch, click the Configure icon at the  
navigation control panel and select Operating Mode from the Configure menu.  
The Configure Operating Mode dialog box displays.  
c. Select the operating mode as follows:  
— Select the Open Systems radio button to set the switch to open systems  
operating mode, then select Homogeneous Fabric or Open Fabric 1.0 from the  
Interop Mode list box.  
Select the homogeneous fabric option if the switch is fabric-attached only to  
other Hewlett Packard switches that are also operating in Homogeneous  
Fabric mode. Select the open fabric option if the fabric contains Hewlett  
Packard switches and other open-fabric compliant switches.  
d. Click the Activate button to save the selection and close the dialog box.  
Did configuring the operating mode solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.  
Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.  
19  
A loopback (wrap) plug is connected to the port and there is no diagnostic test  
running. Is a loopback plug in the port receptacle?  
YES  
NO  
Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.  
2–72  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
20  
Remove the loopback plug from the port receptacle. If directed by the customer,  
connect a fiber-optic jumper cable attaching a device to the switch.  
If the port is operational and a device is not attached, both LEDs adjacent to the  
port extinguish and the port state is No Light.  
If the port is operational and a device is attached, the green  
LED illuminates, the amber LED extinguishes, and the port state is Online.  
Did removing the loopback plug solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.  
Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.  
21  
The WWN entered to configure port binding for this port is not valid or a nickname was  
used that was not configured for the attached device in the product manager.  
Open the Node List View from the Hardware View, and select Node List from  
the View menu on the navigation control panel. Note the Port WWN column.  
The Port WWN is the eight-byte (16-digit) worldwide name (WWN) assigned to the  
port or Fibre Channel interface installed on the attached device.  
— If a nickname is not assigned to the WWN, the WWN is prefixed by the device  
manufacturer’s name.  
— If a nickname is assigned to the WWN, the nickname appears in place of the  
WWN.  
The Bound WWN must be in the form of the raw WWN format  
(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) or must be a valid nickname.  
Did configuring the WWN or nickname solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch appears operational. Exit MAP.  
Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
22  
Clean the fiber-optic connectors on the cable.  
a. Notify the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system  
administrator stops Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the  
attached device offline.  
b. Block the port. Refer to "Block a Port" on page 3-39 for instructions.  
c. Disconnect both ends of the fiber-optic cable.  
d. Clean the fiber-optic connectors. Refer to "Clean Fiber-Optic Components" on page  
3-33 for instructions.  
e. Reconnect the fiber-optic cable.  
f. Unblock the port. Refer to "Unblock a Port" on page 3-39 for instructions.  
g. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.  
Did the link incident recur?  
YES  
NO  
The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.  
Exit MAP.  
23  
Inspect and service the host bus adapters (HBAs), as necessary.  
2–74  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Did service of the HBAs solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
Exit MAP.  
Contact the next level of support. Exit MAP.  
24  
The switch and attached fabric device are performing a Fibre Channel link reset. This  
is a transient state. Wait approximately 30 seconds and inspect port state and LED  
behavior.  
Did the link recover and resume operation?  
NO  
YES  
The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.  
Go to step 4.  
25  
A link incident message appeared in the Link Incident Log or in the Link Incident field  
the Port Properties dialog box.  
Clear the link incident for the port.  
a. At the Hardware View, right-click the port graphic. A pop-up menu appears.  
b. Select Clear Link Incident Alert(s). The Clear Link Incident Alert(s) dialog box  
displays.  
c. Select the This port (n) only radio button (where n is the port number) and click  
OK. The link incident clears.  
d. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.  
YES NO  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
The problem is transient. The Fibre Channel link and the switch appear  
operational.  
26  
Inspect the fiber-optic jumper cable attached to the port and ensure the cable is not  
bent and connectors are not damaged. If the cable is bent or connectors are  
damaged:  
administrator stops Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the  
attached switch or device offline.  
b. Block the port ("Block a Port" on page 3-39).  
c. Remove and replace the fiber-optic jumper cable.  
d. Unblock the port ("Unblock a Port" on page 3-39).  
Was a corrective action performed?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 28.  
27  
Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.  
Did the link incident recur?  
YES  
NO  
The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.  
28  
Clean fiber-optic connectors on the jumper cable.  
a. Notify the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the  
attached switch or device offline.  
b. Block the port ("Block a Port" on page 3-39).  
c. Disconnect both ends of the fiber-optic jumper cable.  
d. Clean the fiber-optic connectors ("Clean Fiber-Optic Components" on page 3-33)  
e. Reconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable.  
f. Unblock the port ("Unblock a Port" on page 3-39).  
2–76  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
g. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.  
Did the link incident recur?  
YES  
NO  
The Fibre Channel link and switch appear operational.  
29  
Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port and connect the cable to a spare  
port.  
Is a link incident reported at the new port?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 31.  
30  
The attached device is causing the recurrent link incident. Notify the customer of the  
problem and have the system administrator:  
a. Inspect and verify operation of the attached device.  
b. Repair the attached device if a failure is indicated.  
c. Monitor port operation for approximately five minutes.  
Did the link incident recur?  
YES  
NO  
The attached device, Fibre Channel link, and switch appear operational.  
Contact the next level of support  
31  
The switch port reporting the problem is causing the recurrent link incident. The  
recurring link incident indicates port degradation and a possible pending failure. Go to  
step 11.  
32  
An implicit incident error (event code 581), loss of signal or loss of synchronization  
(event code 583), not operational primitive sequence (NOS) received (event code  
584), or SBAR module failure (event code 604) caused the switch to fault.  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard for  
analysis.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
33  
The switch primitive sequence timed out (event code 585) or an invalid primitive  
sequence was received for link state (event code 586). Either error causes the switch  
to automatically reinitialize the fabric. Attached devices may momentarily logout, login,  
and resume operation.  
If the problem persists, an attached device may be marginally operating and causing  
the error condition. Inform the customer of the problem.  
34  
A port was bypassed because a bit-error threshold was exceeded (event code 582).  
If the problem persists, the attached device may be marginally operating and causing  
the error condition. Inform the customer of the problem.  
35  
Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?  
YES  
NO  
Analysis for an Ethernet link, AC power distribution, or CTP card failure is not  
described in this MAP. Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7. If this is the  
second time at this step, contact the next level of support.  
36  
Inspect port operational states at the embedded web server interface.  
a. At the View panel, click the Port Properties tab. The View panel (Port Properties  
tab) displays.  
b. Inspect the Operational State field.  
c. At the View panel (Port Properties tab) click the first port (1).  
d. Inspect the Operational State field.  
Inspect the Operational State field for each port.  
Does the Operational State field display a Segmented message for a port?  
NO  
YES  
Port segmentation is indicated. Go to "MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented  
Port Problem Determination" on page 2-79.  
2–78  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
37  
Does the Operational State field display a Port Failure message for any port?  
NO  
YES  
A port SFP failure is indicated. Go to step 11.  
The switch appears operational.  
MAP 0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port Problem  
Determination  
This MAP describes isolation of fabric logout, interswitch link (ISL), and port  
segmentation problems. Failure indicators include:  
An event code recorded at the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event  
log.  
A segmentation reason associated with the port at the embedded web server  
interface.  
A yellow triangle (attention indicator) appears at the Product View or Hardware  
View.  
A link incident message recorded in the Link Incident Log or Port Properties  
dialog box.  
1
Was an event code 011, 021, 051, 052, 061, 062, 070, 071, or 072, observed at the  
switch Event Log (HAFM server) or at the embedded web server event log?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 3.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
2
The following table lists event codes, brief explanations of the codes, and associated  
steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Event  
Code  
Explanation  
Action  
011  
Login server database invalid.  
Name server database invalid.  
Management server database invalid.  
Management server internal error.  
Fabric controller database invalid.  
Go to step 7.  
Go to step 7.  
Go to step 7.  
Go to step 7.  
Go to step 7.  
Go to step 8.  
021  
051  
052  
061  
062  
Maximum interswitch hop count  
exceeded.  
070  
071  
072  
E_Port is segmented.  
Switch is isolated.  
Go to step 9.  
Go to step 9.  
Go to step 10.  
E_Port connected to an unsupported  
switch.  
3
Is fault isolation being performed at the HAFM server?  
YES  
NO  
Fault isolation is being performed through the embedded web server  
interface. Go to step 17.  
4
Does a yellow triangle (attention indicator) appear to overlay the port graphic at the  
Hardware View?  
YES  
NO  
The problem is transient and the switch-to-fabric device connection appears  
operational.  
5
Inspect the port state and LED status for the port.  
2–80  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
a. At the Hardware View, click the port graphic. The Port Properties dialog box  
displays.  
b. Inspect the Operational State field.  
Does the Operational State field indicate Segmented E_Port?  
YES  
NO  
Analysis for a port failure or other link incident is not described in this MAP. Go  
to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis" on page 2-63.  
6
Inspect the Reason field at the Port Properties dialog box. The following table lists port  
segmentation reasons and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Segmentation Reason  
Incompatible operating parameters.  
Duplicate domain IDs.  
Action  
Go to step 11.  
Go to step 12.  
Go to step 13.  
Go to step 14.  
Go to step 19.  
Go to step 16.  
Incompatible zoning configurations.  
Build fabric protocol error.  
No principal switch.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
7
As indicated by an event code 052, a minor internal operating error was detected by  
the management server subsystem. The error caused management server databases  
to be re-initialized to an empty state. As a result, a disruptive server logout and login  
occurred for all attached devices. All attached devices resume operation after  
management server login.  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard for  
analysis.  
8
As indicated by an event code 062, the fabric controller software detected a path  
within the connected multi-switch fabric that traverses more than seven interswitch  
links (ISLs or hops). Fibre Channel frames may persist in the fabric longer than  
timeout values allow.  
Advise the customer of the problem and work with the system administrator to  
reconfigure the fabric so the path between any two fabric switches does not traverse  
more than seven hops.  
Did fabric reconfiguration solve the problem?  
NO  
YES  
The switch and connected multi-switch fabric appear operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
9
A 070 event code indicates the E_Port detected an incompatibility with an attached  
switch and prevented the switches from forming a multi-switch fabric. A segmented  
E_port cannot transmit Class 2 or Class 3 Fibre Channel traffic.  
A 071 event code indicates the switch is isolated from all switches in a multi-switch  
fabric, and is accompanied by a 070 event code for the segmented E_Port. The 071  
event code is resolved when all 070 events are corrected.  
Obtain supplementary event data for the 070 event code.  
a. At the switch Event Log or the embedded web server event log, record the first  
four bytes (0 through 3) of event data.  
b. Examine the first five bytes (0 through 4) of event data.  
2–82  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Diagnostics  
c. Byte 0 specifies the port number (00 through 15) of the segmented E_port. Byte  
4 specifies the segmentation reason as listed in the following table.  
Byte  
3
Segmentation Reason  
Action  
01  
Incompatible operating  
parameters.  
Go to step 11.  
02  
03  
Duplicate domain IDs.  
Go to step 12.  
Go to step 13.  
Incompatible zoning  
configurations.  
04  
05  
06  
Build fabric protocol error.  
No principal switch.  
Go to step 14.  
Go to step 19.  
Go to step 16.  
No response from attached  
switch (Hello Timeout).  
10  
As indicated by an event code 072, the switch E_Port is connected to an unsupported  
switch.  
Advise the customer of the problem and disconnect the interswitch link to the  
unsupported switch.  
11  
The switch E_Port segmented because the error detect time-out value (E_D_TOV) or  
resource allocation time-out value (R_A_TOV) is incompatible with the attached fabric  
element.  
a. Contact Hewlett Packard customer support or engineering personnel to  
determine the recommended E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values for the switches.  
b. Notify the customer that both switches will be set offline. Ensure the system  
administrator stops Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switches and sets  
attached devices offline.  
c. Set both switches offline ("Set Offline State" on page 3-38).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
d. At the Hardware View for the switch, select Operating Parameters from the  
Configure menu on the navigation control panel. The Configure Operating  
Parameters dialog box displays.  
e. Type the recommended E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values, then click Activate.  
f. Repeat steps d and e at the Hardware View for the switch attached to the  
segmented switch. Use the same E_D_TOV and R_A_TOV values.  
g. Set both switches online ("Set Online State" on page 3-37).  
Did the operating parameter change solve the problem and did both switches join  
through the ISL to form a fabric?  
NO  
YES  
The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
12  
The switch E_Port segmented because two fabric elements have duplicate domain  
IDs.  
a. Work with the system administrator to determine the desired domain ID (1  
through 31 inclusive) for both switches.  
b. Notify the customer that both switches will be set offline. Ensure the system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switches and sets  
attached devices offline.  
c. Set both switches offline ("Set Offline State" on page 3-38).  
2–84  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
d. At the Hardware View for the switch, select Operating Parameters from the  
Configure menu on the navigation control panel. The Configure Operating  
Parameters dialog box displays.  
e. Type the customer-determined preferred domain ID value, then click Activate.  
f. Repeat steps d and e at the Hardware View for the switch attached to the  
segmented E-Port (second switch). Use a different preferred domain ID value.  
g. Set both switches online ("Set Online State" on page 3-37).  
Did the domain ID change solve the problem and did both switches join through the  
ISL to form a fabric?  
NO  
YES  
The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
13  
The switch E_Port segmented because two switches have incompatible zoning  
configurations. An identical zone name is recognized in the active zone set for both  
switches, but the zones contain different members.  
a. Work with the system administrator to determine the desired zone name change  
for the one of the affected switches.Zone names must conform to the following  
rules:  
The name must be 64 characters or fewer in length.  
The first character must be a letter (a through z), upper or lower case.  
Other characters are alphanumeric (a through z or 0 through 9), dollar sign  
($), hyphen (-), caret (^), or underscore (_).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
b. Close the product manager application for the switch (Hardware View). The main  
HAFM window, or Product View (still active) displays.  
c. Select the Fabrics tab from the View menu. The Fabrics View displays with the  
default Topology tab active.  
d. Select the Zone Set tab at the bottom of the window. The Zone Set tab becomes  
active and displays the active zone set.  
e. Inspect zone names in the active zone set to determine the incompatible name.  
f. Modify the incompatible zone name as directed by the customer:  
1. At the navigation control panel, select Zone Sets from the Configure menu.  
The Zone Sets dialog box displays.  
2. Select (highlight) the active zone set name, then select Modify from the  
Actions icon on the dialog box. The Modify Zone Set dialog box displays.  
3. Select (highlight) the zone name to be modified (and later deleted) at the  
Zone Library list, then select Copy Zone from the Actions icon on the dialog  
box. The Copy Zone dialog box displays.  
4. Type the new zone name (specified by the customer) and click OK. The new  
zone name appears in the Zone Library list. The new zone contains the same  
members as the copied zone.  
2–86  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
5. Select (highlight) the new zone name and drag (holding the left mouse button)  
the name to the Zones in Set list.  
6. At the Zones in Set list, select (highlight) the zone name to be deleted, then  
drag (holding the left mouse button) the name off the Modify Zone Set dialog  
box.  
7. At the Modify Zone Set dialog box, click Save Zone Set. The zone set (with  
the new zone name) is saved and the dialog box closes.  
8. At the Zone Sets dialog box, select (highlight) the active zone set name, then  
select Activate from the Actions icon on the dialog box. The Activate Zone Set  
dialog box displays.  
9. Click Start. The status message changes to Activate zone set complete. Click  
Close to close the dialog box.  
10.Click Close to close the Zone Sets dialog box and return to the Zoning Set tab  
view with the modified active zone set.  
Did the zone name change solve the problem and did both switches join through the  
ISL to form a fabric?  
NO  
YES  
The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
14  
The switch E_Port segmented because a build fabric protocol error was detected.  
a. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the segmented E_Port.  
b. Reconnect the cable to the same port.  
Did reconnecting the cable solve the problem and did both switches join through the  
ISL to form a fabric?  
NO  
YES  
The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.  
15  
Initial program load (IPL) the switch (Reset or IPL the Switch on page -35).  
Did the IPL solve the problem and did both switches join through the ISL to form a  
fabric?  
NO  
YES  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.  
Contact the next level of support.  
16  
The switch E_Port segmented because a response to a verification check indicates  
the attached switch is not operational.  
a. Perform the data collection procedure for the switch and return the Zip disk to  
Hewlett Packard for analysis.  
b. Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 and perform fault isolation for the failed  
switch.  
17  
Does the embedded web server interface appear operational?  
YES  
NO  
Analysis for an Ethernet link, AC power distribution, or CTP card failure is not  
described in this MAP. Go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7. If this is the  
second time at this step, contact the next level of support.  
18  
Inspect the Fibre Channel port segmentation reason at the embedded web server  
interface.  
a. At the View panel, click the Port Properties tab. The View panel (Port Properties  
tab) displays.  
b. Click the port number (0 through 15) of the segmented port.  
c. Inspect the Reason field for the port.  
Is the Reason field blank or does it display an N/A message?  
NO  
YES  
The switch ISL appears operational.  
The Reason field displays a reason message. The following table lists segmentation  
reasons and associated steps that describe fault isolation procedures.  
Segmentation Reason  
Incompatible operating parameters.  
Duplicate domain IDs.  
Action  
Go to step 12.  
Go to step 13.  
Incompatible zoning configurations.  
2–88  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
Segmentation Reason  
Build fabric protocol error.  
Action  
Go to step 14.  
Go to step 19.  
Go to step 16.  
No principal switch.  
No response from attached switch.  
19  
A switch E_Port segmented because no switch in the fabric is capable of becoming  
the principal switch.  
a. Notify the customer that the switch will be set offline. Ensure the system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets  
attached devices offline.  
b. Set the switch offline ("Set Offline State" on page 3-38)  
c. At the Hardware View or Port Card View for the switch, select Operating  
Parameters from the Configure icon on the navigation control panel. The  
Configure Operating Parameters dialog box displays.  
d. At the Switch Priority field, select Principal, Never Principal, or Default (the  
default setting is Default). Then click Activate.  
e. Set the switch online ("Set Online State" on page 3-37)  
Did the switch priority change solve the problem and did both switches join through  
NO  
YES  
The switches, associated ISL, and multi-switch fabric appear operational.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Contact the next level of support.  
MAP 0800: Console PC Problem Determination  
This MAP describes isolation of hardware-related problems with the HAFM server  
platform. Although this MAP provides high-level fault isolation instructions, refer to  
the documentation provided with the PC for detailed problem determination and  
resolution.  
1
At the HAFM server, close the HAFM application.  
a. At the navigation control panel of the Product View, select Exit from the  
Logout/Exit icon. The HAFM application closes.  
b. Close any other applications that are running.  
Continue.  
2
Inspect the available random access memory (RAM). The computer must have a  
minimum of 64 megabytes (MB) of memory to run the Windows operating system and  
HAFM application.  
a. Right-click anywhere in the Windows task bar at the bottom of the desktop. A  
pop-up menu appears.  
b. Select Task Manager. The Windows Task Manager dialog box displays with the  
Performance page open.  
c. At the Physical Memory (K) portion of the dialog box, inspect the total amount of  
physical memory.  
2–90  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
d. Close the dialog box by clicking Close at the upper right corner of the window.  
Does the computer have sufficient memory?  
YES  
NO  
A memory upgrade is required. Inform the customer of the problem and  
contact the next level of support.  
3
Reboot the HAFM server PC and perform system diagnostics.  
a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.  
b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows  
dialog box appears.  
c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click  
d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the  
Begin Logon dialog box displays.  
e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog  
box. Type a user name and password (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on  
page 2-7) and click OK. The Windows desktop displays.  
Did POSTs detect a problem?  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
NO  
YES  
A computer hardware problem exists. Refer to the supporting documentation  
shipped with the PC for instructions on resolving the problem.  
4
After rebooting the PC, the HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog box  
displays.  
Did the HAFM Login dialog box display?  
YES  
NO  
Go to step 6.  
5
At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server name  
(obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7, and all are case sensitive), and click  
Login. The application opens and the Product View displays.  
2–92  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?  
NO  
YES  
The PC appears operational.  
6
Perform one of the following:  
If the PC has standalone diagnostic test programs resident on the hard drive,  
perform the diagnostics. Refer to supporting documentation shipped with the PC  
for instructions.  
If the PC does not have standalone diagnostic test programs resident on fixed  
disk, go to step 7.  
Did diagnostic test programs detect a problem?  
NO  
YES  
Refer to the supporting documentation shipped with the PC for instructions to  
resolve the problem.  
7
Reboot the HAFM server PC.  
a. Click the Windows Start button. The Windows Workstation menu displays.  
b. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Shut Down. The Shut Down Windows  
dialog box appears.  
c. At the Shut Down Windows dialog box, select Shut down the Computer and click  
d. Wait approximately 30 seconds and power on the PC. After POSTs complete, the  
Begin Logon dialog box displays.  
e. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Logon Information dialog  
box. Type a user name and password (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on  
page 2-7) and click OK. The HAFM application starts and the HAFM Login dialog  
box displays.  
f. At the HAFM Login dialog box, type a user name, password, and HAFM server  
name (obtained in "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7, and all are case  
sensitive), and click Login. The application opens and the Product View displays.  
Did the Product View display and does the HAFM application appear operational?  
NO  
YES  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
2–93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostics  
The PC appears operational.  
8
Re-install the HAFM application ("Install or Upgrade Software" on page 2-51).  
Did the HAFM application install and open successfully?  
NO  
YES  
The PC appears operational.  
9
Advise the customer and next level of support that the PC hard drive should be  
formatted. If the customer and support personnel do not concur, go to step 10.  
a. Format the PC hard drive. Refer to supporting documentation shipped with the  
PC for instructions.  
b. Install the Windows operating system and HAFM application.  
Did the PC hard drive format, and did the operating system and HAFM application  
install and open successfully?  
NO  
YES  
The PC appears operational.  
10  
Additional analysis for the failure is not described in this MAP. Contact the next level  
of support.  
2–94  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Repair Information  
isible Body Tag  
This chapter describes the repair and repair-related procedures for the hp  
StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 (edge switch 2/16), and associated field-replaceable  
units (FRUs). These procedures are described:  
Obtaining log information at the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM)  
server.  
Displaying and using HAFM server views.  
Obtaining and interpreting port diagnostic and performance data, and performing  
port diagnostic loopback tests.  
Swapping ports (S/390 mode only).  
Collecting maintenance data.  
Cleaning fiber-optic components.  
Powering the switch on and off.  
Performing an initial program load (IPL).  
Setting the switch online or offline.  
Blocking or unblocking Fibre Channel ports.  
Managing firmware versions.  
Managing configuration data.  
Installing or upgrading software.  
Do not perform repairs until a failure is isolated to a FRU. If fault isolation was not  
performed, refer to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
Factory Defaults  
Table 3–1 lists the defaults for the passwords, and IP, subnet, and gateway addresses.  
Table 3–1: Factory-Set Defaults  
Item  
Default  
password  
level-2  
Customer password  
Maintenance password  
IP address  
10.1.1.10  
255.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Subnet mask  
Gateway address  
Procedural Notes  
NOTE: HAFM and product manager screens in this manual may not match the screens on your  
server and workstation. The title bars have been removed and the fields may contain data that  
does not match the data seen on your system.  
The following procedural notes are referenced in applicable repair procedures. The  
notes do not necessarily apply to all procedures in the chapter.  
1. Before performing a repair procedure, read the procedure carefully and  
thoroughly to familiarize yourself with the information and reduce the possibility  
of problems or customer down time.  
2. When performing procedures described in this chapter, heed all WARNING and  
CAUTION statements, and other statements listed in the preface of this manual.  
3. After completing steps of a detailed procedure that is referenced from another  
procedure, return to the initial (referencing) procedure and continue to the next  
step of that procedure.  
4. After replacing a FRU, extinguish the System Error light-emitting diode (LED) on  
the front of the switch.  
3–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
Using Log Information  
The HAFM and switch product manager provide access to ten logs that provide  
information for administration, operation, and maintenance personnel. Each log stores  
up to 1,000 entries. The most recent entry appears at the top of a log. If a log is full, a  
new entry overwrites the oldest entry.  
Five logs are accessed through the HAFM application:  
HAFM Audit Log.  
HAFM Event Log.  
Session Log.  
Product Status Log.  
Fabric Log  
Five logs are accessed through the product manager application:  
Switch Audit Log.  
Switch Event Log.  
Hardware Log.  
Link Incident Log.  
Threshold Alert Log.  
HAFM Audit Log  
The HAFM Audit Log displays a history of user actions performed through the  
HAFM application. This information is useful for system administrators and users. To  
open the HAFM Audit Log, select Audit Log from the Logs menu on the navigation  
control panel.  
For a description of the HAFM Audit Log and an explanation of button functions at  
the bottom of the log window, refer to the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user  
guide (A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE).  
HAFM Event Log  
The HAFM Event Log (Figure 3–1) displays events or error conditions recorded by  
the HAFM services application. Entries reflect the status of the application and  
managed switches.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Repair Information  
Information associated with a call-home failure is intended for maintenance personnel  
to fault isolate the problem (modem failure, no dial tone, etc.), while information  
provided in all other entries is generally intended for use by third-level support  
personnel to isolate more significant problems.  
To open the HAFM Event Log, select Event Log from the Logs menu on the  
navigation control panel.  
Figure 3–1: HAFM Event Log  
The event log contains the following columns:  
Date/Time - the date and time the event was reported to the HAFM server.  
Event - an event number and brief description of the event. Include both the event  
number and description when reporting an event to third-level customer support.  
Product - the product associated with the event. Some events are associated with  
the HAFM services application, while others are associated with a specific  
instance of the HAFM application. In the latter case, the product and configured  
name (or internet protocol (IP) address) associated with the instance are  
displayed.  
Qualifier - this column provides an event qualifier for use by engineering  
personnel. Include this number when reporting an event to third-level customer  
support.  
Data - additional event data for fault isolating a problem. Use the information  
when fault isolating a call-home problem, or include the information when  
reporting an event to third-level customer support.  
Session Log  
The Session Log displays a session (login and logout) history for the HAFM server,  
including the date and time, user name, and network address of each session. This  
information is useful for system administrators and users. To open the Session Log,  
select Session Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.  
3–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
For a description of the Session Log and an explanation of button functions at the  
bottom of the log window, refer to the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user guide  
(A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE).  
Product Status Log  
The Product Status Log (Figure 3–2) records an entry when the status of a switch  
changes. The log reflects the previous status and current status of the switch, and  
indicates the instance of a switch product manager application that should be opened  
to investigate a problem. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault  
isolation and repair verification.  
To open the Product Status Log, select Product Status Log from the Logs menu on the  
navigation control panel.  
Figure 3–2: Product Status Log  
The log contains the following columns:  
Date/Time - the date and time the switch status change occurred.  
Network Address - the IP address or configured name of the switch. This address  
or name corresponds to the address or name displayed under the switch icon at the  
Product View.  
Previous Status - the status of the switch prior to the reported status change  
(Operational, Degraded, Failed, or Unknown). An Unknown status indicates the  
HAFM application cannot communicate with the switch.  
New Status - the status of the switch after to the reported status change  
(Operational, Degraded, Failed, or Unknown).  
Fabric Log  
The Fabric Log reflects the time and nature of significant changes in the managed  
fabric.  
To display the Fabric Log, choose Fabric Log from the Logs menu.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
The Date/Time column displays the date and time of the change in the fabric.  
The Fabric Status Changed column displays the type of change in the fabric (for  
example, a switch was added or removed, an ISL was added or removed, the  
fabric was renamed or persisted, or a zone set became active).  
The Description column displays a description of the change in the fabric.  
Audit Log  
The switch Audit Log displays a history of all configuration changes made to a switch  
from the product manager simple network management protocol (SNMP)  
management workstation. This information is useful for system administrators and  
users. To open the Audit Log from the Hardware View, Port List View, or Performance  
View, select Audit Log from the Logs menu on the navigation control panel.  
For a description of the Audit Log and an explanation of button functions at the  
bottom of the log window, refer to the switch hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16  
product manager user guide (A7284-96003/AA-RS2KA-TE).  
Event Log  
The switch Event Log (Figure 3–3) displays a history of events for the switch, such as  
system events, degraded operation, FRU failures, FRU removals and replacements,  
port problems, Fibre Channel link incidents, and HAFM server-to-switch  
communication problems. All detected software and hardware failures are recorded in  
the Event Log. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation  
and repair verification.  
To open the Event Log, select Event Log from the Logs menu on the navigation  
control panel.  
Figure 3–3: Switch Event Log  
The log contains the following columns:  
Date/Time - the date and time the switch event occurred.  
Event - the three-digit event code associated with the event. Refer to Appendix B  
for an explanation of event codes.  
3–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
Description - a brief description of the event.  
Severity - the severity of the event (Informational, Minor, Major, or Severe).  
FRU-Position - an acronym representing the FRU or non-FRU element, followed  
by a number representing the FRU or chassis position. The acronyms are:  
SFP - Small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver. Chassis slots for  
SFPs inserted in a port are 0 through 15. The SFPs are FRUs.  
PWR - power supply. Chassis slots for redundant power supplies are 0 and 1.  
The power supplies are FRUs.  
FAN - cooling fan. Chassis slots for redundant fans are 0 through 5 (cooling  
fans). The cooling fans are FRUs.  
CTP - control processor (CTP) card. The chassis slot is 0. The CTP card is  
not a FRU.  
THM - thermal sensor. The chassis slot is 0 (on the CTP card). The thermal  
sensor is not a FRU.  
Event Data - up to 32 bytes of supplementary event data (if available for the  
event) in hexadecimal format. Refer to Appendix B for an explanation of the  
supplementary event data.  
Refresh the Event Log  
To ensure recently-created events appear in the Event Log, periodically refresh the log  
display. This is particularly important when inspecting the log for informational event  
codes to verify a repair procedure. To refresh the log, click Refresh at the bottom of  
the log window.  
Clear the Event Log  
To ensure the Event Log is up-to-date and not filled with archived events, periodically  
clear the log display. To clear the log, click Clear at the bottom of the log window.  
Hardware Log  
The Hardware Log (Figure 3–4) displays a history of FRU removals and replacements  
(insertions) for the switch. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Repair Information  
Figure 3–4: Hardware Log  
To open the Hardware Log, select Hardware Log from the Logs menu on the  
navigation control panel.  
The log contains the following columns:  
Date/Time - the date and time the FRU was inserted or removed.  
FRU-Position - an acronym representing the FRU or non-FRU element, followed  
by a number representing the FRU or chassis position. The acronyms are:  
SFP - Small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver. Chassis slots for  
SFPs inserted in a port are 0 through 15. The SFPs are FRUs.  
PWR - power supply. Chassis slots for redundant power supplies are 0 and 1.  
The power supplies are FRUs.  
FAN - cooling fan. Chassis slots for redundant fans are 0 through 5 (cooling  
fans). The cooling fans are FRUs.  
CTP - control processor (CTP) card. The chassis slot is 0. The CTP card is  
not a FRU.  
THM - thermal sensor. The chassis slot is 0 (on the CTP card). The thermal  
sensor is not a FRU.  
Position - a number representing the FRU chassis position. Chassis slots for  
power supplies are 0 and 1. Chassis slots for fans are 0 through 5 inclusive.  
Chassis slots for SFPs are 0 through 15.  
Action - the action performed (Inserted or Removed).  
Part Number - the part number of the inserted or removed FRU.  
3–8  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
Serial Number - the serial number of the inserted or removed FRU.  
Link Incident Log  
The Link Incident Log (Figure 3–5) displays a history of Fibre Channel link incidents  
and associated port numbers for the switch. The information is useful to maintenance  
personnel for isolating port problems and repair verification.  
To open the Link Incident Log, select Link Incident Log from the Logs menu on the  
navigation control panel.  
Figure 3–5: Link Incident Log  
The log contains the following columns:  
Date/Time - the date and time the link incident occurred.  
Port - the port number that reported the link incident (0 through 15).  
Link Incident - a brief description of the link incident. Problem descriptions  
include:  
— Implicit incident.  
— Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.  
— Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence received.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
— Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.  
— Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for current link state.  
Refer to "MAP 0600: Port Failure and Link Incident Analysis" on page -63 or "MAP  
0700: Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port Problem Determination" on page -79 for  
corrective actions in response to these link incident messages.  
Refresh the Link Incident Log  
To ensure recently-created link incidents appear in the Link Incident Log, periodically  
refresh the log display. To refresh the log, click Refresh at the bottom of the log  
window.  
Clear the Link Incident Log  
To ensure the Link Incident Log is up-to-date and not filled with archived incidents,  
periodically clear the log display. To clear the log, click Clear at the bottom of the log  
window.  
Threshold Alert Log  
This log provides details of threshold alert notifications. Besides the date and time that  
the alert occurred, the log also displays details about the alert as configured through  
the Configure Threshold Alert(s) option under the Configure menu.  
3–10  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Repair Information  
Figure 3–6: Threshold Alert Log  
Date/Time  
Date and time stamp for when the alert occurred.  
Name  
Name for the alert as configured through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog  
box.  
Port  
Port number where the alert occurred.  
Type  
The type of alert: transmit (TX) or receive (RX).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
Percent usage of traffic capacity. This is the percent of the port’s throughput  
capacity achieved by the measured throughput. This setting constitutes the  
threshold value and is configured through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog  
box. For example, a value of 25 means that threshold occurs when throughput  
reaches 25 percent of the port’s capacity.  
Alert Time  
The time that the utilization % must exist before an alert is generated. This is set  
through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box.  
Interval  
The time interval during which the throughput is measured and an alert can  
generate. This is set through the Configure Threshold Alerts dialog box.  
Using Views  
The HAFM and product manager provide access to a series of views (windows) that  
provide information for administrators, users, and maintenance personnel. These  
views are accessed through the Hardware View, and include the:  
Port List View.  
FRU List View.  
Node List View.  
Performance View.  
Topology View.  
Zoning View.  
Port List View  
The Port List View (Figure 3–7) lists and provides status information for all switch  
ports. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating port problems.  
3–12  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Repair Information  
To open the Port List View, select Port List from the View menu on the navigation  
control panel.  
Figure 3–7: Port List View  
The port row provides status information in the following columns:  
Port # - the port number (0 through 15).  
Addr - the switch logical port address in hexadecimal format (S/390 operating  
mode only).  
Name - the port name configured through the Configure Ports dialog box.  
Blocked Config - the status (Blocked or Unblocked) of the port.  
State - the state of the port. Valid states are:  
— Online, offline, or testing.  
— Beaconing.  
— Invalid Attachment.  
— Link incident or link reset  
— No light, not operational, or port failure.  
— Segmented E_Port.  
Type - The type of port. Valid port types are a generic port (G_Port) that is not  
connected to a Fibre Channel device or switch, therefore light is not transmitted;  
fabric port (F_Port) that is connected to a device; or an expansion port (E_Port)  
that is connected to another switch to form an interswitch link (ISL).  
Operating speed - The speed at which the port is operating.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
Alert - If link incident (LIN) alerts are configured for the port through the  
Configure Ports dialog box, a yellow triangle appears in the column when a link  
incident occurs. A yellow triangle also appears if beaconing is enabled for the  
port. A red and yellow diamond appears if the port fails.  
Click anywhere in the port row to open the Port Properties dialog box. Right-click  
anywhere in the port row to open a menu to:  
Open the Port Properties dialog box.  
Open the Node Properties dialog box.  
Display the Port Technology dialog box.  
Block or unblock the port.  
Enable port beaconing.  
Perform port diagnostics.  
Enable or disable port channel wrapping. This menu option appears only when the  
switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.  
Swap one Fibre Channel port address with another. This menu option appears  
only when the switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.  
Clear link incident alerts.  
Reset the port.  
Configure Port Binding.  
FRU List View  
The FRU List View (Figure 3–8 on page 3-15) displays a list of all switch FRUs. The  
information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair  
verification.  
3–14  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
Figure 3–8: FRU List View  
To open the FRU List View from the Hardware View, click View and select FRU List.  
The FRU List View contains the following columns:  
FRU-Position - an acronym representing the FRU or non-FRU element, followed  
by a number representing the FRU or chassis position. The acronyms are:  
SFP - Small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver. Chassis slots for  
SFPs inserted in a port are 0 through 15. The SFPs are FRUs.  
PWR - power supply. Chassis slots for redundant power supplies are 0 and 1.  
The power supplies are FRUs.  
FAN - cooling fan. Chassis slots for redundant fans are 0 through 5 (cooling  
fans). The cooling fans are FRUs.  
CTP - control processor (CTP) card. The chassis slot is 0. The CTP card is  
not a FRU.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
THM - thermal sensor. The chassis slot is 0 (on the CTP card). The thermal  
sensor is not a FRU.  
Position-a number representing the FRU chassis position. The chassis (slot)  
position for a nonredundant FRU is 0. The chassis positions for redundant FRUs  
are 0 and 1.  
Status-the FRU status (Active or Backup).  
Serial Number-the FRU serial number.  
Node List View  
The Node List View (Figure 3–9) displays information about all devices attached to  
the switch through node ports (N_Ports). The information is useful to maintenance  
personnel for fault isolation and repair verification.  
To open the Node List View, select Node List from the View menu on the navigation  
control panel.  
Figure 3–9: Node List View  
The Node List View contains the following columns:  
Port # - the port number (0 through 15). Only ports attached to a device are  
displayed.  
3–16  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
Addr - the switch logical port address (05 through 13 inclusive) in hexadecimal  
format (S/390 operating mode only).  
Node Type - the type of attached device. This information is supplied by the  
device (if supported). Node types include:  
— Unknown or other.  
— Hub, switch, gateway, or converter.  
— Host or host bus adapter (HBA).  
— Proxy agent.  
— Storage device or storage subsystem.  
— Module.  
— Software driver.  
Port WWN- the eight-byte (16-digit) worldwide name (WWN) assigned to the  
port or Fibre Channel interface installed on the attached device.  
— If a nickname is not assigned to the WWN, the WWN is prefixed by the  
device manufacturer’s name.  
— If a nickname is assigned to the WWN, the nickname appears in place of the  
WWN.  
BB_Credit - the buffer-to-buffer credit (BB_Credit) value assigned to a port  
attached to a device. The value (normally 1 through 16 inclusive) determines the  
frame buffers available for the port. Ports configured for extended distance  
operation are assigned a BB_Credit value of 60.  
Performance View  
The Performance View displays statistical information about the performance of the  
ports. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating port problems.  
For information about the Performance View, refer to "Performing Port Diagnostics"  
on page -19.  
Zone Set View  
The Zone Set view (Figure 3–10) displays a list of the active zone set, including all  
zones and zone members. The active zone set name appears at the top of the list,  
followed by zone names, followed by zone members for each name.The table at the  
top of the view indicates if the default zone is enabled or disabled.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
To open the Zone Set view, click the Zone Set tab at the bottom of the Fabrics view on  
the HAFM main window.  
Figure 3–10: Zone Sets View  
Zone members appear as:  
The unique 16-digit WWN identifying the device attached to the port. If a  
nickname is configured, the nickname appears instead. For example:  
10:00:0206:77:43:B0:1C  
A unique domain ID (1 through 15 inclusive) and port number (0 through 31). For  
example:  
Domain 1, Port 7  
The information is also useful for fault isolating E_Port segmentation problems  
caused by incompatible zone sets. When forming a multi-switch fabric by connecting  
switches with active zone sets, zone names within the active zone sets should not be  
duplicated. Names can be duplicated only if the member WWNs of each zone are  
identical. If two switches have a zone name conflict (duplicate zone names exist), the  
zone sets cannot merge, the connecting E_Port at each switch segments to prevent the  
creation of an ISL, and the switches do not form a multi-switch fabric.  
3–18  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
For a description of how to expand or collapse the active zone set list and an  
explanation of button functions at the bottom of the Zone Set View, refer to the hp  
StorageWorks ha-fabric manager user guide (A6534-96024/AA-RS2CA-TE).  
Performing Port Diagnostics  
Port diagnostics are performed at the switch and product manager application. These  
diagnostics include:  
Inspecting port light-emitting diodes (LEDs) at the switch.  
Obtaining port degradation or failure information at the product manager  
Hardware View.  
Obtaining statistical performance information for ports at the product manager  
Performance View.  
Performing internal or external port loopback tests.  
Performing channel wrap tests. The tests apply only to a switch configured for  
S/390 operating mode.  
Port LEDs  
To obtain port operational information at the switch, inspect the port LEDs. Amber  
and green LEDs adjacent to each port indicate operational status as follows:  
The green LED illuminates (or blinks if there is active traffic) and the amber LED  
extinguishes to indicate normal port operation.  
The amber LED illuminates and the green LED extinguishes to indicate a port  
failure.  
Both LEDs extinguish to indicate a port is operational but not communicating (no  
SFP installed, no cable attached, loss of light, port blocked, or link recovery in  
process).  
The amber LED flashes and the green LED illuminates (or blinks if there is active  
traffic) to indicate beaconing is set for the port.  
The amber LED flashes and the green LED extinguishes to indicate a port is  
running online diagnostics, or beaconing is set and the port is not communicating  
(no SFP installed, no cable attached, loss of light, port blocked, or link recovery in  
process).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
Hardware View  
The Hardware View (Figure 3–11) displays a representation of and associated  
information about a specified switch. This information is useful to maintenance  
personnel for port-specific fault isolation and repair verification, link incidents, and  
port segmentation problems.  
Port operational state information from the Port Properties dialog box  
(Figure 3–12).  
Port LED behavior that emulates the operational status of the corresponding real  
switch. Refer to Table 1–1 on page 1-24 for an explanation of green and amber  
LED behavior.  
Colored alert symbols (yellow triangle or red diamond with yellow background)  
that indicate port status. Refer to Table 1–1 on page 1-24 for an explanation of  
alert symbol indications.  
Figure 3–11: Hardware View  
Click the port connector (leftmost port) to open the Port Properties dialog box  
(Figure 3–12).  
3–20  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
Figure 3–12: Port Properties Dialog Box  
The dialog box provides the following information:  
Port Number - the switch port number (0 through 15).  
Port Name - the user-defined name or description for the port.  
Type - the type of port (G_Port if nothing is attached to the port, F_Port if a  
device is attached to the port, and E_Port if the port is connected to another switch  
as part of an ISL).  
Fibre Channel Address - the Fibre Channel address identifier for the port.  
Port WWN - the Fibre Channel WWN for the port.  
— If a nickname is not assigned to the WWN, the WWN is prefixed by the  
device manufacturer’s name.  
— If a nickname is assigned to the WWN, the nickname appears in place of the  
WWN.  
Attached Port WWN - the Fibre Channel WWN for the device attached to the  
port.  
Block Configuration - a user-configured state for the port (Blocked or  
10-100 km Configuration - a user-specified state for the port (On or Off),  
configured through the Configure Ports dialog box.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
LIN Alerts Configuration - a user-specified state for the port (On or Off),  
configured through the Configure Ports dialog box.  
Beaconing - user-specified for the port (On or Off). When beaconing is enabled, a  
yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field.  
Link Incident - If no link incidents are recorded, None appears in the status field.  
If a link incident is recorded, a summary appears describing the incident, and a  
yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status field. Valid summaries are:  
— Implicit incident.  
— Bit-error threshold exceeded.  
— Link failure - loss of signal or loss of synchronization.  
— Link failure - not-operational primitive sequence received.  
— Link failure - primitive sequence timeout.  
— Link failure - invalid primitive sequence received for the current link state.  
Operational State - the state of the port (Online, Offline, Beaconing, Invalid  
Attachment, Link Incident, Link Reset, No Light, Not Operational, Port Failure,  
Segmented E_Port, or Testing). A yellow triangle appears adjacent to the status  
field if the port is in a non-standard state that requires attention. A red and yellow  
diamond appears adjacent to the status field if the port fails.  
Reason - If the E_Port segments while attempting to form a multi-switch fabric, a  
summary appears describing the reason for segmentation. Valid summaries are:  
— Incompatible operating parameters.  
— Duplicate domain ID(s).  
— Incompatible zoning configurations.  
— Build fabric protocol error.  
— No principal switch.  
— No response from attached switch.  
— Exchange link protocol (ELP) retransmission failure timeout.  
This field also displays reasons for Invalid Attachment state:  
01 Unknown. Invalid attachment reason cannot be determined.  
02 ISL connection not allowed on this port. Port is configured as an F_Port, but  
connected to switch or director.  
3–22  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repair Information  
03 ELP rejected by the attached switch. This director/switch transmitted an  
exchange link protocol (ELP) frame that was rejected by the switch at the other  
end of the ISL.  
04 Incompatible switch at the other end of the ISL. Interop mode for this switch is  
set to Open Fabric mode and the switch at the other end of the ISL is a Hewlett  
Packard switch configured for Homogeneous Fabric mode.  
05 External loopback adapter connected to the port. A loopback plug. is connected  
to the port and there is no diagnostic test running.  
06 N_Port connection not allowed on this port. The port type configuration does  
not match the actual port use. Port is configured as an E_Port, but attaches to a  
node device.  
07 Non-Hewlett Packard switch at other end of the ISL. The cable is connected to  
a non-Hewlett Packard switch and interop mode is set to Homogeneous fabric  
mode.  
08 ISL connection not allowed on this port. The port type configuration does not  
match the actual port use (the port is configured as an F_Port, but attaches to a  
switch or director).  
10 Port binding violation - unauthorized WWN. The WWN entered to configure  
port binding is not valid or a nickname was used that is not configured through the  
product manager for the attached device.  
11 Unresponsive node connected to port. Possible causes are:  
— Hardware problem on switch or on a connected node where ELP frames are  
not delivered, the response is not received, or a fabric login in (FLOGI)  
cannot be received. There may be problems in switch SBAR.  
— Faulty or dirty cable connection.  
— Faulty host bus adapters that do not send out FLOGI within reasonable time  
frame.  
Threshold Alert - If a threshold alert exists for the port, an alert indicator (yellow  
triangle) will appear by the Threshold Alert field, and the configured name for the  
last alert received will appear in the field.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repair Information  
Performance View  
The Performance View (Figure 3–13) displays statistical information about the  
performance of the ports. The information is useful for isolating port problems. To  
open the Performance View from the Hardware View, select Performance from the  
View menu on the navigation control panel.  
Figure 3–13: Performance View  
When the Performance View opens, no port statistics or errors appear. The message  
Click on gauge above to display statistics for that port appears beneath the port bar  
graphs.  
Each port bar graph in the upper portion of the view displays the instantaneous  
transmit or receive activity level for the port, and is updated every five seconds. The  
relative value displayed is the greater of either the transmit or receive activity  
(whichever value is greatest when sampled). Each port’s graph has multiple green-bar  
level indicators that correspond to a percentage of the maximum Fibre Channel  
throughput for the port (either transmit or receive). If any activity is detected for a  
port, at least one green bar appears.  
3–24  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
A red indicator on each port bar graph (high-water mark) remains at the highest level  
the graph has reached since the Performance View was opened. The indicator does not  
appear if the port is offline, and is reset to the bottom of the graph if the port detects a  
loss of light.  
When the mouse pointer is passed over a port bar graph, the graph highlights with a  
blue border and an information pop-up displays adjacent to the port as follows:  
If a device is not attached to the port, the pop-up displays the port’s current state.  
If a device is attached to the port, the pop-up displays the WWN of the attached  
device.  
If the port is an E_Port, the pop-up displays E_Port.  
If the port is segmented, the pop-up displays Segmented E_Port.  
Click a port bar graph to display statistics values for the port (bottom half of the  
Performance View). Right-click a port bar graph to display statistics values for the  
port (bottom half of the Performance View) and access a menu to:  
Open the Port Properties, Node Properties, or Port Technology dialog boxes.  
Block or unblock the port.  
Enable or disable port beaconing.  
Perform port diagnostics.  
Enable or disable port channel wrapping. This menu option appears only when the  
switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.  
Swap one Fibre Channel port address with another. This menu option appears  
only when the switch is configured for S/390 operating mode.  
Clear link incident alerts.  
Reset the port.  
Configure Port Binding.  
When a port is selected, the bottom half of the Performance View displays the  
following tables of cumulative port statistics and error count values. These statistics  
correspond to values defined in the Fabric Element management information base  
(MIB).  
Class 2 statistics.  
Class 3 statistics.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repair Information  
Error statistics.  
Click the Refresh button to update statistical information displayed on the  
Performance View for the selected port. Click the Clear button to reset the cumulative  
value counts to zero on the Performance View for the selected port. A confirmation  
dialog box displays before the values are cleared.  
Perform Loopback Tests  
This section describes procedures to perform an:  
Internal loopback test - an internal loopback test checks internal port, serializer,  
and deserializer circuitry and checks for the presence of a SFP, but does not check  
fiber-optic components of the installed SFP. The test can be performed with a  
switch or device attached to a port.The test momentarily blocks the port and is  
disruptive to the attached device.  
External loopback test - an external loopback test checks all port circuitry,  
including fiber-optic components of the installed SFP. To perform the test, the  
attached switch or device must be quiescent and disconnected from the port, and a  
multi-mode or single-mode loopback plug must be inserted in the SFP receptacle.  
Internal Loopback Test  
To perform an internal loopback test for a single port:  
1. Notify the customer that a disruptive internal loopback test is to be performed on a  
port. Ensure the customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame  
traffic through the port and sets the attached devices offline.  
NOTE: An SFP transceiver must be installed in the port during the test. A switch can remain  
attached during the test.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Select the icon representing the switch to be tested. The Hardware View for the  
selected switch displays.  
4. At the Hardware View, verify the location of the port to be tested. When the mouse  
pointer is passed over the graphical port on the front view of the switch, the port  
highlights with a blue border and a pop-up displays Switch Port.  
5. At the navigation control panel, select Port Diagnostics from the Maintenance  
menu. The Port Diagnostics dialog box displays (Figure 3–14).  
6. Select a port for test. To select a port for test, type the port number (0 through 15)  
in the Port Number field.  
3–26  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Repair Information  
7. At the Diagnostics Test list box, select Internal Loopback.  
Figure 3–14: Port Diagnostics Dialog Box  
8. Click Next. Beaconing initiates for the port selected for test. At the Hardware  
View, a yellow triangle appears at the top of the port. At the Port Diagnostics  
dialog box, the message Verify selected ports are beaconing appears.  
9. Verify beaconing is enabled, then click Next. The message Press START Test to  
begin diagnostics appears, and the Next button changes to a Start Test button.  
10. Click Start Test. The test begins and:  
— The Start Test button changes to a Stop Test button  
— The message Port xx: Test running appears, where xx is the port number.  
— A red progress bar (indicating percent completion) travels from left to right  
across the Completion Status field.  
As a port is tested, the amber LED flashes (beacons) and the green LED  
extinguishes (indicating the port is blocked).  
NOTE: Click Stop Test at any time to abort the loopback test.  
11. When the test completes, test results appear (for each port tested) as Port xx:  
Passed! or Port xx: Failed! in the message area of the dialog box. If a port fails  
the test, the amber LED for the port remains illuminated.  
12. When finished, click Cancel to close the Port Diagnostics dialog box and return to  
the Hardware View. Beaconing is disabled for the port.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
13. Reset each tested port.  
External Loopback Test  
To perform an external loopback test for a single port:  
1. Notify the customer that a disruptive external loopback test will be performed on a  
port and the fiber-optic cable or cables will be disconnected. Ensure the  
customer’s system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the  
port and sets attached devices offline.  
NOTE: At the start of the loopback test, the port can be online, offline, blocked, or unblocked.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Select the icon representing the switch for which the loopback test is to be  
performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
4. At the Hardware View, verify the location of the port to be tested. When the mouse  
pointer is passed over the graphical port on the front view of the switch, the port  
highlights with a blue border and an pop-up displays Switch Port.  
5. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the port.  
CAUTION: If name server zoning is implemented for the switch by port number,  
ensure the fiber-optic cables that are disconnected to perform the loopback test are  
reconnected properly. A change to the cable configuration disrupts zone operation and  
may incorrectly include or exclude a device from a zone.  
6. If the port to be tested is shortwave laser (determined in step 4), insert a black  
multi-mode loopback plug into the port receptacle. If the port to be tested is  
longwave laser (also determined in step 4), insert a blue single-mode loopback  
plug into the port receptacle.  
7. At the navigation control panel, select Port Diagnostics from the Maintenance  
menu. The Port Diagnostics dialog box displays (Figure 3–14).  
8. Select a port for test. To select a port for test, type the port number (0 through 31)  
in the Port Number field.  
9. At the Diagnostics Test list box, select External Loopback.  
3–28  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
10. Click Next. Beaconing initiates for the port selected for test. At the Hardware  
View, a yellow triangle appears at the top of the port. At the Port Diagnostics  
dialog box, the message Loopback plug(s) must be installed on ports being  
diagnosed appears.  
11. Verify loopback plug(s) are installed and click Next. The message Verify selected  
ports are beaconing appears.  
12. Verify beaconing is enabled, then click Next. The message Press START TEST  
to begin diagnostics appears, and the Next button changes to a Start Test button.  
13. Click Start Test. The test begins and:  
— The Start Test button changes to a Stop Test button  
— The message Port xx: TEST RUNNING appears, where xx is the port  
number.  
— A red progress bar (indicating percent completion) travels from left to right  
across the Completion Status field.  
As a port is tested, the amber LED flashes (beacons) and the green LED  
illuminates (indicating loopback traffic through the port).  
NOTE: Click Stop Test at any time to abort the loopback test.  
14. When the test completes, test results appear (for each port tested) as Port xx:  
Passed! or Port xx: Failed! in the message area of the dialog box. If a port fails  
the test, the amber LED for the port remains illuminated.  
15. When finished, click Cancel to close the Port Diagnostics dialog box and return to  
the Hardware View. Beaconing is disabled for the port.  
16. Reset each tested port.  
17. Remove loopback plug(s) from the tested ports.  
18. Reconnect fiber-optic jumper cables from devices to tested ports.  
Perform Channel Wrap Test  
A channel wrap test is a diagnostic procedure that checks S/390 host-to-switch  
connectivity by returning the output of the host as input. The test is host-initiated, and  
transmits Fibre Channel frames to a switch port. A port enabled for channel wrapping  
echoes the frame back to the host.  
To perform a channel wrap test for a single port (S/390 mode only):  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repair Information  
1. Notify the customer that a disruptive channel wrap test will be performed on a  
host-attached port.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Select (click) the icon representing the switch for which the channel wrap test will  
be performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
4. At the Hardware View, verify the location of the port to be tested. Click the port to  
be tested. The Port View displays.  
5. Right-click the port to be tested, then select Channel Wrap from the pop-up menu.  
The Channel Wrap On for Port n (where n is the port number) dialog box displays  
(Figure 3–15).  
Figure 3–15: Channel Wrap On for Port n Dialog Box  
6. Click OK to enable channel wrapping for the port.  
Swapping Ports  
Use the port swap procedure to swap a device connection and logical port address  
from a failed Fibre Channel port to an operational port. Because both ports are  
blocked during the procedure, switch communication with the attached device is  
momentarily disrupted.  
To perform the port swap procedure for a pair of switch ports (S/390 mode only):  
1. Notify the customer a port swap procedure will be performed and a fiber-optic  
cable or cables will be disconnected. Ensure the customer’s system administrator  
quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the ports and sets attached devices  
offline.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Select (click) the icon representing the switch for which the loopback test will be  
performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
3–30  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
4. At the navigation control panel, select Swap Ports from the Maintenance menu.  
The Swap Ports dialog box displays (Figure 3–16).  
Figure 3–16: Swap Ports Dialog Box  
5. At the First address and Second address fields, type the logical port addresses (in  
hexadecimal format) of the pair of ports to be swapped. The ports are  
automatically blocked during the procedure. Select the Unblock after swap check  
boxes to unblock the ports when the procedure completes.  
6. Click Next. At the Swap Ports dialog box, the message Continuing this  
procedure requires varying the selected ports offline. Ask the system operator  
to vary the link(s) offline, then press Next. appears.  
7. Click Next. At the Swap Ports dialog box, the message Move the port cable(s).  
Then press Next. appears.  
8. Swap the fiber-optic jumper cables between the selected ports, then click Next.  
9. At the Swap Ports dialog box, the message Ports swapped successfully. appears.  
Click Next to close the dialog box and return to the Hardware View.  
Collecting Maintenance Data  
When the switch operational firmware detects a critical error, the switch automatically  
copies the contents of dynamic random access memory (DRAM) to a dump area in  
FLASH memory on the CTP card, then transfers (through the Ethernet connection) the  
captured dump file from FLASH memory to the HAFM server hard drive.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Repair Information  
Perform the maintenance data collection procedure after a firmware fault is corrected  
or a failed FRU is replaced to capture the data for analysis by third-level support  
personnel. Maintenance data includes the dump file, hardware log, audit log, and an  
engineering log viewable only by support personnel. To collect maintenance data:  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
2. Select the icon representing the switch for which the data collection procedure is  
to be performed. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
3. At the navigation control panel, select Data Collection from the Maintenance icon.  
The Save Data Collection dialog box (Figure 3–17) displays.  
Figure 3–17: Save Data Collection Dialog Box  
4. Remove the backup disk from the HAFM server Zip drive and insert a blank Zip  
disk.  
5. At the Save Data Collection dialog box, select the zip drive (D:\) from the Look in  
drop-down menu, then type a descriptive name for the collected maintenance data  
in the File name field. Click Save.  
6. A dialog box (Figure 3–18) displays with a progress bar that shows percent  
completion of the data collection process. When the process reaches 100%, the  
Cancel button changes to a Close button.  
3–32  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Information  
Figure 3–18: Data Collection Dialog Box  
7. Click Close to close the dialog box.  
8. Remove the Zip disk with the newly-collected maintenance data from the HAFM  
server Zip drive. Return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard for failure analysis.  
9. To ensure the QuikSync backup application operates normally, replace the original  
backup disk in the HAFM server Zip drive.  
Clean Fiber-Optic Components  
Perform this procedure as directed in this publication and when connecting or  
disconnecting fiber-optic cables from switch SFP optical transceivers (if necessary).  
To clean fiber-optic components:  
1. Obtain the appropriate tools (portable can of oil-free compressed air and alcohol  
pads) from the fiber-optic cleaning kit.  
2. Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the SFP. Use compressed air to blow any  
contaminants from the connector as shown in part A of Figure 3–19.  
— Keep the air nozzle approximately 50 millimeters (two inches) from the end  
of the connector and hold the can upright.  
— Blow compressed air on the surfaces and end of the connector continuously  
for approximately five seconds.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
A
B
Figure 3–19: Clean Fiber-Optic Components  
3. Gently wipe the end-face and other surfaces of the connector with an alcohol pad  
as shown in part B of Figure 3–19. Ensure the pad makes full contact with the  
surface to be cleaned. Wait approximately five seconds for surfaces to dry.  
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 of this procedure (second cleaning).  
5. Repeat step 2 and step 3 of this procedure again (third cleaning), then reconnect  
the fiber-optic cable to the port.  
Power-On Procedure  
To power-on the switch:  
1. One alternating current (AC) power cord is required for each power supply.  
Ensure power cord(s) are available to connect the switch to facility power.  
WARNING: A Hewlett Packard-supplied power cord is provided for each switch  
power supply. To prevent electric shock when connecting the switch to primary  
facility power, use only the supplied power cord(s), and ensure the facility power  
receptacle is the correct type, supplies the required voltage, and is properly grounded.  
2. Turn on both power switches at the rear of the unit. The unit powers on and  
performs power-on self-tests (POSTs).  
NOTE: If two power cords are used for high availability, plug the cords into separate facility  
power circuits.  
3. During POSTs:  
a. The green power (PWR) LED on the switch front panel illuminates.  
3–34  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
b. The amber system error (ERR) LED on the switch front panel blinks  
momentarily while the switch is tested.  
c. The green LEDs associated with the Ethernet port blink momentarily while the  
port is tested.  
d. The green and amber LEDs associated with the ports blink momentarily while  
the ports are tested.  
4. After successful POST completion, the green power (PWR) LED remains  
illuminated and all other LEDs extinguish.  
5. If a POST error or other malfunction occurs, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on  
page -7 to isolate the problem.  
NOTE: When powering on the switch after removing and replacing a faulty FRU, the amber  
system error LED may remain illuminated. Clear the system error LED as part of the  
replacement procedure.  
Power-Off Procedure  
To power-off the switch:  
1. Notify the customer the switch is to be powered off. Ensure the customer’s system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets  
attached devices offline.  
2. Set the switch offline ("Set Offline State" on page -38).  
3. Turn off both power switches at the rear of the unit.  
4. If servicing the switch, disconnect the power cord(s) from the input power module  
at the rear of the switch. This step is not required when performing a power cycle.  
Reset or IPL the Switch  
A switch reset using the IML button (at the switch front panel) or IPL (at the product  
manager application) are functionally equivalent. They:  
Perform partial power-on diagnostics, reset functional logic for the CTP card, and  
load firmware from FLASH memory to random-access memory (RAM) without  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
Reset the Ethernet local area network (LAN) interface, causing the connection to  
the HAFM server to drop momentarily until the connection automatically  
recovers.  
Automatically enable changes to an active zone configuration.  
Keep all configured fabric logins, name server registrations, and operating  
parameters intact.  
Automatically set the switch online. The blocked state of each Fibre Channel port  
remains intact.  
NOTE: A switch reset or IPL should be performed only if a CTP card failure is indicated. Do not  
reset or IPL the switch unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.  
Reset the Switch  
Resetting the switch with the IML button causes the switch to perform an initial  
program load (IML) that takes approximately 30 seconds.  
To reset the switch:  
1. At the switch front panel, press and hold the IML button for approximately three  
seconds.  
2. During the reset, the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet link drops momentarily and  
the following occurs at the product manager application:  
— As the network connection drops, the Status table turns yellow, the Status  
field displays No Link, and the State field displays a reason message.  
— The alert panel at the bottom of the navigation control panel displays a grey  
square, indicating switch status is unknown.  
— Illustrated FRUs (SFPs, fans, and power supplies) in the Hardware View  
disappear, and appear again as the connection is re-established.  
IPL the Switch  
To IPL the switch:  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
2. Select the icon representing the switch to be IPled. The Hardware View for the  
selected switch displays.  
3. At the navigation control panel, select IPL from the Maintenance menu. The  
Information dialog box displays.  
3–36  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
4. Click Yes to IPL the switch. During the IPL, the switch-to-HAFM server Ethernet  
link drops momentarily and the following occur at the product manager  
application:  
— As the network connection drops, the Status table turns yellow, the Status  
field displays No Link, and the State field displays a reason message.  
— The alert panel at the bottom of the navigation control panel displays a grey  
square, indicating switch status is unknown.  
— Illustrated FRUs (SFPs, fans, and power supplies) in the Hardware View  
disappear, and appear again as the connection is re-established.  
Set the Switch Online or Offline  
This section describes procedures to set the switch online or offline. These operating  
states are described as follows:  
Online - when the switch is set online, an attached device can log in to the switch  
if the port is not blocked. Attached devices can communicate with each other if  
they are configured in the same zone.  
Offline - when the switch is set offline, all switch ports are set offline. The switch  
transmits the offline sequence (OLS) to attached devices, and the devices cannot  
log in to the switch.  
NOTE: When the switch is set offline, the operation of attached Fibre Channel devices is  
disrupted. Do not set the switch offline unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next  
level of support.  
Set Online State  
To set the switch online:  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
2. Select the icon representing the switch to be set online. The Hardware View for the  
selected switch displays.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Repair Information  
3. At the navigation control panel, select Set Online State from the Maintenance  
menu. If the switch is offline, the Set Online State dialog box displays, indicating  
the state is OFFLINE.  
4. Click Set Online. A Warning dialog box displays, indicating the switch is to be set  
online.  
5. Click OK. As the switch comes online, inspect the product manager application.  
The State field of the Status table displays Online.  
Set Offline State  
To set the switch offline:  
1. Notify the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the customer’s system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets  
attached devices offline.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Select the icon representing the switch to be set offline. The Hardware View for  
the selected switch displays.  
4. At the navigation control panel, select Set Online State from the Maintenance  
menu. If the switch is online, the Set Online State dialog box displays, indicating  
the state is ONLINE.  
5. Click Set Offline. A Warning dialog box displays, indicating the switch is to be set  
offline.  
6. Click OK. As the switch goes offline, inspect the product manager application.  
The State field of the Status table displays OFFLINE.  
3–38  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repair Information  
Block and Unblock Ports  
This section describes procedures to block or unblock the switch ports. When a port is  
blocked, the port is automatically set offline. When a port is unblocked, the port is  
automatically set online.  
NOTE: When a port is blocked, the operation of an attached Fibre Channel device is disrupted.  
Do not block a port unless directed to do so by a procedural step or the next level of support.  
Block a Port  
To block a port:  
1. Notify the customer the port is to be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Select the icon representing the switch with the port to be blocked. The Hardware  
View for the selected switch displays.  
4. Move the pointer over the port and right-click the mouse to open a list of menus.  
5. Select Block Port. The Block Port n dialog box displays (n is the port number).  
6. Click OK. The following occur to indicate the port is blocked (and offline):  
— The emulated green LED associated with the port extinguishes at the  
Hardware View.  
— The green LED associated with the port extinguishes at the switch.  
— A check mark displays in the check box adjacent to the Block Port menu.  
Unblock a Port  
To unblock a port:  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Repair Information  
2. Select the icon representing the switch with the port to be unblocked. The  
Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
3. Move the pointer over the port and right-click the mouse to open a list of menus  
options.  
4. Select Block Port. Note the check mark in the box adjacent to the menu item,  
indicating the port is blocked. The Unblock Port n dialog box displays (n is the  
port number).  
5. Click OK. The following occur to indicate the port is unblocked (and online):  
— The emulated green LED associated with the port illuminates at the Hardware  
View.  
— The green LED associated with the port illuminates at the switch.  
— The check box adjacent to the Block Port menu option becomes blank.  
Manage Firmware Versions  
Firmware is the internal operating code stored on the switch’s CTP card. Up to eight  
versions can be stored on the HAFM server hard drive and made available for  
download to a switch. Service personnel can perform the following firmware  
management tasks:  
Determine the firmware version active on a switch.  
Add to and maintain a library of up to eight firmware versions on the HAFM  
server hard drive.  
Modify a firmware description stored on the HAFM server hard drive.  
Delete a firmware version from the HAFM server hard drive.  
Download a firmware version to a selected switch.  
Determine a Switch Firmware Version  
To determine a switch firmware version:  
3–40  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
2. Select the icon representing the switch to be inspected for firmware version. The  
Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
3. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance  
menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.  
4. The firmware version displays at the lower left corner of the dialog box in  
XX.YY.ZZ format, where XX is the version level, YY is the release level, and ZZ  
is the patch level.  
5. Click Close to return to the Hardware View.  
Add a Firmware Version  
The firmware version shipped with the switch is provided on the edge switch 2/16  
documentation kit CD. Subsequent firmware versions for upgrading the switch are  
provided to customers through the HP website.  
NOTE: When adding a firmware version, follow all the instructions in the release notes that  
accompany the firmware version. This information supplements information in this general  
procedure.  
To add a switch firmware version to the library stored on the HAFM server hard drive:  
1. Obtain the new firmware version from the HP website:  
NOTE: The following path is subject to change.  
a. At the HAFM server or other personal computer (PC) with Internet access,  
open the HP website. The uniform resource locator (URL) is:  
http://thenew.hp.com/country/us/eng/support.html  
NOTE: If required, obtain the customer-specific member name and password from the  
customer or next level of support.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
b. Follow links to HAFM software.  
c. Click the edge switch 2/16 Firmware Version XX.YY.ZZ entry, where  
XX.YY.ZZ is the desired version. The Windows Save As dialog box appears.  
d. Ensure the correct directory path is specified at the Save in field and the  
correct file is specified in the File name field. Click Save. The new firmware  
version is downloaded and saved to the HAFM server or PC hard drive.  
e. If the new firmware version was downloaded to a PC (not the HAFM server),  
transfer the firmware version file to the HAFM server by diskette or other  
electronic means.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Select the icon representing the switch for which a firmware version is to be  
added. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
4. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance  
menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.  
3–42  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repair Information  
5. Click New. The New Firmware Version dialog box displays.  
6. Select the desired firmware version file (downloaded in step 1) from the HAFM  
server CD-ROM or hard drive. Ensure the correct directory path and filename  
appear in the File name field and click Save. The New Firmware Description  
dialog box displays.  
7. Enter a description (up to 24 characters) for the new firmware version and click  
OK. The description should include the installation date and text that uniquely  
identify the firmware version.  
8. A Transfer Complete message box appears indicating the new firmware version is  
stored on the HAFM server hard drive. Click Close to close the message box.  
9. The new firmware version and associated description appear in the Firmware  
Library dialog box. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the product  
manager application.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repair Information  
10. To send the firmware version to a switch, refer to "Download a Firmware Version to a  
Switch" on page 3-45.  
Modify a Firmware Version Description  
To modify the description of a switch firmware version in the library stored on the  
HAFM server hard drive:  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
2. Select the icon representing the switch for which a firmware version is to be  
modified. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
3. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance  
menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.  
4. Select the firmware version to be modified and click Modify. The Modify  
Firmware Description dialog box displays.  
5. Enter a modified description (up to 24 characters) for the firmware version and  
click OK. The description should include the installation date and text that  
uniquely identify the firmware version.  
6. The new description for the firmware version displays in the Firmware Library  
dialog box. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the product manager  
application.  
3–44  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repair Information  
Delete a Firmware Version  
To delete an switch firmware version from the library stored on the HAFM server hard  
drive:  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
2. Select the icon representing the switch from which the firmware version is to be  
deleted. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
3. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance  
menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.  
4. Select the firmware version to be deleted and click Delete. A confirmation dialog  
box displays.  
5. Click OK. The selected firmware version is deleted from the Firmware Library  
dialog box.  
6. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the product manager application.  
Download a Firmware Version to a Switch  
This procedure downloads a selected firmware version from the HAFM server library  
to a switch managed by the open instance of the product manager application.  
NOTE: When downloading a firmware version, follow all procedural information in the release  
notes or EC instructions that accompany the firmware version. This information supplements  
information in this general procedure.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Repair Information  
To download a firmware version to a switch:  
1. Notify the customer that a firmware version is to be downloaded to the switch. The  
switch resets during the firmware download, causing Fibre Channel links to  
momentarily drop and attached devices to log out and log back in. Data frames lost  
during switch reset must be retransmitted.  
2. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
3. Before downloading firmware version XX.YY.ZZ to a switch, ensure version  
XX.YY.ZZ or higher of the HAFM application is running on the HAFM server.  
a. Select About from the Help menu. The About dialog box displays the HAFM  
application version. Click OK to close the dialog box.  
Upgrade Software" on page 3-51).  
4. Select the icon representing the switch for which a firmware version is to be  
downloaded. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
5. As a precaution to preserve switch configuration information, perform the data  
collection procedure ("Collecting Maintenance Data" on page 3-31).  
6. At the navigation control panel, select Firmware Library from the Maintenance  
menu. The Firmware Library dialog box displays.  
7. Select the firmware version to be downloaded and click Send. The send function  
verifies existence of certain switch conditions before the download begins. If an  
error occurs, a message displays indicating the problem must be fixed before the  
firmware download. Conditions that terminate the process include:  
— The firmware version is being installed to the switch by another user.  
— The switch-to-HAFM server link fails or times out.  
3–46  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repair Information  
If a problem occurs and a corresponding message displays, go to "MAP 0000: Start  
MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate the problem. If no error occurs, the Send Firmware  
confirmation box displays.  
8. Click Yes. The Send Firmware dialog box displays.  
As the download begins, a Sending Files message displays at the top of the dialog  
box. This message remains for a few moments as a progress bar travels across the  
dialog box to show percent completion of the download. As the download  
progresses, a Writing data to FLASH message displays. This message remains  
as the progress bar continues to travel across the dialog box. The bar progresses to  
100% when the last file is transmitted to the CTP card. The switch then performs  
an IPL, during which the switch-to-HAFM server link drops momentarily and the  
following occur at the product manager application:  
— As the network connection drops, the Status table turns yellow, the Status  
field displays No Link, and the State field displays a reason message.  
— The alert panel at the bottom of the navigation control panel displays a grey  
square, indicating switch status is unknown.  
— Illustrated FRUs in the Hardware View disappear, and appear again as the  
connection is re-established.  
After the IPL, a Send firmware complete message displays as shown below.  
9. Click Close to close the dialog box.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repair Information  
10. Click Close to close the Firmware Library dialog box and return to the Hardware  
View.  
Manage Configuration Data  
The product manager application provides maintenance options to back up, restore, or  
reset the configuration file stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NV-RAM)  
on the switch CTP card. Configuration data in the file include:  
Identification data (switch name, description, and location).  
Port configuration data (port names, blocked states, and port validation, auto-LIP,  
and LIN alert configurations).  
Operating parameters (loop mode, error detect time out value (E_D_TOV),  
resource allocation time out value (R_A_TOV), and preferred domain ID).  
Simple network management protocol (SNMP) configuration information,  
including trap recipients, community names, and write authorizations.  
Zoning configuration information, including the active zone set and default zone  
state.  
NOTE: The switch must be set offline prior to restoring or resetting the configuration file.  
Back Up the Configuration  
NOTE: The ability to back up configuration data may not exist if the user has a  
customer-supplied server platform for the HAFM application. The server platform just have  
®
Iomega QuikSync and a Zip drive.  
To back up the switch configuration file to the HAFM server (c:\HafmData):  
1. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
2. Select the icon representing the switch for which a configuration file is to be  
backed up. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
3. At the navigation control panel, select Backup & Restore Configuration from the  
Maintenance menu. The Backup and Restore Configuration dialog box displays.  
3–48  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Repair Information  
4. Click Backup. When the backup process finishes, the Backup Complete dialog  
box displays.  
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Hardware View.  
Restore the Configuration  
To restore the switch configuration file from the HAFM server:  
1. Notify the customer that the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the customer’s  
system administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and  
sets attached devices offline.  
2. Set the switch offline ("Set Offline State" on page 3-38).  
3. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
4. Select the icon representing the switch for which a configuration file is to be  
restored. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
5. At the navigation control panel, select Backup & Restore Configuration from the  
Maintenance menu. The Backup and Restore Configuration dialog box displays.  
6. Click Restore. A Warning message box displays.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repair Information  
7. Click Yes. When the restore process finishes, the Restore Complete dialog box  
displays.  
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Hardware View.  
Reset Configuration Data  
NOTE: This procedure resets the switch IP address to the default of 10.1.1.10 and may disrupt  
server-to-switch communication.  
To reset the switch data to the factory default settings:  
1. Notify the customer the switch is to be set offline. Ensure the customer’s system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the switch and sets  
attached devices offline.  
2. Set the switch offline ("Set Offline State" on page 3-38).  
3. At the HAFM server, open the HAFM application. The Product View displays.  
4. Select the icon representing the switch for which a configuration file is to be reset  
to factory default settings. The Hardware View for the selected switch displays.  
5. At the navigation control panel, select Reset Configuration from the Maintenance  
menu. The Reset Configuration dialog box displays.  
6. Click Reset. When the reset process finishes, the dialog box closes and the  
application returns to the Hardware View.  
3–50  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repair Information  
Install or Upgrade Software  
This section describes the procedure to install or upgrade the HAFM application to the  
HAFM server. The HAFM application includes the switch product manager and  
HAFM services applications.  
The HAFM application shipped with the switch is provided on the HAFM  
Applications CD-ROM. Subsequent software versions for upgrading the switch are  
provided to customers through the HAFM Applications CD-ROM or through HP’s  
Internet home page.  
NOTE: When installing or upgrading a software version, follow all procedural information in the  
release notes or EC instructions that accompany the software version. This information  
supplements information in this general procedure.  
To install or upgrade the HAFM application and associated applications to the HAFM  
server:  
1. Log out of all HAFM application sessions (local and remote) and exit the HAFM  
application.  
2. To obtain the new software version from the HAFM Applications CD-ROM, go to  
step 4.  
3. To obtain the new software version from Hewlett Packard’s home page:  
a. At the HAFM server or other personal computer (PC) with internet access,  
open the Hewlett Packard home page. The URL is  
http://www.hewlettpackard.com.  
b. Move the pointer over Services at the top of the home page to open a list of  
menu selections, then click the Support Login selection. The Hewlett Packard  
Central Site page displays.  
c. Type a member name and password (both are case sensitive) and click Sign In.  
The Hewlett Packard Central Site File Library page displays.  
If required, obtain the customer-specific member name and password from the  
customer or next level of support.  
d. Click the Microcode Downloads folder. A list of software available for  
download displays at the right side of the window.  
NOTE: If required, obtain the customer-specific member name and password from the  
customer or next level of support.  
e. Click the appropriate HAFM Server Version XX.YY.ZZ entry, where  
XX.YY.ZZ is the desired version. A File Download dialog box appears.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repair Information  
f. Select Save this program to disk and click OK.  
g. Ensure the correct directory path (c:\HafmData) is specified at the Save as  
dialog box, and the correct file is specified in the File name field. Click Save.  
The new software version executable file is downloaded and saved to the  
HAFM server or PC hard drive.  
h. If the executable file was downloaded to a PC (not the HAFM server), transfer  
the firmware version file to the HAFM server by diskette or other electronic  
means.  
i. Go to step 5.  
4. Insert the HAFM Applications CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the HAFM  
server.  
5. At the HAFM server, click Start at the Windows task bar. The Windows  
Workstation menu displays.  
6. At the Windows Workstation menu, select Run. The Run dialog box appears.  
7. At the Run dialog box, select directory path (hard drive or CD-ROM drive) and  
filename of the executable file (HAFM_ServerInstall.exe) using the Browse  
button. The directory path and filename display in the Open field.  
8. Click OK. A series of message boxes appear as the InstallAnywhere third-party  
application prepares to install the HAFM application software, followed by the  
HAFM dialog box.  
3–52  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Repair Information  
9. Follow the online instructions for the InstallAnywhere program. Click Next,  
Install, or Done as appropriate.  
10. Power off and reboot the HAFM server PC.  
a. Simultaneously press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to display the Windows Logon  
Information dialog box.  
b. Type a user name and password and click OK. The Windows desktop displays.  
NOTE: If required, obtain the user name and password from the customer or next level of  
support.  
11. The HAFM application automatically opens. At the HAFM splash screen, enter a  
user name, password, and HAFM server name (all are case sensitive), and click  
Login. The application opens and the Product View displays.  
NOTE: If required, obtain the user name, password, and HAFM server name from the customer  
or next level of support.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
3–53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Invisible Body4  
FRU Removal and Replacement  
This chapter describes the removal and replacement procedures (RRPs) for the hp  
StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 (edge switch 2/16) field-replaceable units (FRUs). Do  
not remove a FRU until a failure is isolated to that FRU. If fault isolation was not  
performed, see MAP 0000: Start MAP on page 2–7.  
This section describes procedures to remove and replace (RRPJ) concurrent switch  
FRUs. A screwdriver is required to remove and replace the power supplies. No tools  
are required to remove and replace the other FRUs. All FRUs are removed and  
replaced while the switch is powered on and operational (concurrent FRUs). See  
Chapter 5, Illustrated Parts Breakdown for FRU locations and part numbers.  
FRUs  
Table 4–1 lists the FRUs and electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution requirements  
(yes or no) for each FRU.  
Table 4–1: ESD Requirements  
ESD Precaution  
FRU Name  
SFP LC transceiver  
Requirement  
No  
No  
No  
Power supply  
Cooling fan  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
4–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
FRU Removal and Replacement  
Procedural Notes  
Note the following:  
1. Read the removal and replacement procedures (RRPs) for that FRU before  
removing the FRU.  
2. Follow all WARNING and CAUTION statements and statements in the preface  
of this manual.  
3. After completing a FRU replacement, clear the event code reporting the failure  
and the event code reporting the recovery from the switch Event Log (at the  
HAFM server). Extinguish the amber system error (ERR) light-emitting diode  
(LED) at the switch front panel.  
RRP: SFP Transceiver  
Use the following procedures to remove and replace an SFP transceiver from a port.  
No tools are required.  
Removal  
To remove an SFP:  
1. Identify the defective port from the illuminated amber LED at the switch or failure  
information at the HAFM server’s Hardware View.  
2. Notify the customer the port will be blocked. Ensure the customer’s system  
administrator quiesces Fibre Channel frame traffic through the port and sets the  
attached device offline.  
3. Block communication to the defective port (refer to "Block a Port" on page 3-39).  
4. Disconnect the fiber-optic jumper cable from the SFP:  
a. Pull the keyed subscriber connector (LC) free from the SFP.  
b. Place a protective cap over the cable connector.  
5. If the SFP was not manufactured by IBM Corporation, go to step 6. Remove an  
IBM-manufactured SFP from the chassis:  
a. Flip the wire bale at the bottom of the SFP upward 90 degrees.  
b. Use the wire bale as a handle to pull the SFP out of the chassis.  
4–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
FRU Removal and Replacement  
6. Remove a non-IBM SFP from the chassis:  
a. Simultaneously squeeze the metal latches on the sides of the SFP to disengage  
the SFP from the port receptacle.  
b. Pull the SFP out of the chassis.  
7. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select Event Log option from the Logs  
icon. The Event Log displays. Ensure the following event code appears in the log:  
510 - SFP hot-insertion initiated.  
Replacement  
To install an SFP in a switch port:  
1. Remove the replacement SFP from its shipping container.  
2. If the SFP was not manufactured by IBM Corporation, go to step 3. Insert an  
IBM-manufactured SFP into the port receptacle:  
a. Ensure the IBM label is at the top, and the alignment groove is at the bottom.  
b. Verify the SFP is aligned in the receptacle, then slide it forward until it seats  
firmly.  
c. Flip the wire bale (handle) of the SFP downward 90 degrees.  
3. Insert a non-IBM SFP into the G_Port receptacle:  
a. Ensure the label that identifies the OEM of the SFP is at the top, and the  
alignment groove is at the bottom.  
b. Verify the SFP is aligned in the receptacle, then slide it forward until it seats.  
4. Perform an external loopback test for the port (refer to "External Loopback Test" on  
page 3-28). If the test fails, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate the  
problem.  
5. Connect the fiber-optic jumper cable to the port SFP:  
a. Remove the protective cap from the cable connector. Store the cap for  
safekeeping.  
b. Clean the cable and SFP connectors (refer to "Clean Fiber-Optic Components" on  
page 3-33).  
c. Insert the keyed LC cable connector into the port SFP.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
4–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
FRU Removal and Replacement  
d. Verify that the amber LED adjacent to the port is extinguished.  
6. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select the Event Log option from the Logs  
icon. The Event Log displays. Ensure the following event code appears in the log:  
513 - SFP hot-removal completed.  
If an event code 513 does not appear in the log, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on  
page 2-7 to isolate the problem.  
7. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View:  
diamond).  
b. Click the port graphic representing the replacement SFP to open the Port  
Properties dialog box. Verify that port information (port number, port name,  
operational state, and port technology) is correct.  
If a problem is indicated, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate the  
problem.  
8. Restore communication to the port and set the port online as directed by the  
customer (refer to "Unblock a Port" on page 3-39).  
9. Perform the data collection procedure (refer to "Collecting Maintenance Data" on  
page 3-31).  
10. Clear the switch’s system error (ERR) LED:  
a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, right-click the front panel bezel graphic  
(away from a FRU) to open a pop-up menu.  
b. Click the Clear System Error Light menu selection.  
RRP: Power Supply  
Use the following procedures to remove or replace a power supply from the rear of the  
switch. No tools are required.  
Removal  
To remove a power supply:  
1. Identify the defective power supply from the extinguished green LED at the  
switch or failure information at the HAFM server’s Hardware View.  
4–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
FRU Removal and Replacement  
2. Turn off the power switch on the power supply.  
3. Disconnect the AC power cord from the power supply.  
4. Rotate the power lockout lever to the right to expose the black plastic latch lever.  
5. Pull the latch lever down to the horizontal position.  
The power supply will disengage and back out about 1/4 inch when the lever is  
horizontal.  
6. Use the latch lever to pull the power supply out of the chassis. Support the power  
supply as it exits the chassis.  
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, do not reach into nonvisible areas of a  
switch while the switch is connected to primary facility power.  
Replacement  
To replace a power supply:  
1. Remove the replacement power supply from its shipping container.  
2. Inspect the rear of the power supply for bent or broken connector pins. If any pins  
are damaged, obtain a new power supply.  
3. Ensure that the power switch on the power supply is turned off, the power lockout  
lever is rotated to the right, covering the AC connector, and the black plastic latch  
lever is completely down in the horizontal position.  
4. Insert the power supply into the chassis until it stops.  
5. Raise the black plastic latch lever to the vertical position.  
The power supply cams into its seated position in the chassis.  
6. Rotate the power lockout lever to the left to cover the plastic lever and expose the  
AC connector.  
7. Verifying that the power switch is off, connect the AC power cord to the power  
supply and to a facility power source.  
8. Turn on the power switch.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
4–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FRU Removal and Replacement  
9. Inspect the power supply to ensure that the green LED is illuminated. If the green  
LED is extinguished, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate the  
problem.  
10. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select the Event Log option from the Logs  
icon. The Event Log displays. Ensure the following event codes appear in the log:  
203 - Power supply AC voltage recovery.  
204 - Power supply DC voltage recovery.  
11. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, observe the power supply graphic and  
ensure no alert symbols appear that indicate a failure (yellow triangle or red  
diamond). If a problem is indicated, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to  
isolate the problem.  
12. Perform the data collection procedure (refer to "Collecting Maintenance Data" on  
page 3-31).  
13. Clear the switch system error (ERR) LED:  
a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, right-click the front panel bezel graphic  
(away from a FRU) to open a pop-up menu.  
b. Click the Clear System Error Light menu selection.  
RRP: Cooling Fan  
Use the following procedures to remove or replace a cooling fan from the rear of the  
switch. No tools are required.  
Removal  
To remove a cooling fan:  
1. Identify the defective cooling fan from the illuminated amber LED on the fan or  
failure information at the HAFM server’s Hardware View.  
2. Loosen the fan retaining screw in the upper right corner of the fan. This is a  
captive screw that will remain in the fan assembly.  
3. Grasp the fan handle and pull the fan FRU out of the chassis.  
4–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
FRU Removal and Replacement  
Replacement  
To replace a cooling fan:  
1. Remove the replacement cooling fan FRU from its shipping container.  
2. Inspect the rear of the fan for bent or broken connector pins. If any pins are  
damaged, obtain a new fan.  
3. Position the fan FRU with its retaining screw at the upper right corner (the fan  
cannot be inserted in any other position).  
faceplate is flush with the chassis.  
5. Engage the screw threads and lightly tighten the screw. Over-tightening the screw  
may damage the FRU or chassis.  
6. Inspect the fan FRU to ensure that the amber LED is extinguished. If the amber  
LED is illuminated, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate the  
problem.  
7. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, select the Event Log option from the Logs  
the log:  
310 to 315 - Nth cooling fan has recovered, where N is first to fourth (fan).  
8. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, observe the fan graphic and ensure no alert  
symbols appear that indicate a failure (yellow triangle or red diamond). If a  
problem is indicated, go to "MAP 0000: Start MAP" on page 2-7 to isolate the  
problem.  
9. Perform the data collection procedure (refer to "Collecting Maintenance Data" on  
page 3-31).  
10. Clear the switch system error (ERR) LED:  
a. At the HAFM server’s Hardware View, right-click the front panel bezel graphic  
(away from a FRU) to open a pop-up menu.  
b. Click the Clear System Error Light menu selection.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
4–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RRP: CTP Card - Switch Replacement  
Some event codes indicate a CTP card failure, as do some diagnostic paths through  
MAPs. The CTP card is not a FRU, and cannot be replaced. CTP card failure requires  
replacement of the entire switch. If the failed switch provides a critical singular link in  
the fabric, and that link is still operating, it may be necessary to schedule down-time  
for this replacement.  
Replacing a Failed Switch  
NOTE: This procedure assumes that the new switch will be installed in the same location as  
the failed switch and will be configured the same as the failed switch.  
Replacing a failed switch in an existing fabric requires the following tasks be done, in  
order:  
Remove the failed switch:  
— Ensure the failed switch is no longer carrying traffic.  
Set the switch offline.  
— Using HAFM, remove the switch from the fabric.  
Delete the switch from the fabric, using the HAFM product view.  
— Physically disconnect and remove the switch from the mounting location.  
Set up the new switch to operate in the fabric:  
— Physically mount the new switch in the mounting location.  
Verify that the new switch powers up successfully.  
After successful power-on-self-tests, the green PWR LED remains on and all  
other front panel LEDs extinguish.  
— Set the switch to operate on the LAN:  
1. Connect a maintenance terminal to the 9-pin maintenance port.  
2. Using Hyperterminal, connect to the edge switch 2/32.  
3. Enter the default password (password).  
4. At the C: prompt, type ipconfig and press enter.  
5. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address the same as the failed  
switch and press Enter.  
6. Close Hyperterminal and disconnect the maintenance terminal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FRU Removal and Replacement  
— Connect the switch to the LAN.  
— Configure the switch for the HAFM application:  
1. Right click in a blank area of the HAFM product view and select new.  
2. Type the IP address of the switch in the new product dialog box.  
3. Select the correct product type from the product type field and click OK. A  
new icon will display on the product view.  
— Configure the switch identification:  
1. Click on the new icon to open the hardware view and click the configure  
icon.  
2. Select identification from the configure menu.  
3. In the configure identification dialog box, type the name, description,  
location, and contact the same as the failed switch.  
— Configure operating mode:  
1. Set the switch offline.  
2. At the hardware view, select operating parameters from the configure  
menu.  
3. set BB_Credit, R_A_TOV, E_D_TOV, Preferred Domain ID, Switch  
Priority, and Rerouting Delay the same as the failed switch, and click  
Activate.  
Verify the firmware version:  
1. At the hardware view, select firmware library from the maintenance icon  
and verify that the firmware version is the same as that running on the existing  
fabric. The active version is displayed at the bottom of the display. To  
upgrade/download the active version, select the correct version and select  
SEND. The firmware will load, perhaps taking up to 10 minutes.  
— Configure the ports the same as the failed switch (select ports from the  
configure menu).  
— Configure SNMP traps, CLI, EWS the same as the failed switch.  
— Set the date and time.  
1. At the HAFM product view, select fabric. Select the new switch icon, then  
zone set tab.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
4–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU Removal and Replacement  
2. Verify that the active zoneset is the same active zoneset that is running on  
the fabric, and that the default zone is disabled.  
Add the switch to the fabric:  
— Connect the fibre-optic cables to the switch ports.  
— Set the switch online.  
Verify that the switch successfully joins the fabric.  
4–10  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Illustrated Parts Breakdown  
This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdown for the hp StorageWorks edge  
switch 2/16 field-replaceable units (FRUs). Exploded-view assembly drawings are  
provided for:  
Front-accessible FRUs.  
Rear-accessible FRUs.  
Miscellaneous parts.  
Exploded-view illustrations portray the switch disassembly sequence. Illustrated  
FRUs are numerically keyed to associated tabular parts lists. The parts lists also  
include part numbers, descriptions, and quantities.  
Front-Accessible FRUs  
The front-accessible switch FRUs are illustrated and described in Figure 5–1 and Table  
5–1. The table includes reference numbers to the figure, part numbers, descriptions,  
and quantities.  
TM  
10/100  
PWR  
RST  
ERR  
B
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
2
1
1
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
5–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Illustrated Parts Breakdown  
Table 5–1: Front-Accessible FRU Parts List  
Ref.  
Part Number  
292007-001  
292003-001  
Description  
Qty.  
Base assembly, edge switch 2/16, without optics  
Reference  
Transceiver, optical, shortwave laser, 2.125 Gbps, 0 to 16  
850 nm, LC (2 to 500 meters)  
1
1
1
292004-001  
292004-001  
Transceiver, optical, longwave laser, 2.125 Gbps,  
1300 nm, LC (up to 10 km)  
0 to 16  
Transceiver, optical, longwave laser, 2.125 Gbps,  
1300 nm, LC  
0 to 16  
The FRUs and their part numbers differ between the two packaging systems for the  
switch. Use care when selecting a part number to order for replacement purposes to  
ensure that the part number matches the switch for which it is intended.  
The rear-accessible switch FRUs are illustrated and described in Figure 5–2 and Table  
5–2. The table includes reference numbers to the figure, part numbers, descriptions,  
and quantities.  
5–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Illustrated Parts Breakdown  
1
3
2
3
Figure 5–2: Rear-Accessible FRUs  
Table 5–2: Rear-Accessible FRU Parts List  
Ref.  
1
Part Number  
292007-001  
292012-001  
Description  
Qty.  
Base assembly, edge switch 2/16, without optics  
Reference  
2
Power supply assembly (includes one cooling fan,  
P/N 292010-001)  
2
292010-001  
Fan, cooling  
4
3
Miscellaneous Parts  
Table 5–3 is a list of miscellaneous parts.  
Table 5–3: Miscellaneous Parts  
Part  
Ref.  
Number  
254138-001  
258754-001  
Description  
Power cord, 120 VAC, United States  
Power cord, AC, 5-15R  
Qty.  
Ref  
Ref  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
5–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Table 5–3: Miscellaneous Parts (Continued)  
Part  
Ref.  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Ref  
Number  
254139-001  
258753-001  
254143-001  
254144-001  
254145-001  
254146-001  
258750-001  
258751-001  
258752-001  
254147-001  
254148-001  
254135-001  
Description  
Power cord, AC Adapter/Jumper, 2.5 m  
Adapter, ac, 100-240 VAC, autosense  
Cable, Ethernet, 10 ft  
Qty.  
Cable, null modem, 10 ft  
Plug, loopback, shortwave  
Plug, loopback, longwave  
PC, laptop, without manuals  
Drive, Zip 250, without manuals  
Drive, Zip 250, power supply, universal  
Rackmount kit, 9000 and 11000 series  
Rackmount kit, M series  
Screwdriver, with bit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Invisible Body TagA  
Messages  
This appendix lists information and error messages that appear in pop-up message  
boxes at the hp StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) application and hp  
StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 product manager applications.  
The first section of the appendix lists HAFM application messages. The second  
section lists product manager messages. The text of each message is followed by a  
description and recommended course of action.  
HAFM Application Messages  
This section lists HAFM application information and error messages in alphabetical  
order.  
Message  
Description  
Action  
A zone must have at  
least one zone  
member.  
When creating a new Add one or more zone  
zone, one or more  
zone members must  
be added.  
members to the new zone.  
A zone set must have When creating a new Add one or more zones to the  
at least one zone.  
zone set, one or  
more zones must be  
added.  
new zone set.  
All alias, zone, and  
When creating a new Choose a unique name for  
zone set names must alias, zone, or zone  
the new alias, zone, or zone  
set.  
be unique.  
set, the name must  
be unique.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
An HAFM application Only one instance of  
Close all but one of the HAFM  
session is already  
active from this  
workstation.  
the HAFM application application sessions.  
is allowed to be open  
per remote  
workstation.  
Are you sure you  
want to delete this  
network address?  
The currently-  
selected network  
address will be  
deleted.  
Click Yes to delete or No to  
cancel.  
Are you sure you  
want to delete this  
nickname?  
The selected  
Click Yes to delete the  
nickname or No to cancel the  
operation.  
nickname will be  
deleted from the list  
of nickname  
definitions.  
Are you sure you  
want to delete this  
product?  
The selected product Click Yes to delete the  
will be deleted from  
the list of product  
definitions.  
product or No to cancel the  
operation.  
Are you sure you  
want to delete this  
user?  
The selected user will Click Yes to delete the user or  
be deleted from the  
No to cancel the operation.  
list of user definitions.  
Are you sure you  
want to delete this  
zone set?  
The selected zone  
set will be deleted  
from the zone library. operation.  
Click Yes to delete the zone  
set or No to cancel the  
Are you sure you  
want to delete this  
zone?  
The selected zone  
will be deleted from  
the zone library.  
Click Yes to delete the zone  
or No to cancel the operation.  
Are you sure you  
The selected zone  
Click Yes to overwrite or No to  
want to overwrite this set will be overwritten cancel.  
zone set?  
in the zoning library.  
Are you sure you  
want to remove all  
members from this  
zone?  
All members will be  
deleted from the  
selected zone.  
Click Yes to delete the  
members or No to cancel the  
operation.  
A–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
The HAFM  
application at a  
remote workstation  
could not connect to  
the HAFM server.  
Action  
Cannot connect to  
HAFM server.  
Verify the HAFM server  
internet protocol (IP) address  
is valid.  
Cannot delete  
product.  
The selected product Verify the HAFM  
cannot be deleted. server-to-product link is up.  
If the link is up, the HAFM  
server may be busy.  
Another product manager  
instance may be open.  
The user may not have  
permission to delete the  
product.  
Cannot display route. You cannot show the  
Enable the default zone or  
No active zone  
enabled.  
route through a fabric activate a zone set before  
with no active zone.  
attempting to show the route.  
This route cannot be shown  
Cannot display route. You cannot show the  
All switches in route  
must be managed by that has switches or  
route through a fabric unless all switches and  
directors in the route are  
managed by this HAFM  
server.  
the same server.  
directors that are  
managed by a  
different HAFM  
server.  
Cannot display route. You cannot show the  
All switches in route  
The route must contain only  
route through a fabric director 2/64; or edge switch  
must support routing. that has switches or  
directors which do  
2/16, and edge switch 2/32  
switches.  
not support routing.  
Cannot have spaces  
in field.  
Spaces are not  
allowed as part of the entry.  
entry for this field.  
Delete spaces from the field  
Cannot modify a  
zone set with an  
A zone set must have Assign a valid name to the  
a valid name to be  
zone set, then click Modify.  
Rename zone set  
and try again.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Cannot modify a  
zone with an invalid  
name. Rename zone  
and try again.  
A zone must have a  
valid name to be  
modified.  
Assign a valid name to the  
zone, then click Modify.  
Cannot modify  
product.  
The selected product Verify the HAFM  
cannot be modified.  
server-to-product link is up.  
If the link is up, the HAFM  
server may be busy.  
Another product manager  
instance may be open.  
The user may not have  
permission to modify the  
product.  
Cannot perform  
operation. Fabric is  
unknown.  
This message  
appears if no  
switches in the fabric  
are connected to the  
HAFM server.  
Ensure at least one  
fabric-attached switch or  
director has an Ethernet  
connection to the HAFM  
server and retry the  
operation.  
Cannot perform  
operation. The list of  
attached nodes is  
unavailable.  
This message  
appears when  
Verify an attached node is  
available and retry the  
operation.  
attached nodes are  
unavailable and the  
user attempts to  
modify a zone or  
create a new zone.  
Cannot retrieve  
current SNMP  
configuration.  
The current SNMP  
configuration could  
not be retrieved.  
Try again. If the problem  
persists, contact the next  
level of support.  
Cannot save current  
SNMP configuration.  
The current SNMP  
configuration could  
not be saved.  
Try again. If the problem  
persists, contact the next  
level of support.  
Click OK to remove  
all contents from log.  
This action deletes all Click OK to delete the log  
contents from the  
selected log.  
contents or Cancel to cancel  
the operation.  
A–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
The HAFM  
application at a  
remote workstation  
lost the network  
connection to the  
HAFM server.  
Action  
Connection to HAFM  
server lost. Click OK  
to exit application.  
Start the HAFM application to  
connect to the HAFM server.  
Could not export log  
to file.  
A log file input/output If the disk is full, use another  
(I/O) error occurred  
and the file could not  
be saved to the  
disk. If the disk is write  
protected, change the  
write-protect properties or use  
specified destination. another disk.  
The disk may be full  
or write protected.  
Default zoning is not  
supported in Open  
Fabric Mode.  
A default zone cannot Change the setting from  
be enabled when the  
switches in a fabric  
are set to Open  
Open Fabric mode to  
Homogeneous mode and  
retry the default zoning  
operation.  
Fabric mode.  
Download complete.  
Click OK and start  
the HAFM.  
Download of the  
HAFM and product  
manager applications  
is complete.  
Start the HAFM application to  
continue.  
Duplicate community  
names require  
If configuring two  
communities with  
Verify that both communities  
with the same name have the  
identical write  
identical names, they same write authorizations.  
authorizations.  
must also have  
identical write  
authorizations.  
Duplicate name in  
zoning configuration.  
Every name in the  
zoning library must  
be unique.  
Modify (to make it unique) or  
delete the duplicate name.  
Duplicate nickname  
in nickname  
Duplicate nicknames  
cannot be configured. to make it unique.  
Modify the selected nickname  
configuration.  
World-Wide Name in  
nickname  
A world-wide name  
can be associated  
with only one  
Modify (to make it unique) or  
delete the selected  
world-wide name.  
configuration.  
nickname.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Duplicate zone in  
zone set  
configuration.  
More than one  
instance of a zone is  
defined in a zone set.  
Delete one of the duplicate  
zones from the zone set.  
Duplicate zone  
member in zone  
configuration.  
More than one  
instance of a zone  
member is defined in  
a zone.  
Delete one of the duplicate  
zone members from the zone.  
Error connecting to  
switch.  
While viewing routes, Try the operation again. If the  
the HAFM server was problem persists, contact the  
unable to connect to  
the switch. The  
switch failed or the  
switch-to-HAFM  
server Ethernet link  
failed.  
next level of support.  
Error creating zone.  
The HAFM  
application  
encountered an  
internal error.  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Error creating zone  
set.  
The HAFM  
application  
encountered an  
internal error.  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Error deleting zone.  
The HAFM  
application  
encountered an  
internal error.  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Error deleting zone  
set.  
The HAFM  
application  
encountered an  
internal error.  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Error reading log file.  
The HAFM  
application  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
encountered an error next level of support.  
while trying to read  
the log.  
A–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
The HAFM  
application  
encountered an  
internal error.  
Action  
Error removing zone  
or zone member.  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Error transferring files An error occurred  
< message >. while transferring  
Try the file transfer operation  
again. If the problem persists,  
files from the PC hard contact the next level of  
drive to the HAFM  
application. The  
message varies,  
depending on the  
problem.  
support.  
Fabric member could A fabric member  
Ensure the product is  
not be found.  
does not exist when  
the application  
incorporated into the fabric  
and retry the operation. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
prepared to find a  
route, find a route  
node, or gather route  
information on that  
fabric member.  
Field cannot be  
blank.  
The data field  
requires an entry and in the data field.  
cannot be left blank.  
Enter appropriate information  
Field has exceeded  
maximum number of  
characters.  
The maximum  
number of data entry  
characters allowed in characters.  
the field was  
Enter the information using  
the proscribed number of  
exceeded.  
File transfer aborted.  
The user aborted the  
file transfer process.  
Verify the file transfer is to be  
aborted, then click OK to  
continue.  
Invalid character in  
field.  
An invalid character  
was entered in the  
data field.  
Remove invalid characters  
from the entry.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Invalid name.  
One of the following  
invalid names was  
used: CON, AUX,  
COM1, COM2,  
Select a valid name and retry  
the operation.  
COM3, COM4,  
COM5, COM6,  
COM7, COM8,  
COM9, LPT1, LPT2,  
LPT3, LPT4, LPT5,  
LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,  
LPT9, NUL, or PRN.  
Invalid network  
address.  
The IP address  
Verify and enter a valid  
product IP address.  
specified for the  
product is unknown  
to the domain name  
server (invalid).  
Invalid product  
selection.  
At the New Product  
dialog box, an invalid retry the operation.  
Select a valid product and  
product was  
selected.  
Invalid HAFM server  
address.  
The IP address  
specified for the  
HAFM server is  
unknown to the  
domain name server  
(invalid).  
Verify and enter a valid HAFM  
server IP address.  
Invalid UDP port  
number.  
The specified user  
datagram protocol  
(UDP) port number is  
invalid. The number  
must be an integer  
from 1 through 65535  
inclusive.  
Verify and enter a valid UDP  
port number.  
A–8  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
The specified  
Action  
Invalid World-Wide  
Name.  
Enter a world-wide name  
using the correct format.  
world-wide name  
format is invalid. The  
valid format is eight  
two-digithexadecimal  
numbers separated  
by colons  
(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:x  
x:xx).  
Invalid zone in zone  
set.  
The defined zone no  
longer exists and is  
invalid.  
Delete the invalid zone from  
the zone set.  
Management session An instance of the  
is already active from HAFM application is  
Close the previous session of  
the HAFM application before  
starting a new one.  
this workstation.  
already open at this  
workstation.  
No attached nodes  
selected.  
An operation was  
attempted without an  
attached node  
selected.  
Select an attached node and  
try the operation again.  
No nickname  
selected.  
No nickname was  
selected when the  
command was  
attempted.  
Select a nickname and try  
again.  
No product managers No director or switch  
Install the appropriate product  
manager to this workstation.  
installed.  
product manager  
application is  
installed on this  
workstation.  
No routing  
No information is  
Select a different route and  
information available. available for the route try the operation again.  
selected.  
No HAFM server  
specified.  
An HAFM server is  
not defined to the  
HAFM application.  
At the HAFM Login screen,  
type a server name in the  
HAFM server field and click  
Login.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
No user selected.  
A user was not  
selected when the  
command was  
attempted.  
Select a user and try again.  
No zone member  
selected.  
A zoning operation  
was attempted  
Select a zone member and try  
the operation again.  
without a zone  
member selected.  
No zone selected.  
A zoning operation  
was attempted  
without a zone  
selected.  
Select a zone and try the  
operation again.  
No zone selected or  
zone no longer  
exists.  
A zoning operation  
was attempted  
without a zone  
Select a zone and try the  
operation again.  
selected, or the zone  
selected no longer  
exists in the fabric.  
No zone set active.  
A zone set cannot be Informational message  
deactivated if there  
are no active zones.  
only-no action is required.  
No zone set selected. A zoning operation  
was attempted  
Select a zone set and try the  
operation again.  
without a zone set  
selected.  
No zone set selected A zoning operation  
or zone set no longer was attempted  
Select a zone set and try the  
operation again.  
exists.  
without a zone set  
selected, or the zone  
set you selected no  
longer exists in the  
fabric.  
Only attached nodes  
can be displayed in  
this mode.  
Users cannot display  
unused ports when  
adding ports by  
Change the add criteria to  
Add by Port.  
world-wide name.  
A–10  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Entries in the  
password field and  
confirmation  
Action  
Password and  
confirmation don’t  
match.  
Enter the password and  
confirmation password again.  
password field do not  
match. The entries  
are case sensitive  
and must be the  
same.  
Product manager  
instance is currently  
open.  
A product cannot be  
deleted while an  
instance of the  
Close the product manager  
application, then delete the  
product.  
product manager  
application is open.  
Remote session  
support has been  
disabled.  
The connection  
between the  
specified remote  
workstation and the  
HAFM server was  
disallowed.  
Consult with the customer’s  
network administrator to  
determine if the workstation  
entry should be modified at  
the Session Options dialog  
box.  
Remote sessions are Only IP addresses of  
Consult with the customer’s  
network administrator to  
determine if the IP address is  
to be configured for remote  
sessions.  
not allowed from this  
network address.  
remote workstations  
specified at the  
Session Options  
dialog box are  
allowed to connect to  
the HAFM server.  
Resource is  
unavailable.  
The specified  
Verify the HAFM  
operation cannot be  
performed because  
the product is  
server-to-product link is up. If  
the link is up, the HAFM  
server may be busy. Try the  
operation again later.  
unavailable.  
Route data  
corrupted.  
The information for  
this route is corrupt.  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
timeout.  
request timed out.  
Try the operation again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
This switch or  
director does not  
support the Show  
Routes feature.  
Action  
Routing is not  
supported by the  
switch.  
Select a different switch or  
director to show the route.  
HAFM error <error  
number 1 through 8  
>.  
The HAFM  
application  
Contact the next level of  
support to report the problem.  
encountered an  
internal error (1  
through 8 inclusive)  
and cannot continue  
operation.  
HAFM server is  
shutting down.  
Connection will be  
terminated.  
The HAFM  
application is closing  
and terminating  
communication with  
the attached product.  
Reboot the HAFM server. If  
the problem persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
HAFM server could  
not log you on. Verify username and  
your username and  
password.  
The incorrect  
Verify the user name and  
password with the customer’s  
network administrator and  
retry the operation.  
password (both case  
sensitive) were used  
while attempting to  
login to the HAFM  
application.  
Select alias to add to  
zone.  
An alias was not  
selected before  
clicking Add.  
Select an alias before clicking  
Add.  
Selection is not a  
World-Wide Name.  
The selection made  
is not a world-wide  
name.  
Select a valid world-wide  
name before performing this  
operation.  
Server shutting  
down.  
The HAFM  
application is closing  
and terminating  
Reboot the HAFM server. If  
the problem persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
communication with  
the attached product.  
A–12  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
If an SNMP  
community name is  
defined, a  
Action  
SNMP trap address  
not defined.  
Enter a corresponding SNMP  
trap recipient address.  
corresponding SNMP  
trap recipient address  
must also be defined.  
Switch is not  
managed by HAFM.  
The selected switch  
or director is not  
managed by the  
HAFM application.  
Select a different switch or  
director.  
The Administrator  
user cannot be  
deleted.  
The administrator  
user is permanent  
and cannot be  
deleted from the  
Configure Users  
dialog box.  
Informational message  
only-no action is required.  
The link to the  
director is not  
available.  
The Ethernet  
Establish and verify the  
network connection.  
connection between  
the HAFM server and  
Director is down or  
unavailable.  
The maximum  
number of aliases  
has already been  
configured.  
The maximum  
number of aliases  
allowed was reached.  
Delete an existing alias  
before adding a new alias.  
The maximum  
The maximum  
number of zone  
members that can be zone member.  
defined to the  
Delete an existing zone  
member before adding a new  
number of members  
has already been  
configured.  
application was  
reached.  
The maximum  
The maximum  
Delete an existing nickname  
number of nicknames number of nicknames before adding a new  
has already been  
that can be defined to nickname.  
the HAFM application  
was reached.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
The maximum  
The maximum  
number of open  
products allowed was product) before opening a  
reached.  
Close a product manager  
session (existing open  
number of open  
products has already  
been reached.  
new session.  
The maximum  
number of products  
has already been  
configured.  
The number of  
managed Hewlett  
Packard products  
(48) that can be  
defined to the HAFM  
application was  
reached.  
Delete an existing product  
before adding a new product.  
The maximum  
number of products  
of this type has  
already been  
The number of  
Hewlett Packard  
products of this type  
(48) that can be  
defined to the HAFM  
application was  
reached.  
Delete an existing product of  
this type before adding a new  
product.  
configured.  
The maximum  
A maximum of four IP Delete an existing IP address  
addresses for remote before adding a new IP  
number of remote  
network addresses  
has already been  
configured.  
workstations can be  
configured at the  
Session Options  
address.  
dialog box. That  
number was reached.  
The maximum  
A maximum of eight  
concurrent remote  
management  
sessions can be  
configured at the  
Session Options  
dialog box. The  
specified number  
was reached.  
Increase the number of  
number of HAFM  
application sessions  
has been reached.  
remote sessions allowed (if  
less than four), or terminate a  
session before attempting to  
initiate a new session.  
A–14  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
The maximum  
number of HAFM  
server network  
addresses has  
already been  
configured.  
The number of HAFM Delete an existing IP address  
server IP addresses  
that can be defined to  
the HAFM application  
was reached.  
before adding a new address.  
The maximum  
number of users has  
already been  
The number of users  
(16) that can be  
defined to the HAFM  
application was  
reached.  
Delete an existing user before  
adding a new user.  
configured.  
The maximum  
The maximum  
Delete an existing zone  
number of zones  
allowed has already  
been configured.  
number of zones that before adding a new zone.  
can be defined was  
reached.  
The maximum  
The maximum  
Delete an existing zone set  
before adding a new zone  
set.  
number of zone sets  
has already been  
configured.  
number of zone sets  
that can be defined  
was reached.  
The maximum  
The maximum  
Delete an existing zone  
number of zones per  
zone set has already  
been configured.  
number of zones that before adding a new zone to  
can be defined in a  
zone set was  
reached.  
the zone set.  
The nickname does  
not exist.  
The entered  
nickname does not  
exist in the fabric.  
Configure the nickname to  
the appropriate product or  
select an existing nickname.  
The nickname is  
already assigned.  
Either use a different  
name or do not save  
the name as a  
The entered  
Define a different nickname.  
nickname already  
exists in the fabric.  
Each nickname must  
be unique.  
nickname.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
The HAFM server is  
busy processing a  
request from another  
product manager.  
The HAFM server PC Wait until the process is  
is processing a  
completes, then perform the  
operation again.  
request from another  
instance of a product  
manager application,  
and cannot perform  
the requested  
operation.  
The software version  
on this HAFM server  
is not compatible with connecting to the  
the version on the HAFM server must  
A second HAFM  
server PC (client)  
Upgrade the software version  
on the downlevel HAFM  
server PC.  
remote HAFM server. be running the same  
software version to  
log in.  
The zoning library  
conversion must be  
completed before  
continuing.  
The zoning library  
conversion is  
incomplete and the  
requested operation  
cannot continue.  
Complete the zoning library  
conversion, then retry the  
operation.  
This network address The specified IP  
Consult with the customer’s  
network administrator to  
determine a new IP address  
to be assigned and  
has already been  
assigned.  
address was  
assigned and  
configured. A unique  
address must be  
assigned.  
configured.  
This product is not  
managed by this  
HAFM server.  
The product selected Select a product managed by  
is not managed by  
this HAFM server.  
this HAFM server or go to the  
HAFM server that manages  
the affected product.  
This user name has  
already been  
assigned.  
The specified user  
name is already  
assigned and  
configured.  
Modify (to make it unique) or  
delete the duplicate name.  
Too many members  
defined.  
The maximum  
number of zone  
Delete an existing zone  
member before adding a new  
members that can be zone member.  
defined was reached.  
A–16  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
The HAFM  
Action  
You do not have a  
compatible version of application version  
Download a compatible  
version of the HAFM  
the HAFM server  
software. In order for  
running on the HAFM application to the remote  
server differs from workstation (client) using the  
the HAFM application the version running  
to function properly, a on the remote  
web install procedure.  
compatible version  
must be installed on  
the client machine.  
Click OK to install a  
compatible version.  
workstation (client). A  
compatible version  
must be downloaded  
from the HAFM  
server.  
You do not have  
rights to perform this  
action.  
Configured user  
rights do not allow  
this operation to be  
performed.  
Verify user rights with the  
customer’s network  
administrator and change as  
required.  
You must define an  
SMTP server  
address.  
A simple mail transfer Define the SMTP server  
protocol (SMTP)  
server address must  
be defined and  
address at the Configure  
E-Mail dialog box.  
configured for e-mail  
to be activated.  
You must define at  
least one E-mail  
address.  
At least one e-mail  
address must be  
defined and  
Define an e-mail address at  
the Configure E-Mail dialog  
box.  
configured for e-mail  
to be activated.  
You must define at  
least one remote  
network address.  
At least one IP  
Define an IP address for at  
least one remote workstation  
at the Session Options dialog  
box.  
address for a remote  
workstation must be  
configured for a  
remote session to be  
activated.  
You must download  
the HAFM client via  
the web install.  
An attempt was made Download a compatible  
to download the  
version of the HAFM  
HAFM application to  
a remote workstation  
(client) using an  
application to the remote  
workstation (client) using the  
web install procedure.  
improper procedure.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
While in Open Fabric Informational message only -  
no action is required.  
Action  
Zones configured  
with port numbers are mode, zones  
ignored in Open  
Fabric Mode.  
configured using port  
numbers are  
enforced through  
world-wide names.  
Zoning by port  
While in Open Fabric Informational message only -  
number is ignored in  
Open Fabric Mode.  
mode, zones  
configured using port  
numbers are  
no action is required.  
enforced through  
world-wide names.  
Zoning name already Duplicate zone  
exists. names are not  
Modify (to make it unique) or  
delete the duplicate zone  
allowed in the zoning name.  
library.  
Edge-16 Switch Product Manager Messages  
This section lists switch product manager information and error messages in  
alphabetical order.  
Message  
Description  
Action  
A product manager  
instance is already  
open.  
Only one instance of  
the product manager  
application can be  
open at one time.  
Close the open product  
manager application so the  
desired instance of the  
product manager application  
can be opened.  
All port names must  
be unique.  
A duplicate Fibre  
Channel port name  
was configured. All  
port names must be  
unique.  
Reconfigure the Fibre  
Channel port with a unique  
name.  
A–18  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Another product  
manager is currently  
performing a  
Only one instance of  
the product manager  
application can install complete and try the  
Wait for the firmware  
installation process to  
firmware install.  
a firmware version to  
the switch or director  
at a time.  
operation again.  
Are you sure you  
want to delete  
This message  
requestsconfirmation firmware version or No to  
Click Yes to delete the  
firmware version?  
to delete a firmware  
version from the  
HAFM server’s  
abort the operation.  
firmware library.  
Are you sure you  
want to send  
This message  
requestsconfirmation firmware version or No to  
Click Yes to send the  
firmware version?  
to send a firmware  
version from the  
HAFM server’s  
abort the operation.  
firmware library to the  
switch or director.  
Cannot have spaces  
in field.  
Spaces are not  
allowed as part of the entry.  
entry for this field.  
Delete spaces from the field  
Cannot retrieve  
current SNMP  
configuration.  
The switch or director Retry the operation later. If  
SNMP configuration  
cannot be retrieved  
by the product  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
manager application  
because the Ethernet  
link is down or busy.  
Cannot retrieve  
diagnostics results.  
Switch or director  
diagnostic results  
cannot be retrieved  
by the product  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
manager application  
because the Ethernet  
link is down or busy.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Cannot retrieve  
director date and  
time.  
The switch or director Retry the operation later. If  
date and time cannot the condition persists, contact  
be retrieved by the  
product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
the next level of support.  
Cannot retrieve  
director state.  
The switch or director Retry the operation later. If  
state cannot be  
retrieved by the  
product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
Cannot retrieve port  
configuration.  
The port  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
configuration cannot  
be retrieved by the  
product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
Cannot retrieve port  
information.  
Port information  
cannot be retrieved  
by the product  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
manager application  
because the Ethernet  
link is down or busy.  
Cannot retrieve port  
statistics.  
Port statistics cannot  
be retrieved by the  
product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
A–20  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Cannot run  
diagnostics on a port  
that is failed.  
Description  
Action  
Port diagnostics  
(loopback tests)  
cannot be performed  
on a port that has  
failed any previous  
diagnostic (power-on  
diagnostic, online  
diagnostic, or  
Reset the port and perform  
diagnostics again.  
loopback test). The  
amber LED  
associated with the  
port illuminates to  
indicate the failed  
state.  
Cannot run  
diagnostics on a port  
that is not installed.  
Port diagnostics  
(loopback tests)  
cannot be performed  
on a port that does  
not have a small form  
factor pluggable  
Install a transceiver in the port  
and perform diagnostics  
again.  
(SFP) optical  
transceiver installed.  
Cannot run  
diagnostics while a  
device is logged-in to test) cannot be  
Port diagnostics  
(internal loopback  
Ensure the device is logged  
out and perform diagnostics  
again.  
the port.  
performed on a port  
while an attached  
Fibre Channel device  
is logged in.  
Cannot save port  
configuration.  
The port  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
configuration cannot  
be saved at the  
product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Cannot save SNMP  
configuration.  
The switch or director Retry the operation later. If  
SNMP configuration  
cannot be saved at  
the product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
Cannot set director  
date and time.  
The switch or director Retry the operation later. If  
date and time cannot the condition persists, contact  
be set at the product  
manager application  
because the Ethernet  
link is down or busy.  
the next level of support.  
Cannot set director  
state.  
The switch or director Retry the operation later. If  
state cannot be set at the condition persists, contact  
the product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
the next level of support.  
Cannot set fibre  
channel parameters.  
Fibre Channel  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
parameters for the  
switch or director  
cannot be set at the  
product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
Cannot start data  
collection.  
The data collection  
procedure cannot be  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
started by the product the next level of support.  
manager application  
because the Ethernet  
link is down or busy.  
A–22  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Cannot start port  
diagnostics.  
Port diagnostics  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
cannot be started at  
the product manager  
application because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
Click OK to remove  
all contents from log.  
This action deletes all Click OK to delete the log  
contents from the  
selected log.  
contents or Cancel to cancel  
the operation.  
Connection to HAFM  
server lost. Click OK  
to exit application.  
The HAFM  
Start the HAFM application to  
connect to the HAFM server.  
application at a  
remote workstation  
lost the network  
connection to the  
HAFM server.  
Could not export log  
to file.  
A log file I/O error  
occurred and the file  
If the disk is full, use another  
disk. If the disk is write  
could not be saved to protected, change the  
the specified  
write-protect properties or use  
destination. The disk  
may be full or write  
protected.  
another disk.  
Could not find  
firmware file.  
A firmware version  
could not be found  
because the data  
Reinstall the HAFM and  
product manager  
applications. If the condition  
directory structure for persists, contact the next  
the HAFM server is  
corrupt.  
level of support.  
Could not remove  
dump files from  
server.  
Dump files could not  
be deleted from the  
HAFM server  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
because the  
notebook PC or  
product manager  
application is busy.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Could not stop port  
diagnostics.  
Port diagnostics  
could not be stopped  
by the product  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
manager application  
because the Ethernet  
link is down or busy,  
or because the switch  
or director is busy.  
Could not write  
firmware to flash.  
A firmware version  
could not be written  
from the HAFM  
Retry the operation again. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
server to FLASH  
memory on the  
Director’s CTP2 card.  
Date entered is  
invalid.  
The date is entered  
incorrectly at the  
Verify each entry is valid and  
consistent.  
Configure Date and  
Time dialog box.  
Individual field entries  
may be correct, but  
the overall date is  
invalid (for example,  
a day entry of 31 for a  
30-day month).  
Device applications  
should be terminated (loopback tests)  
before starting  
diagnostics. Press  
NEXT to continue.  
Port diagnostics  
Terminate the device  
application and perform  
diagnostics again.  
cannot be performed  
on a port while an  
attached device  
application is  
running.  
Director must be  
The switch or director Set the switch or director  
offline to configure.  
must be set offline  
prior to configuring  
Fibre Channel  
operating  
offline, reconfigure  
parameters at the Configure  
Operating Parameters dialog  
parameters.  
A–24  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Click OK to IPL the switch or  
Do you want to  
This message  
continue with IPL?  
requestsconfirmation director or No to cancel the  
to initial program load operation.  
(IPL) the switch or  
director.  
Duplicate Community Duplicate community  
Delete the duplicate  
names require  
identical write  
authorizations.  
names are entered at community name or make the  
the Configure SNMP  
dialog box, and have  
different write  
write authorizations  
consistent.  
authorizations.  
Error retrieving port  
information.  
An error occurred at  
the product manager  
application while  
retrieving port  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
information because  
the Ethernet link is  
down or busy.  
Error retrieving port  
statistics.  
An error occurred at  
the product manager  
application while  
retrieving port  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
statistics because the  
Ethernet link is down  
or busy.  
Error stopping port  
diagnostics.  
An error occurred at  
the product manager  
application while  
attempting to stop  
port diagnostics from  
running because the  
Ethernet link is down  
or busy.  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Error transferring files An error occurred  
Try the file transfer operation  
again. If the problem persists,  
< message >.  
while transferring  
files from the PC hard contact the next level of  
drive to the product  
manager application.  
The message varies,  
depending on the  
problem.  
support.  
Field cannot be  
blank.  
The data field  
requires an entry and in the data field.  
cannot be left blank.  
Enter appropriate information  
File transfer aborted.  
The user aborted the  
file transfer process.  
Verify the file transfer is to be  
aborted, then click OK to  
continue.  
File transfer is in  
progress.  
A firmware file is  
being transferred  
from the HAFM  
Informational message  
only-no action is required.  
server hard drive, or  
a data collection file  
is being transferred to  
a diskette.  
Firmware download  
timed out.  
A firmware download Retry the operation. If the  
operation timed out  
and aborted.  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Firmware file I/O  
error.  
A firmware download Retry the operation. If the  
operation aborted  
because a file I/O  
error occurred.  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Firmware file not  
found.  
The firmware version Add the firmware version to  
is not installed (or the library and retry the  
was deleted) from the operation.  
firmware library at the  
HAFM server.  
Internal file transfer  
error received from  
director.  
The switch or director Retry the operation. If the  
detected an internal  
file transfer error.  
next level of support.  
A–26  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Invalid character in  
field.  
An invalid character  
was entered in the  
data field.  
Remove invalid characters  
from the entry.  
Invalid firmware file.  
The file selected for  
Select the correct firmware  
firmware download is version file and retry the  
not a firmware  
version file.  
operation.  
Invalid network  
address.  
The IP address  
Verify and enter a valid  
product IP address.  
specified for the  
product is unknown  
to the domain name  
server (invalid).  
Invalid port number.  
The Fibre Channel  
number entered is  
invalid. The port  
Verify and enter a valid port  
number.  
number must be an  
integer from 0  
through 63 inclusive.  
Invalid response  
received from  
director.  
An error occurred at  
the switch or director  
during a firmware  
Retry the firmware download  
operation. If the problem  
persists, contact the next  
level of support.  
download operation.  
Invalid HAFM server  
address.  
The IP address  
specified for the  
HAFM server is  
unknown to the  
domain name server  
(invalid).  
Verify and enter a valid HAFM  
server IP address.  
Invalid UDP port  
number.  
The specified user  
datagram protocol  
(UDP) port number is  
invalid. The number  
must be an integer  
from 1 through 65535  
Verify and enter a valid UDP  
port number.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Invalid value for  
BB_Credit.  
At the Configure  
Operating  
Verify and enter a valid  
number.  
Parameters dialog  
box, the  
buffer-to-buffer credit  
(BB_Credit) value  
must be an integer  
from 1 through 60  
inclusive.  
Invalid value for day  
(1 - 31).  
At the Configure Date Verify and enter a valid date.  
and Time dialog box,  
the DD value (day)  
must be an integer  
from 1 through 31  
inclusive.  
Invalid value for  
E_D_TOV.  
At the Configure  
Operating  
Verify and enter a valid  
number.  
Parameters dialog  
box, the error detect  
time-out value  
(E_D_TOV) must be  
an integer from 2  
through 600  
inclusive.  
Invalid value for hour  
(0 - 23).  
At the Configure Date Verify and enter a valid time.  
and Time dialog box,  
the HH value (hour)  
must be an integer  
from 0 through 23  
inclusive.  
Invalid value for  
minute (0 - 59).  
At the Configure Date Verify and enter a valid time.  
and Time dialog box,  
the MM value  
(minute) must be an  
integer from 0  
through 59 inclusive.  
A–28  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Invalid value for  
month (1 - 12).  
At the Configure Date Verify and enter a valid date.  
and Time dialog box,  
the MM value  
(month) must be an  
integer from 1  
through 12 inclusive.  
Invalid value for  
R_A_TOV.  
At the Configure  
Operating  
Verify and enter a valid  
number.  
Parameters dialog  
box, the resource  
allocation time-out  
value (R_A_TOV)  
must be an integer  
from 10 through 1200  
inclusive.  
Invalid value for  
second (0 - 59).  
At the Configure Date Verify and enter a valid time.  
and Time dialog box,  
the SS value  
(second) must be an  
integer from 0  
through 59 inclusive.  
Invalid value for year. At the Configure Date Verify and enter a four-digit  
and Time dialog box,  
the YYYY value  
(year) must be a  
four-digit value.  
value for the year.  
Invalid World-Wide  
Name.  
The specified  
Enter a world-wide name  
using the correct format.  
world-wide name  
format is invalid. The  
valid format is eight  
two-digithexadecimal  
numbers separated  
by colons  
(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:x  
x:xx).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
The HAFM  
server-to-switch or  
director Ethernet link  
was dropped.  
Action  
Link dropped.  
Retry the operation. If the  
condition persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
Log is currently in  
use.  
Access to the log is  
denied because the  
log was opened by  
another instance of  
the product manager  
application.  
Retry the operation later. If  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
Maximum number of  
versions already  
installed.  
The number of  
firmware versions  
that can be defined to version.  
the HAFM  
Delete an existing firmware  
version before adding a new  
application’sfirmware  
library was reached.  
No file was selected.  
Action requires the  
selection of a file.  
Select a file.  
No firmware versions There are no  
Informational message  
to delete.  
firmware versions in  
only-no action is required.  
the firmware library to  
delete, therefore the  
operation cannot be  
performed.  
No firmware version  
was selected.  
A file was not  
Click on a firmware version in  
the dialog box to select it,  
then perform the action again.  
selected in the  
Firmware Library  
dialog box before an  
action, such as  
modify or send, was  
performed.  
A–30  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Performing this  
action will overwrite  
the date/time on the  
director.  
Warning that occurs  
when configuring the  
date and time  
Verify that you want to  
overwrite the current date or  
time.  
through the  
Configure Date and  
Time dialog box, that  
the new time or date  
will overwrite the  
existing time or date  
set for the switch or  
director.  
Performing this  
This message  
Click OK to set the switch or  
operation will change requestsconfirmation director offline or Cancel to  
the current state to  
Offline.  
to set the switch or  
director offline.  
cancel the operation.  
Performing this  
This message  
Click OK to set the switch or  
operation will change requestsconfirmation director online or Cancel to  
the current state to  
Online.  
to set the switch or  
director online.  
cancel the operation.  
Periodic Date/Time  
synchronization must performed because  
be cleared.  
Action cannot be  
Click Periodic Date/Time  
Synchronization check box in  
Configure Date and Time  
dialog box (Configure menu)  
to clear check mark and  
disable periodic date/time  
synchronization.  
Periodic Date/Time  
Synchronization  
option is active.  
Product manager  
error < error number  
5001 or 5002 >.  
At the Configure  
Operating  
Parameters dialog  
box, the R_A_TOV  
entry must be greater  
than E_D_TOV entry.  
Verify and change one of the  
entries to make the  
relationship valid.  
Product manager  
instance is currently  
open.  
A product manager  
window is open.  
Informational message only.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Send firmware failed. A firmware download Retry the firmware download  
operation failed.  
operation. If the problem  
persists, contact the next  
level of support.  
SNMP trap address  
not defined.  
If an SNMP  
community name is  
defined, a  
Enter a corresponding SNMP  
trap recipient address.  
corresponding SNMP  
trap recipient address  
must also be defined.  
Start diagnostics  
failed. The test is  
currently running.  
Diagnostics for the  
port was already  
started from the Port  
Diagnostics dialog  
box  
Informational message.  
Stop diagnostics  
failed. The test is  
already running.  
Diagnostics for the  
port was not running  
and the Stop was  
selected on the Port  
Diagnostics dialog  
box. Diagnostics quit  
for the port, but Stop  
button remains  
Verify port operation. Retry  
diagnostics for port and select  
Stop from the dialog box. If  
problem persists, contact  
your service representative.  
enabled.  
System diagnostics  
cannot run. The  
Operational Status is  
invalid.  
System diagnostics  
cannot run on switch  
or directors or  
switches with failed  
ports.  
Replace failed ports.  
The add firmware  
process has been  
aborted.  
The user aborted the  
process to add a  
firmware version to  
the HAFM server’s  
firmware library.  
Verify the firmware addition is  
to be aborted, then click OK  
to continue.  
The data collection  
process failed.  
An error occurred  
while performing the  
data collection  
procedure.  
Try the data collection  
procedure again. If the  
problem persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
A–32  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
The data collection  
process has been  
aborted.  
The user aborted the  
data collection  
procedure.  
Verify the data collection  
procedure is to be aborted,  
then click OK to continue.  
The director did not  
accept the request.  
The switch or director Retry the operation. If the  
cannot perform the  
requested action.  
condition persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
The director did not  
respond in the time  
allowed.  
While waiting to  
Retry the operation. If the  
condition persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
perform a requested  
action, the switch or  
director timed out.  
The director is busy  
saving maintenance  
information.  
The switch or director Retry the operation later. If  
cannot perform the  
requested action  
because it is busy  
saving maintenance  
information.  
the condition persists, contact  
the next level of support.  
The director must be  
offline to configure.  
This configuration  
task requires the  
switch or director to  
be offline.  
Take the switch or director  
offline and retry the action.  
The Ethernet link  
dropped.  
The Ethernet  
Establish and verify the  
network connection.  
connection between  
the HAFM server and  
the switch or director  
is down or  
unavailable.  
The firmware file is  
corrupted.  
A firmware version  
file is corrupt.  
Contact the next level of  
support to report the problem.  
The firmware version This firmware version Informational message  
already exists.  
already exists in  
HAFM server’s  
firmware library.  
only-no action is required.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
A–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Message  
Description  
The Ethernet  
connection between  
the HAFM server and  
the switch or director  
is down or  
Action  
The link to the  
director is not  
available.  
Establish and verify the  
network connection.  
unavailable.  
The HAFM server is  
busy processing a  
request from another  
product manager.  
The HAFM server PC Wait until the process is  
is processing a  
completes, then perform the  
operation again.  
request from another  
instance of a product  
manager application,  
and cannot perform  
the requested  
operation.  
Threshold alerts are  
not supported.  
Threshold alerts are  
not supported in  
firmware releases  
before 1.03.00.  
Informational message.  
Unable to save data  
collection file to  
destination.  
The HAFM server  
could not save the  
data collection file to  
the specified location  
(PC hard drive,  
Retry the operation. If the  
condition persists, contact the  
next level of support.  
diskette, or network).  
You do not have  
rights to perform this  
action.  
Configured user  
rights do not allow  
this operation to be  
performed.  
Verify user rights with the  
customer’s network  
administrator and change as  
required.  
A–34  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Event Codes  
This appendix lists all three-digit hp StorageWorks edge switch 2/16 event codes and  
provides detailed information about each code. Event codes are listed in numerical  
order and in tabular format.  
An event is an occurrence (state change, problem detection, or problem correction)  
that requires user attention or that should be reported to a system administrator or  
service representative. An event usually indicates a switch operational state transition,  
but may also indicate an impending state change (threshold violation). An event may  
also provide information only, and not indicate an operational state change. Event  
codes are grouped as follows:  
000 through 199 - system events.  
200 through 299 - power supply events.  
300 through 399 - fan module events.  
400 through 499 - CTP card events.  
500 through 599 - port module events.  
600 through 699 - SBAR module events.  
700 through 799 - Reserved for future use.  
800 through 899 - Thermal  
Events can be recorded in the switch Event Logs at the HAFM server, or at a remote  
workstation if E-mail and call-home features are enabled. An event may also  
illuminate the system error (ERR) light-emitting diode (LED) on the front panel.  
In addition to numerical event codes, the tables in this appendix also provide a:  
Message - a brief text string that describes the event.  
Severity - a severity level that indicates event criticality as follows:  
0 - informational.  
2 - minor.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Event Codes  
3 - major.  
4 - severe (not operational).  
Explanation - a complete explanation of what caused the event.  
Action - the recommended course of action (if any) to resolve the problem.  
Event Data - supplementary event data (if any) that appears in the event log in  
hexadecimal format.  
Distribution - check marks in associated fields indicate where the event code is  
reported (front panel, HAFM server, or host).  
B–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
System Events (000 through 199)  
Event Code: 001  
Message:  
Severity:  
System power-down.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The switch was powered off or disconnected from the facility AC power source. The  
n:  
event code is distributed the next time the switch powers on, but the date and time of the  
code reflect the power-off time.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with the event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 011  
Message:  
Severity:  
Login Server database invalid.  
Minor.  
Explanatio Following an initial machine load (IML) or firmware download, the Login Server  
n:  
database failed its cyclic redundancy check (CRC) validation. All Fabric Services  
databases are initialized to an empty state, resulting in an implicit Fabric logout of all  
attached devices.  
Action:  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
System  
Error  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Event Codes  
Event Code: 021  
Message:  
Severity:  
Name Server database invalid.  
Minor.  
Explanatio Following an IML or firmware download, the Name Server database failed its CRC  
n:  
validation. All Fabric Services databases are initialized to an empty, state resulting in an  
implicit Fabric logout of all attached devices.  
Action:  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 031  
Message:  
Severity:  
SNMP request received from unauthorized community.  
Informational.  
Explanatio An SNMP request containing an unauthorized community name was received and  
n:  
rejected with an error. Only requests containing authorized SNMP community names as  
configured through the switch Product Manager application are allowed.  
Action:  
Add the community name to the SNMP configuration using the switch Product Manager  
application.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 051  
Message:  
Severity:  
Management Server database invalid.  
Minor.  
Explanatio Following an IML, or firmware download, the Management Server database failed its  
n:  
CRC validation. All Management Services databases are initialized to an empty state,  
resulting in an implicit logout of all devices logged in to the Management Server.  
Action:  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 052  
Message:  
Severity:  
Management Server internal error.  
Informational.  
Explanatio An operating error (internal to the switch) was detected by the Management Server  
n:  
subsystem.  
Action:  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 061  
Message:  
Severity:  
Fabric Controller database invalid.  
Minor.  
Explanatio Following an IML, or firmware download, the Fabric Controller database failed its CRC  
n:  
validation. All Fabric Controller databases are initialized to an empty state, resulting in a  
momentary loss of interswitch communication capability.  
Action:  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 062  
Message:  
Severity:  
Maximum interswitch hop count exceeded.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The fabric controller software detected that a path to another fabric element (director or  
n:  
switch) traverses more than three interswitch links (ISLs or hops). This may result in  
Fibre Channel frames persisting in the fabric longer than standard timeout values allow.  
Action:  
If possible, reconfigure the fabric so the path between any two directors or switches  
traverses no more than three ISLs.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 070  
Message:  
Severity:  
E_Port is segmented.  
Informational.  
Explanatio A switch E_Port recognized an incompatibility with an attached fabric element (director  
n:  
or switch), preventing the switch from participating in the fabric. A segmented port does  
not transmit Class 2 or Class 3 traffic (data from attached devices), but transmits Class  
F traffic (management and control data from the attached director or switch). Refer to  
the event data for the segmentation reason.  
Action:  
Action depends on the segmentation reason specified in the event data.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the E_Port number. The fifth byte (byte 4)  
specifies the segmentation reason as follows:  
1 = Incompatible operating parameters. Ether the resource allocation time out value  
(R_A_TOV) or error detect time out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent between the  
switch and another fabric element (director or switch). Modify the R_A_TOV and  
E_D_TOV to make the values consistent for all fabric directors and switches.  
2 = Duplicate domain ID. The switch has the same preferred domain ID as another  
fabric element (director or switch). Modify the switch’s Domain ID to make it unique.  
3 = Incompatible zoning configurations. The same name is applied to a zone for the  
switch and another fabric element (director or switch), but the zones contain different  
zone members. Modify the zone name to make it unique, or ensure zones with the same  
name contain identical zone members.  
4 = Build fabric protocol error. A protocol error was detected during incorporation of  
the switch into the fabric. Disconnect the E_Port link, reconnect the link, and initial  
program load (IPL) the switch. If the condition persists, perform the data collection  
procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
5 = No principal switch. No director or switch in the fabric can become the principal  
switch. Modify the switch priority to any value other than 255.  
6 = No response from attached switch (hello timeout). The switch periodically  
verifies operation of attached fabric elements (directors or switches). The switch E_Port  
(at the operational switch) times out and segments if the attached device does not  
respond. Check the status of the attached director or switch. If the condition persists,  
perform the data collection procedure (at the attached device) and return the Zip disk to  
Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
7 = ELP retransmission failure timeout. A switch that exhibits a hardware or link  
failure attempted to join a fabric and transmitted multiple exchange link protocol (ELP)  
frames to a fabric element (director or switch). However, because of the problem, the  
switch did not receive responses to the ELP frames, and did not receive a fabric login  
(FLOGI) frame. After five ELP transmission attempts, the switch E_Port (failed switch)  
times out and segments. Refer to MAP 0000: Start MAP to perform hardware fault  
isolation at the failed switch.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 070 (continued)  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 071  
Message:  
Severity:  
Switch is isolated.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The switch is isolated from other fabric elements (directors or switches). This event code  
n:  
is accompanied by one or more 070 event codes. Refer to the event data for the  
segmentation reason.  
Action:  
Action depends on the segmentation reason specified in the event data.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the E_Port number. The fifth byte (byte 4)  
specifies the segmentation reason as follows:  
1 = Incompatible operating parameters. Ether the resource allocation time out value  
(R_A_TOV) or error detect time out value (E_D_TOV) is inconsistent between the  
switch and another fabric element (director or switch). Modify the R_A_TOV and  
E_D_TOV to make the values consistent for all fabric directors and switches.  
2 = Duplicate domain ID. The switch has the same preferred domain ID as another  
fabric element (director or switch). Modify the switch’s Domain ID to make it unique.  
3 = Incompatible zoning configurations. The same name is applied to a zone for the  
switch and another fabric element (director or switch), but the zones contain different  
zone members. Modify the zone name to make it unique, or ensure zones with the same  
name contain identical zone members.  
B–8  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 071 (continued)  
Event  
Data  
4 = Build fabric protocol error. A protocol error was detected during incorporation of  
the switch into the fabric. Disconnect the E_Port link, reconnect the link, and IPL the  
(continued switch. If the condition persists, perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip  
):  
disk to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
5 = No principal switch. No director or switch in the fabric can become the principal  
switch. Modify the switch priority to any value other than 255.  
6 = No response from attached switch (hello timeout). The switch periodically  
verifies operation of attached fabric elements (directors or switches). The switch E_Port  
(at the operational switch) times out and segments if the attached device does not  
respond. Check the status of the attached director or switch. If the condition persists,  
perform the data collection procedure (at the attached device) and return the Zip disk to  
7 = ELP retransmission failure timeout. A switch that exhibits a hardware or link  
failure attempted to join a fabric and transmitted multiple ELP frames to a fabric element  
(director or switch). However, because of the problem, the switch did not receive  
responses to the ELP frames, and did not receive an FLOGI frame. After five ELP  
transmission attempts, the switch E_Port (failed switch) times out and segments. Refer  
to MAP 0000: Start MAP to perform hardware fault isolation at the failed switch.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 072  
Message:  
Severity:  
E_Port connected to unsupported switch.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The switch is attached (through an ISL) to an incompatible fabric element (director or  
n:  
switch).  
Action:  
Disconnect the ISL.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–10  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 080  
Message:  
Severity:  
Unauthorized world-wide name.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The world-wide name of the device or switch plugged in the indicated port is not  
n:  
authorized for that port.  
Action:  
Change the port binding definition or plug the correct device or switch into this port.  
Byte 0 = failing port number.  
Event  
Data:  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Power Supply Events (200 through 299)  
Event Code: 200  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply AC voltage failure.  
Major.  
Explanatio Alternating current (AC) input to the indicated power supply is disconnected or AC  
n:  
circuitry in the power supply failed. The second power supply assumes the full operating  
load for the switch.  
Action:  
Ensure the power supply is connected to facility AC power, and verify operation of the  
facility power source. If the AC voltage does not recover (indicated by event code 203),  
replace the failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the  
Zip disk and failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 201  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply DC voltage failure.  
Major.  
Explanatio Direct current (DC) circuitry in the power supply failed. The second power supply  
n:  
assumes the full operating load for the switch.  
Action:  
Replace the failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the  
Zip disk and failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Link  
4
4
4
4
4
4
B–12  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Event Codes  
Event Code: 202  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply thermal failure.  
Major.  
Explanatio The thermal sensor associated with a power supply indicates an overheat condition that  
n:  
shut down the power supply. The second power supply assumes the full operating load  
for the switch.  
Action:  
Replace the failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the  
Zip disk and failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 203  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply AC voltage recovery.  
Informational.  
Explanatio AC voltage recovered for the power supply. Both power supplies adjust to share  
n:  
operating load for the switch.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with the event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 204  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply DC voltage recovery.  
Informational.  
Explanatio DC voltage recovered for the power supply. Both power supplies adjust to share  
n:  
operating load for the switch.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with the event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 206  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply removed.  
Informational.  
Explanatio A power supply was removed while the Switch was powered on and operational. The  
n:  
second power supply assumes the full operating load for the switch.  
No action required or install an operational power supply.  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Action:  
Event  
Data:  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–14  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 207  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply installed.  
Informational.  
Explanatio A redundant power supply was installed with the switch powered on and operational.  
n:  
Both power supplies adjust to share operating load for the switch.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with the event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 208  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power supply false shutdown.  
Major.  
Explanatio Switch operational firmware nearly shut down the indicated power supply as a result of  
n:  
failure or facility power loss or voltage fluctuation.  
Action:  
Confirm operation of facility power. If subsequent power loss events occur, replace the  
failed power supply. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk and  
failed power supply to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Fan Module Events (300 through 399)  
Event Code: 300  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller failed.  
Major.  
Explanatio One cooling fan (out of six) failed or is rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The  
n:  
remaining fans are operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fan.  
Action:  
Replace the indicated fan module.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan number.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 301  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller failed.  
Major.  
Explanatio Two cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The  
n:  
remaining fans are operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.  
Action:  
Replace the indicated fan modules.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
B–16  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Event Codes  
Event Code: 302  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller failed.  
Major.  
Explanatio Three cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The  
n:  
remaining fan is operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.  
Action:  
Replace the indicated fan modules.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 303  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller failed.  
Major.  
Explanatio Four cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The  
n:  
remaining fan is operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.  
Action:  
Replace the indicated fan modules.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 304  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller failed.  
Major.  
Explanatio Five cooling fans (out of six) failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The  
n:  
remaining fan is operational. The amber LED illuminates at the rear of the failed fans.  
Action:  
Replace the indicated fan modules.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 305  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller failed.  
Major.  
Explanatio All six cooling fans failed or are rotating at insufficient angular velocity. The amber LED  
n:  
illuminates at the rear of the fan modules.  
Action:  
Replace the fans  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the failed fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
B–18  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 310  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller recovered.  
Informational.  
Explanatio One cooling fan (out of six) recovered or the associated fan module was replaced. All  
n:  
fans are operational.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan number.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 311  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller recovered.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Two cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced. All  
n:  
fans are operational.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
Indicator  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 312  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller recovered.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Three cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced.  
n:  
All fans are operational.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 313  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller recovered.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Four cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced.  
n:  
All fans are operational.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–20  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 313  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller recovered.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Five cooling fans (out of six) recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced. All  
n:  
fans are operational.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 315  
Message:  
Severity:  
Cooling fan propeller recovered.  
Informational.  
Explanatio All cooling fans recovered or the associated fan modules were replaced. All fans are  
n:  
operational.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
The first byte of event data (byte 0) specifies the recovered fan numbers.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
CTP2 Card Events (400 through 499)  
NOTE: The term CTP card refers to the main circuit board of the Edge Switch 2/16, not to a  
separate card that contains the CTP. The CTP is an integral part of the main circuit board.  
Event Code: 400  
Message:  
Severity:  
Power-up diagnostics failure.  
Major.  
Explanatio Power-on self tests (POSTs) detected a faulty field-replaceable unit (FRU) as indicated  
n:  
by the event data.  
Action:  
Replace the failed FRU with a functional FRU. Perform the data collection procedure  
and return the Zip disk and faulty FRU to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = FRU code as follows: 01 = backplane, 02 = CTP2 card, 03 = SBAR, 05 = fan  
module, 06 = power supply, and 08 through 0F = UPM cards.  
Byte 1 = FRU slot number.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 410  
Message:  
Severity:  
CTP card reset.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The CTP card reset after a switch power-on, hardware IML, or software IPL. An IPL can  
n:  
be user-initiated at the switch- Product Manager application, or occur automatically after  
a firmware fault (event code 411). The event data indicates the type of reset.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = reset type as follows: 00 = power-on or single CTP2 card hot-insert, 02 = IML,  
04 = IPL,  
08 = reset by other CTP2 card, 40 = partition switch, or 80 = dual CTP2 card hot-insert.  
B–22  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Event Codes  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 411  
Message:  
Severity:  
Firmware fault.  
Major.  
Explanatio Firmware executing on the CTP card encountered an unexpected operating condition  
n:  
and dumped the operating state to FLASH memory for retrieval and analysis. The dump  
file is automatically transferred from the switch to the HAFM Server, where it is stored for  
retrieval through the data collection procedure.  
All Fibre Channel port connections reset after the fault and subsequent IPL. Attached  
devices must login to the switch to resume operations.  
Action:  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
Bytes 0 through 3 = fault identifier, least significant byte first.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 421  
Message:  
Severity:  
Firmware download complete.  
Informational.  
Explanatio A switch firmware version was downloaded from the HAFM Server or embedded web  
n:  
server. The event data indicates the firmware version in hexadecimal format xx.yy.zz  
bbbb, where xx is the release level, yy is the maintenance level, zz is the interim  
release level, and bbbb is the build ID.  
Action:  
No action required.  
B–24  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event  
Data:  
Bytes 0 and 1 = ASCII pair indicating release level (30 31 indicates release 01).  
Byte 2 = ASCII value for a period (2E).  
Bytes 3 and 4 = ASCII pair indicating maintenance level (30 34 indicates maintenance  
release 04).  
Byte 5 = ASCII value for a period (2E).  
Bytes 6 and 7 = ASCII pair indicating interim release level (30 30 indicates interim  
release 00).  
Byte 8 = ASCII value for a period (2E).  
Bytes 9 through 12 = Four ASCII values indicating build ID (30 30 34 38 indicates build  
ID 0048).  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 423  
Message:  
Severity:  
CTP firmware download initiated.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The HAFM server initiated download of a new firmware version to the switch.  
n:  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 430  
Message:  
Severity:  
Excessive Ethernet transmit errors.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Transmit error counters for the CTP card Ethernet adapter (sum of all counters)  
n:  
exceeded a threshold. This does not indicate a CTP failure; it indicates a problem with  
the Ethernet cable, hub, or device on the same Ethernet segment. Event data counters  
are represented in hexadecimal format with the least significant byte first.  
Action:  
Verify the Ethernet cable, hub, and other devices are properly connected and  
operational.  
Event  
Data:  
Bytes 0 through 3 = sum of all transmit errors (total_xmit_error).  
Bytes 4 through 7 = frame count where Ethernet adapter does not detect carrier sense  
at preamble end (loss_of_CRSs_cnt).  
Bytes 8 through 11 = frame count where Ethernet adapter does not detect a collision  
within 64 bit times at transmission end (SQE_error_cnt).  
Bytes 12 through 15 = frame count where Ethernet adapter detects a collision more than  
512 bit times after first preamble bit (out_of_window_cnt). Frame not transmitted.  
Bytes 16 through 19 = frame count where transmission is more than 26 ms  
(jabber_cnt). Frame not transmitted.  
Bytes 20 through 23 = frame count where Ethernet adapter encounters 16 collisions  
while attempting to transmit a frame (16coll_cnt). Frame not transmitted.  
B–26  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 431  
Message:  
Severity:  
Excessive Ethernet receive errors.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Receive error counters for the CTP card Ethernet adapter (sum of all counters)  
n:  
exceeded a threshold. This does not indicate a CTP failure; it indicates a problem with  
the Ethernet cable, hub, or device on the same Ethernet segment. Event data counters  
are represented in hexadecimal format with the least significant byte first.  
Action:  
Verify the Ethernet cable, hub, and other devices are properly connected and  
operational.  
Event  
Data:  
Bytes 0 through 3 = sum of all receive errors (total_recv_error).  
Bytes 4 through 7 = frame count where received frame had from 1 to 7 bits after last  
received full byte (dribble_bits_cnt). CRC error counter updated but frame not  
processed.  
Bytes 8 through 11 = frame count where received frame had bad CRC  
(CRC_error_cnt). Frame not processed.  
Bytes 12 through 15 = frame count received with less than 64 bytes (runt_cnt).  
Broadcast frames count but do not contribute to threshold. Frame not processed.  
Bytes 16 through 19 = frame count received with more than 1518 bytes  
(extra_data_cnt). Broadcast frames count but do not contribute to threshold. Frame not  
processed.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 432  
Message:  
Severity:  
Ethernet adapter reset.  
Minor.  
Explanatio The CTP card Ethernet adapter was reset in response to an internally detected error. A  
n:  
card failure is not indicated. The switch-to-HAFM Server connection terminates, but  
automatically recovers after the reset.  
Action:  
Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk to Hewlett Packard  
support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
Bytes 0 through 3 = reason for adapter reset, least significant byte first  
(reset_error_type) 1 = completion notification for timed-out frame transmission.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 433  
Message:  
Severity:  
Non-recoverable Ethernet fault.  
Major.  
Explanatio A non-recoverable error was detected on the CTP card Ethernet adapter and the LAN  
n:  
connection to the HAFM Server terminated. All Fibre Channel switching functions  
remain unaffected. Because Ethernet communication is lost, no failure indication is  
externally reported.  
Action:  
Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk  
and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
Bytes 0 through 3 = LAN error type, where 01 = hard failure and 04 = registered fault.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = LAN error subtype.  
Bytes 8 through 11 = fault identifier.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
B–28  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 440  
Message:  
Severity:  
Embedded port hardware failed.  
Major.  
Explanatio The embedded port hardware detected a fatal CTP error.  
n:  
Action:  
Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk  
and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = CTP2 slot position (00 or 01).  
Byte 1 = engineering reason code  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 442  
Message:  
Severity:  
Embedded port anomaly detected.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The CTP detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the embedded  
n:  
port.  
Action:  
No action required. An additional event code is generated if this incident exceeds an  
error threshold or results in a port failure.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = port number.  
Byte 1 = engineering reason code.port.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1.  
Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.  
Byte 12 = detecting port.  
Byte 13 = connected port.  
Byte 14 = SBAR.  
Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.  
Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–30  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 460  
Message:  
Severity:  
Management request out of range.  
Informational  
Explanatio This event occurs when requests passed from the managing tool (generally HAFM) to  
n:  
the switch do not meet data boundary specifications. This event is most likely to be  
triggered if a user attempt to activate a zone set that is larger than the maximum defined  
zone set size.  
Action:  
The switch found request data from the management tool to be larger or smaller than  
expected. The connection to the management tool will be temporarily lost. After the link  
is re-established, verify that all information changed in the managing tool is within the  
specified ranges. For example, verify that the zones and zone members in a zone set  
fall within the limits stated in the user manual. Try sending the request again.  
Event  
Data:  
None  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Port Events (500 through 599)  
NOTE: In the Edge Switch 2/16, ports are not included on separate assemblies (UPM cards),  
therefore are not FRUs. Ports are an integral part of the switch’s main circuit board. UPM card  
events apply to a single port as indicated by byte 13 of event data.  
Event Code: 502  
Message:  
Severity:  
UPM card anomaly detected.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The CTP detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the indicated  
n:  
port.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = UPM slot position (00 through 0F) (not applicable).  
Byte 1 = engineering reason code.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1  
Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.  
Byte 12 = detecting port.  
Byte 13 = connected port.  
Byte 14 = SBAR (not applicable).  
Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.  
Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–32  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Event Codes  
Event Code: 507  
Message:  
Severity:  
Loopback diagnostics port failure.  
Informational.  
Explanatio A loopback diagnostic test detected a Fibre Channel port failure.  
n:  
Action:  
No action required. An event code 506 is generated if this diagnostic failure results in a  
hard port failure.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).  
Byte 1 = engineering reason code.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Bytes 8 through 11 = reason code specific.  
Byte 12 = test type.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 508  
Message:  
Severity:  
Fibre Channel port anomaly detected.  
Informational.  
Explanatio The CTP detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or status of the indicated  
n:  
Fibre Channel port.  
Action:  
No action required. An event code 506 is generated if this anomaly results in a hard port  
failure.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).  
Byte 1 = anomaly reason code.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1.  
Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.  
Byte 12 = detecting port.  
Byte 13 = connected port.  
Byte 14 = SBAR.  
Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.  
Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 510  
Message:  
Severity:  
SFP optical transceiver hot-insertion initiated.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Installation of a small form factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver was initiated with  
n:  
the switch powered on and operational. The event indicates that operational firmware  
detected the presence of the transceiver.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
B–34  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 512  
Message:  
Severity:  
SFP optical transceiver nonfatal error.  
Minor.  
Explanatio Switch firmware detected an SFP optical transceiver non-fatal error.  
n:  
Action:  
Replace the failed transceiver with a functional transceiver of the same type.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).  
Byte 1 = engineering reason code.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
Event Code: 513  
Message:  
Severity:  
SFP optical transceiver hot-removal completed.  
Informational.  
Explanatio A SFP optical transceiver was removed while the switch was powered on and  
n:  
operational.  
Action:  
No action required.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–36  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
Event Code: 514  
Message:  
Severity:  
SFP optical transceiver failure.  
Major.  
Explanatio A SFP optical transceiver failed. The amber LED corresponding to the port illuminates to  
n:  
indicate the failure. Other ports remain operational if their LEDs are extinguished.  
Action:  
Replace the failed transceiver with a functional transceiver of the same type.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = port number (00 through 63).  
Byte 1 = engineering reason code.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Codes  
SBAR Events (600 through 699)  
NOTE: In the Edge Switch 2/16, the SBAR is not a separate assembly, therefore not a FRU. It  
is an integral part of the switch’s main circuit board. SBAR failure requires replacement of the  
entire switch.  
Event Code: 602  
Message:  
Severity:  
SBAR assembly anomaly detected.  
Informational.  
Explanatio Switch operational firmware detected a deviation in the normal operating mode or  
n:  
operating status of the SBAR.  
Action:  
No action required. An event code 604 is generated if the SBAR fails.  
Event  
Data:  
Byte 0 = SBAR slot position (00 or 01) (not applicable).  
Byte 1 = anomaly reason code.  
Bytes 4 through 7 = elapsed millisecond tick count.  
Bytes 8 and 9 = high-availability error callout #1.  
Bytes 10 and 11 = high-availability error callout #2.  
Byte 12 = detecting port.  
Byte 13 = connected port.  
Byte 14 = participating SBAR assembly (not applicable).  
Bytes 16 and 17 = high-availability error callout #3.  
Bytes 18 and 19 = high-availability error callout #4.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
B–38  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Event Codes  
Thermal Events (800 through 899)  
Event Code: 810  
Message:  
Severity:  
High temperature warning (CTP card thermal sensor).  
Major.  
Explanatio The thermal sensor associated with a CTP card indicates the warm temperature  
n:  
threshold was reached or exceeded.  
Action:  
Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk  
and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
Indicator  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 811  
Message:  
Severity:  
Critically hot temperature warning (CTP card thermal sensor).  
Major.  
Explanatio The thermal sensor associated with a CTP card indicates the hot temperature threshold  
n:  
was reached or exceeded.  
Action:  
Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk  
and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Log  
System  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
B–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Event Codes  
Event Code: 812  
CTP card shutdown due to thermal violation.  
Major.  
Message:  
Severity:  
Explanatio A CTP failed and was powered off because of excessive heat. This event follows an  
n:  
indication that the hot temperature threshold was reached or exceeded (event code  
811).  
Action:  
Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk  
and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
4
Event Code: 850  
Message:  
Severity:  
System shutdown due to CTP card thermal violations.  
Severe.  
Explanatio The switch powered off because of excessive thermal violations on the CTP card.  
n:  
Action:  
Replace the failed switch. Perform the data collection procedure and return the Zip disk  
and faulty switch to Hewlett Packard support personnel.  
Event  
Data:  
No supplementary data included with this event.  
Distributio  
n:  
Switch  
HAFM Server  
Host  
EWS  
Event  
Log  
System  
Error  
LED  
Event  
Log  
E-Mail  
Call-Hom  
e
Sense  
Info  
Link  
Incident  
4
4
4
4
4
B–40  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
This glossary defines terms used in this manual or related to this product and is not a  
comprehensive glossary of computer terms.  
NUMERICS  
8B/10B  
A data encoding scheme developed by IBM, translating byte-wide data to an encoded 10-bit  
format.  
10BaseT  
An implementation of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Ethernet  
standard on 24-gauge unshielded twisted-pair wiring, a baseband medium at 10 Mbps.  
100BaseT  
An implementation of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Ethernet  
standard on 24-gauge unshielded twisted-pair wiring, a baseband medium at 100 Mbps.  
A
AC  
See alternating current.  
access  
The ability and means necessary to store data in, to retrieve data from, to transfer data into, to  
communicate with, or to make use of any resource of a storage device, a system, or area such  
as random access memory (RAM) or a register.  
A list of all devices that can access other devices across the network and the permissions  
associated with that access. See also persistent binding; zoning.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
access time  
The amount of time, including seek time, latency, and controller time, necessary for a storage  
device to retrieve information.  
In S/390 mode, the director or switch configuration that is determined by the status of the  
active field-replaceable unit  
Active FRU. A FRU that is currently operating as the active, and not the backup FRU. See also  
backup field-replaceable unit.  
active FRU  
See active field-replaceable unit.  
active port address matrix  
In S/390 mode, an active port address matrix is the port address matrix that is currently active  
or operational on an attached director or switch. See also connectivity capability.  
active zone set  
A single zone set that is active in a multiswitch fabric and is created when a specific zone set is  
enabled. This zone set is compiled by checking for undefined zones or aliases. See also zone;  
zone set.  
address  
(1) To refer to a device or an item of data by its address (A, I). (2) The location in a computer  
where data is stored. (3) In data communication, the unique code assigned to each device or  
workstation connected to a network. (4) The identifier of a location, source, or destination (D).  
address name  
Synonym for port name.  
agent  
Software that processes queries on behalf of an application and returns replies.  
alarm  
(1) A notification of an abnormal condition within a system that provides an indication of the  
location or nature of the abnormality to either a local or remote alarm indicator. (2) A simple  
network management protocol (SNMP) message notifying an operator of a network or device  
problem.  
alert panel  
This panel, located below the navigation control panel, displays an alert symbol that indicates  
the current state of the switch.  
alias  
A nickname representing a world-wide name.  
Glossary–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
allowed connection  
In S/390 mode, in a director or switch, the attribute that when set, establishes dynamic  
connectivity capability. Contrast with blocked connection. See connectivity attribute. See also  
dynamic connectivity; unblocked connection.  
allowed port connection  
In S/390 mode, this attribute establishes dynamic connectivity capability.  
alternating current  
AC. Electric current that reverses direction at regular sinusoidal intervals (D). Contrast with  
direct current.  
American National Standard Code for Information Interchange  
ASCII. A standard character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters (8-bit including parity  
check) used for information exchange between systems and equipment (D).  
ANSI. A national organization consisting of producers, consumers, and general interest groups  
that establishes procedures by which accredited organizations create and maintain industry  
standards in the United States (A).  
ANSI  
See American National Standards Institute.  
API  
See application program interface.  
application  
(1) The use to which a data processing system is put, for example, a payroll application, an  
airline reservation application, or a network application. (2) A collection of software  
components used to perform specific types of work on a computer (D).  
application client  
The source object of the small computer system interface (SCSI) commands and destination  
for the command responses.  
application program  
(1) A program that is specific to the solution of an application problem. Synonymous with  
application software. (2) A program written for or by a user that applies to the user's work,  
such as a program that does inventory control or payroll. (3) A program used to connect and  
communicate with stations in a network, enabling users to perform application-oriented  
activities (I).  
API. A set of programming functions and routines that provides access between protocol  
layers, such as between an application and network services.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
application-specific integrated circuit  
ASIC. An asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) local area network/ wide area network  
(LAN/WAN) circuit using cell relay transport technology. ASICs are designed for a specific  
application or purpose, such as implementing the lower-layer Fibre Channel protocol (FC-0).  
They are particularly suited to sending video and audio information, as well as text. ASICs  
differ from general-purpose devices such as memory chips or microprocessors.  
archive  
(1) To copy files to a long-term storage medium for backup. (2) Removing data, usually old or  
system hard disk space.  
area  
The second byte of the node port (N_Port) identifier.  
ASCII  
See American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.  
ASIC  
See application-specific integrated circuit.  
attribute  
In S/390 mode, the connection status of the address on a configuration matrix: allowed,  
blocked, or prohibited.  
Audit Log  
Log summarizing actions (audit trail) made by the user. There are two types of Audit Logs: the  
director or switch Audit Log, and the HAFM Audit Log.  
(1) Director or switch Audit Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application that  
provides a history of all configuration changes made to an individual director or switch from  
the respective Product Manager application, a simple network management protocol (SNMP)  
management workstation, a Fibre Connection (FICON) or open systems host, or the  
maintenance port. This information is useful for administrators and users. Contrast with  
HAFM Audit Log. See also Event Log; Hardware Log; Link Incident Log; Threshold Alert  
Log.  
(2) See HAFM Audit Log.  
availability  
The accessibility of a computer system or network resource.  
Glossary–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
B
b
See bit.  
B
See byte.  
backbone  
Cable on which two or more stations or networks may be attached, typically used to link  
computer networks at one site with those at another. Smaller branch networks are sometimes  
called ribs.  
backplane  
The backplane provides direct current (DC) power distribution and connections for all logic  
cards.  
Backup FRU. When an active FRU fails, an identical backup FRU takes over operation  
automatically (failover) to maintain director or switch and Fibre Channel link operation. See  
also active field-replaceable unit.  
backup FRU  
See backup field-replaceable unit.  
bandwidth  
(1) The amount of data that can be sent over a given circuit. (2) A measure of how fast a  
network can move information, usually measured in Hertz (Hz).  
baud  
The unit of signaling speed, expressed as the maximum number of times per second the signal  
can change the state of the transmission line or other medium. The units of baud are seconds to  
the negative 1 power. Note: With Fibre Channel scheme, a signal event represents a single  
transmission bit.  
BB_Credit  
See buffer-to-buffer credit.  
beaconing  
Use of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on ports, port cards, field-replaceable units (FRUs), and  
switches to aid in the fault-isolation process. When enabled, active beaconing will cause LEDs  
to flash in order for the user to locate field-replaceable units (FRU’s), switches, or directors in  
ber  
See bit error rate.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
bezel  
A removable panel that covers empty drive bays and port cards.  
bidirectional  
In Fibre Channel protocol, the capability to simultaneously communicate at maximum speeds  
in both directions over a link.  
bit  
Abbreviated as b. (1) Binary digit, the smallest unit of data in computing, with a value of zero  
or one (D). (2) A bit is the basic data unit of all digital computers. It is usually part of a data  
byte or data word; however, a single bit can be used to control or read logic ON/OFF  
functions. (3) A bit is a single digit in a binary number. Bits are the basic unit of information  
capacity on a computer storage device. Eight bits equals one byte.  
bit density  
Expressed as bits per inch (bpi), the number of bits that can be written on one inch of track on  
a disk surface.  
bit error rate  
Abbreviated as ber. Ratio of received bits that contain errors to total of all bits transmitted.  
bits per inch  
Abbreviated as bpi. Indicates the density of information on a hard drive.  
blocked connection  
In S/390 mode, in a director or switch, the attribute that, when set, removes the  
communication capability of a specific port. A blocked address is disabled so that no other  
address can be connected to it. A blocked attribute supersedes a dedicated or prohibited  
attribute on the same address. Contrast with allowed connection; unblocked connection. See  
connectivity attribute. See also dynamic connection; dynamic connectivity.  
blocked port  
In a director or switch, the attribute that when set, removes the communication capability of a  
specific port. A blocked port continuously transmits the offline sequence.  
boot  
(1) To start or restart a computer. (2) Loading the operating system.  
bpi  
See bits per inch.  
B_Port  
See bridge port.  
bps  
Bits per second.  
Glossary–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
Bps  
Bytes per second.  
bridge  
(1) An attaching device that connects two local area network (LAN) segments to allow the  
transfer of information from one LAN segment to the other. A bridge can connect the LAN  
segments directly by network adapters and software in a single device, or can connect network  
adapters in two devices through software and use of a telecommunication link between the two  
adapters. (2) A functional unit that connects two LANs that use the same logical link control  
protocol, but may use different media access control protocols (T). Contrast with router. (3) A  
device that connects and passes packets between two network segments that use the same  
communications protocol.  
B_Port. (1) In Fibre Channel protocol, a fabric inter-element port used to connect bridge  
devices with E_Ports on a switch. B_Ports provide a subset of E_Port functionality. (2) A term  
for a physical interface between the fabric (switch) and a bridge device. The interface is  
identical to an expansion port (E_Port), but it does not participate in full expansion port  
protocols. As such, it does not assign domain IDs or participate in routing protocol. See also  
expansion port; fabric port; generic port; node port; segmented expansion port.  
British thermal unit  
Btu. The quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of one pound of water by one  
degree Fahrenheit (D).  
broadband  
Large bandwidth communications channel capable of multiple, parallel high-speed  
transmissions.  
broadcast  
In Fibre Channel protocol, to send a transmission to all node ports (N_Ports) on a fabric. See  
broadcast frame  
In Fibre Channel protocol, a frame whose destination address specifies all node ports  
(N_Ports) in the fabric. See also broadcast.  
Btu  
See British thermal unit.  
buffer  
Storage area for data in transit. Buffers compensate for differences in processing speeds  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
buffer-to-buffer credit  
BB_Credit. (1) The maximum number of receive buffers allocated to a transmitting node port  
(N_Port) or fabric port (F_Port). Credit represents the maximum number of outstanding  
frames that can be transmitted by that N_Port or F_Port without causing a buffer overrun  
condition at the receiver. (2) The maximum number of frames a port can transmit without  
receiving a receive ready signal from the receiving device. BB_Credit can be adjustable to  
provide different levels of compensation.  
bypassed port  
If a port is bypassed, all serial channel signals route past the port. A device attached to the port  
cannot communicate with other devices in the loop.  
byte  
Abbreviated as B. A byte generally equals eight bits, although a byte can equal from four to  
ten bits. A byte can also be called an octet See also octet.  
C
call-home  
Product feature which enables the HAFM server to automatically contact a support center and  
report system problems. The support center server accepts calls from the HAFM server, logs  
reported events, and can notify one or more support center representatives.  
cascade  
Linking two or more Fibre Channel switches to form a larger switch or fabric. The switched  
link through fiber cables attached between one or more expansion ports (E_Ports). See also  
expansion port.  
CBY  
Channel operations running in byte mode. This occurs when a channel is attached to a  
converter and specifies the I/O operation mode for the channel path under the I/O  
configuration program (IOCP) channel path identifier (CHPID) statement ‘Type’ parameter.  
Contrast with CVC.  
cell  
In S/390 mode, in a port address matrix, a cell is the intersection point between a horizontal  
port address and a vertical port address. A selected cell is indicated by the cell cursor.  
chained  
Two directors or switches that are physically attached.  
Glossary–8  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
channel  
(1) A system element that controls one channel path, and whose mode of operation depends on  
the type of hardware attached. Each channel controls an I/O interface between the channel  
control element and the attached control units (D). (2) Point-to-point link that transports data  
from one point to the other. (3) A connection or socket on the motherboard to controller card.  
A motherboard may have only one or two channels (primary and secondary). If a motherboard  
has only one channel, it may be necessary to add a controller card to create a secondary  
channel.  
channel-attached  
(1) Pertaining to direct attachment of devices by data I/O channels to a computer. (2)  
Pertaining to devices attached to a control unit by cables, not telecommunication lines (D).  
Synonymous with local.  
channel wrap test  
A diagnostic procedure that checks S/390 host-to-director or host-to-switch connectivity by  
returning the output of the host as input. The test is host-initiated and transmits Fibre Channel  
frames to a director or switch port. A director or switch port enabled for channel wrapping  
echoes the frame back to the host.  
Class 2 Fibre Channel service  
Provides a connectionless (not dedicated) service with notification of delivery or nondelivery  
between two node ports (N_Ports).  
Class 3 Fibre Channel service  
Provides a connectionless (not dedicated) service without notification of delivery or  
nondelivery between two node ports (N_Ports). Synonymous with datagram.  
Class F Fibre Channel service  
Used by switches to communicate across interswitch links (ISLs) to configure, control, and  
coordinate a multiswitch fabric.  
Class of Fibre Channel service  
Defines the level of connection dedication, acknowledgment, and other characteristics of a  
connection.  
command  
(1) A character string from an external source to a system that represents a request for system  
action. (2) A request from a terminal to perform an operation or execute a program. (3) A  
value sent through an I/O interface from a channel to a control unit that specifies the operation  
to be performed (D).  
The communications tray is a sliding tray located in the middle of the Fabricenter cabinet. The  
communications tray holds the laptop personal computer (PC), zip drive, and zip drive power  
supply.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
community name (SNMP)  
A name that represents an simple network management protocol (SNMP) community that the  
agent software recognizes as a valid source for SNMP requests. A product recognizes a  
management station as a valid recipient for trap information when the station’s community  
names are configured.  
community profile  
Information that specifies which management objects are available to what management  
domain or simple network management protocol (SNMP) community name.  
community (SNMP)  
A relationship between an simple network management protocol (SNMP) agent and a set of  
SNMP managers that defines authentication, access control, and proxy characteristics.  
component  
(1) Hardware or software that is part of a functional unit. (2) A functional part of an operating  
system; for example, the scheduler or supervisor (D).  
concurrent firmware upgrade  
Firmware is upgraded without disrupting switch operation.  
concurrent maintenance  
Ability to perform maintenance tasks, such as removal or replacement of field-replaceable  
units (FRUs), while a hardware product is operating.  
configuration data  
The collection of data that results from configuring product and system operating parameters.  
For example, configuring operating parameters, simple network management protocol  
(SNMP) agent, zoning configurations, and port configurations through the Product Manager  
application, results in a collection of configuration data. Configuration data includes:  
identification data, port configuration data, operating parameters, simple network management  
protocol (SNMP) configuration, and zoning configuration. A configuration backup file is  
required to restore configuration data if the control processor (CTP) card in a nonredundant  
director 2/64 is removed and replaced.  
connectionless  
Nondedicated link. Typically used to describe a link between nodes which allows the switch to  
forward Class 2 or Class 3 frames as resources (ports) allow. Contrast this with the dedicated  
bandwidth that is required in a Class 1 Fibre Channel Service (FC-1) point-to-point link.  
connectivity  
The ability of devices to link together.  
Glossary–10  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
connectivity attribute  
In S/390 mode, the characteristic that determines port address status for the director or switch.  
See allowed connection; blocked connection; connectivity capability; connectivity control;  
connectivity capability  
(1) The capability that allows attachment of a device to a system without requiring physical  
reconfiguration of either the device or the interconnections. (2) The director or switch  
capability that allows logical manipulation of link connections to provide physical device  
control.  
connectivity control  
In S/390 mode, in a director or switch, the method used to change port address connectivity  
attributes and determine the communication capability of the link attached to the port (D). See  
also active port address matrix; connectivity attribute; connectivity capability.  
connector  
Synonym for optical fiber connector.  
console  
See personal computer; server.  
control processor card  
CTP card. Circuit card that contains the director or switch microprocessor. The CTP card also  
initializes hardware components of the system after power-on. The card may contain an RJ-45  
twisted pair connector. In the Edge Switch 2/16 and Edge Switch 2/32, the CTP card is the  
main circuit board of the switch and is not replaceable (not a FRU).  
credit  
See buffer-to-buffer credit.  
CTP card  
See control processor card.  
customer support  
Synonym for technical support.  
CVC  
Channel operations running in block mode. This occurs when a channel is attached to a  
converter. This specifies the I/O operation mode for the channel path under the I/O  
configuration program (IOCP) channel path identifier (CHPID) statement Type parameter.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Glossary  
D
database  
A collection of data with a given structure for accepting, storing, and providing on-demand  
data for multiple users. (T)  
data directory  
Critical information for all managed products (including directors and switches). Information  
stored here includes:  
All configuration data  
All log files  
Firmware library  
Zoning library  
datagram  
Synonym for Class 3 Fibre Channel service.  
dB  
See decibel.  
dBm  
Decibels referenced to one milliwatt. Zero dBm equals one milliwatt, with a logarithmic  
relationship as the value increases (D).  
DC  
See direct current.  
decibel  
Abbreviated as dB. A standard unit used to express gain or loss of optical power, expressed as  
the ratio of input power to output power on a logarithmic basis (D).  
default  
Pertaining to an attribute, value, or option that is assumed by a system when none is explicitly  
specified (D, I).  
default zone  
A zone that contains all attached devices that are not members of a separate active zone.  
destination  
A point or location, such as a processor, director or switch, or server, to which data is  
transmitted (D).  
Glossary–12  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
device  
(1) Mechanical, electrical, or electronic hardware with a specific purpose (D). See also  
managed product.  
(2) See node.  
diagnostics  
(1) The process of investigating the cause or nature of a problem in a product or system. (2)  
Procedures or tests used by computer users and service personnel to diagnose hardware or  
software problems (D).  
dialog box  
A pop-up window in the user interface with informational messages or fields to be modified or  
completed with desired options.  
direct current  
DC. Electric current that continuously flows in one direction (D). Contrast with alternating  
current.  
director  
An intelligent, highly-available, Fibre Channel switch providing any-to-any port connectivity  
between nodes (end devices) on a switched fabric. The director sends data transmissions (data  
frames) between nodes in accordance with the address information present in the frame  
headers of those transmissions.  
diskette  
A thin magnetic disk enclosed in a plastic jacket, which is removable from a computer and is  
used to store and transport data (D).  
diskette drive  
The hardware mechanism by which a computer reads data from and writes data to removable  
diskettes (D).  
DNS name  
Domain name system or domain name service. Host or node name for a device or managed  
product that is translated to an Internet protocol (IP) address through a domain name server.  
domain  
A Fibre Channel term describing the most significant byte in the node port (N_Port) identifier  
for the Fibre Channel device. It is not used in the Fibre Channel small computer system  
interface (FC-SCSI) hardware path ID. It is required to be the same for all SCSI targets  
logically connected to a Fibre Channel adapter.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
domain ID  
Domain identifier. A number that uniquely identifies a switch in a multiswitch fabric. A  
distinct domain ID is automatically allocated to each switch in the fabric by the principal  
switch. The preferred domain ID is the domain ID value that a switch requests from the  
principal switch. If the value has not been allocated to another switch in the fabric, it will be  
granted by the principal switch and will become the requesting switch’s active domain ID. The  
active domain ID is the domain ID that has been assigned by the principal switch and that a  
domain name server  
In TCP/IP, a server program that supplies name-to-address translation by mapping domain  
name to internet addresses. (D)  
DRAM  
See dynamic random access memory.  
drop-down menu  
A menu that appears when a heading in a navigation bar is clicked on with the mouse. The  
objects that appear in the drop-down menus are organize by their headings in the navigation  
bar.  
duplex  
In data communication, pertaining to transmission in which data is sent and received at the  
same time (D). Contrast with half duplex.  
duplex connector  
An optical fiber component that terminates jumper cable fibers in one housing and provides  
physical keying for attachment to a duplex receptacle (D).  
duplex receptacle  
duplex connector (D).  
dynamic connection  
A connection between two ports, established or removed by the directors and that, when  
active, appears as one continuous link. See connectivity attribute. See also allowed connection;  
blocked connection; connectivity capability; dynamic connectivity; unblocked connection.  
dynamic connectivity  
The capability that allows connections to be established and removed at any time.  
dynamic random access memory  
DRAM. Random access memory that resides in a cell comprised of a capacitor and transistor.  
DRAM data deteriorates (that is, is dynamic) unless the capacitor is periodically recharged by  
the controlling microprocessor. DRAM is slow, but relatively inexpensive (D). Contrast with  
static random access memory.  
Glossary–14  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
E
EAF  
See enhanced availability feature.  
EDI  
See electronic data interchange.  
E_D_TOV  
See error-detect time-out value.  
EE-PROM  
HAFM Audit Log  
HAFM Audit Log. Log displayed though the HAFM application that provides a history of user  
actions performed at the HAFM server through the HAFM application. This information is  
useful for system administrators and users. See also Audit Log; HAFM Event Log; HAFM  
Product Status Log; HAFM Session Log.  
HAFM Event Log  
events or error conditions recorded by the HAFM Services application. Entries reflect the  
status of the application and managed directors and switches. Information associated with a  
call-home failure is intended for use by maintenance personnel to fault isolate the problem  
(modem failure, no dial tone, etc.), while information provided in all other entries is generally  
intended for use by third-level support personnel to fault isolate more significant problems.  
See also HAFM Audit Log; HAFM Product Status Log; HAFM Session Log; Event Log.  
HAFM application  
HP StorageWorks ha-fabric manager (HAFM) application. (1) Software application that is the  
system management framework providing the user interface for managing Fibre Channel  
connectivity products. (2) The software application that implements the management user  
interface for all managed hardware products. The HAFM application can run both locally on  
the HAFM server and remotely on a user workstation.  
Enterprise Fabric Connectivity Product Status Log. Log displayed though the HAFM  
application that records an entry when the status of a director or switch changes. The log  
reflects the previous status and current status of a managed product, and indicates the instance  
of a Product Manager application that should be opened to investigate a problem. The  
information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification. See  
also HAFM Audit Log; HAFM Event Log; HAFM Session Log.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
HAFM server  
HAFM server. A laptop shipped with the product for the purpose of running the HAFM  
HAFM Session Log  
HAFM Session Log. Log displayed though the HAFM application that records a session (login  
and logout) history for the HAFM server, including the date and time, user name, and network  
address of each session. This information is useful for system administrators and users. See  
also HAFM Audit Log; HAFM Event Log; HAFM Product Status Log.  
EIA  
See Electronic Industries Association.  
electromagnetic interference  
EMI. Undesirable electromagnetic emissions generated by solar activity, lightning, and  
electronic devices. The emissions interfere with or degrade the performance of another  
electronic device (D).  
electronically erasable programmable read-only memory  
A memory chip that can be loaded with data and later erased and loaded with update  
information.  
electronic data interchange  
bills of lading, between trading partners.  
Electronic Industries Association  
EIA. The governing body that publishes recommended standards for physical devices and  
associated interfaces. For example, RS-232 is the EIA standard that defines computer serial  
port connectivity (D). See also Telecommunications Industry Association.  
electronic mail  
E-mail. Any communications service that permits the electronic transmission and storage of  
electrostatic discharge  
ESD. The undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage or degrade electronic  
circuitry (D).  
e-mail  
See electronic mail.  
Glossary–16  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Glossary  
embedded web server interface  
The interface provides a graphical user interface (GUI) similar to the Product Manager  
application, and supports director or switch configuration, statistics monitoring, and basic  
operations. With director or switch firmware installed, administrators or operators with a  
browser-capable personal computer (PC) and an Internet connection can monitor and manage  
the director or switch through an embedded web server interface.  
embedded web server interface timeout  
If the embedded web server interface is running but no user activity occurs, (such as viewing  
different pages, refreshing, or reconfiguring information), the application times out after 30  
minutes. The user must log in again. A login dialog box displays if the user attempts to access  
embedded web server interface window  
The window for the embedded web server interface. The window is divided into two separate  
panels: the navigation panel on the left, and the main panel on the right.  
EMI  
See electromagnetic interference.  
enhanced availability feature  
EAF. A backup field-replaceable unit (backup FRU) that is ordered and installed to provide  
redundancy and reduce disruption in case of failure.  
enterprise  
The entire storage system. The series of computers employed largely in high-volume and  
multi-user environments such as servers or networking applications; may include single-user  
workstations required in demanding design, engineering and audio/visual applications.  
E_Port  
See expansion port.  
error-detect time-out value  
E_D_TOV. The time the switch waits for an expected response before declaring an error  
condition.  
error log  
See Event Log.  
error message  
Indication that an error has been detected (D).  
ESD  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
Ethernet  
A widely implemented local area network (LAN) protocol that uses a bus or star topology and  
serves as the basis for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.3  
standard, which specifies the physical and software layers.  
Ethernet hub  
A device used to connect the HAFM server and the directors it manages.  
event code  
A three-digit number that specifies the exact event that occurred. This code provides  
information on system failures, such as hardware failures, failure locations, or general  
information on normal system events.  
Event Log  
Record of significant events that have occurred on the director or switch (director or switch  
Event Log) or through the HAFM Services application (HAFM Event Log). There are two  
Event Logs: director or switch Event Log, and HAFM Event Log.  
provides a history of events for an individual director or switch, such as system events,  
degraded operation, FRU failures, FRU removals and replacements, port problems, Fibre  
Channel link incidents, and HAFM server-to-product communication problems. All detected  
software and hardware failures are recorded in the Event Log. The information is useful to  
maintenance personnel for fault isolation and repair verification. Contrast with HAFM Event  
Log. See also Audit Log; Hardware Log; Link Incident Log; Threshold Alert Log.  
(2) See HAFM Event Log.  
exchange  
more nonconcurrent sequences.  
expansion port  
E_Port. Physical interface on a Fibre Channel switch within a fabric, that attaches to an E_Port  
on another Fibre Channel switch through an interswitch link (ISL) to form a multiswitch  
fabric. See also bridge port; fabric port; generic port; node port; segmented expansion port.  
Glossary–18  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
F
fabric  
Entity that interconnects node ports (N_Ports) and is capable of routing (switching) Fibre  
Channel frames, using the destination ID information in the Fibre Channel frame header  
accompanying the frames. A switch is the smallest entity that can function as a complete  
switched fabric topology.  
fabric element  
Any active director, switch, or node in a switched fabric.  
fabric login  
The process by which node ports (N_Ports) establish their operating parameters. During fabric  
login, the presence or absence of a fabric is determined, and paths to other N_Ports are  
mapped. Specific operating characteristics for each port, such as buffer-to-buffer credit  
(BB_Credit) and data frame size, are also established.  
fabric login command  
FLOGI. The command that establishes the initial operating parameters and topology for a  
fabric. The command is accepted by a fabric port (F_Port).  
fabric mode  
See interoperability mode.  
fabric port  
F_Port. Physical interface within the fabric that connects to a node port (N_Port) through a  
point-to-point full duplex connection. See also bridge port; expansion port; generic port; node  
port; segmented expansion port.  
fabric services  
The services that implement the various Fibre Channel protocol services that are described in  
the standards. These services include the fabric controller (login server), name server, and  
management server.  
fabric switches  
A device which allows the communication between multiple devices using Fibre Channel  
protocols. A fabric switch enables the sharing bandwidth and end-nodes using basic  
failover  
Automatic and nondisruptive transition of functions from an active field-replaceable unit  
(FRU) that has failed to a backup FRU.  
FC  
See Fibre Channel.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
FC-0  
The Fibre Channel layer that describes the physical link between two ports, including the  
transmission media, transmitter and receiver circuitry, and interfaces (D). This consists of a  
pair of either optical fiber or electrical cables (link media) along with transceiver circuitry  
which work together to convert a stream of bits at one end of the link to a stream of bits at the  
other end.  
FC-1  
Middle layer of the Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface (FC-PH) standard, defining  
the 8B/10B encoding/decoding and transmission protocol.  
FC-2  
The Fibre Channel layer that specifies the signaling protocol, rules, and mechanisms required  
to transfer data blocks. The FC-2 layer is very complex and provides different classes of  
service, packetization, sequencing, error detection, segmentation, and reassembly of  
transmitted data (D).  
FC-3  
The Fibre Channel layer that provides a set of services common across multiple node ports  
(N_Ports) of a Fibre Channel node. The services are not commonly used and are essentially  
reserved for Fibre Channel architecture expansion (D).  
FC-4  
The Fibre Channel layer that provides mapping of Fibre Channel capabilities to upper level  
protocols (ULP), including Internet protocol (IP) and small computer system interface (SCSI)  
(D).  
FCA  
See Fibre Channel Association.  
FC adapter  
Fibre Channel adapter. See host bus adapter.  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission.  
FCC-IOC  
See Fibre Channel I/O controller.  
FCFE  
See Fibre Channel fabric element.  
FCFE-MIB  
See Fibre Channel fabric element management information base.  
FCIA  
See Fibre Channel Industry Association.  
Glossary–20  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
FC IP  
See Fibre Channel IP address.  
FCMGMT  
See Fibre Channel management framework integration.  
FC-PH  
See Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface.  
feature key  
A unique key to enable additional product features. This key is entered into the Configure  
Feature Key dialog box in the Product Manager application to activate optional hardware and  
software features. Upon purchasing a new feature, Hewlett Packard will provide the feature  
key to the customer.  
fiber  
The fiber-optic cable made from thin strands of glass through which data in the form of light  
pulses is transmitted. It is used for high-speed transmissions over medium (200 m) to long (10  
km) distances.  
fiber-optic cable  
Synonym for optical cable.  
fiber optics  
The branch of optical technology concerned with the transmission of radiant power through  
fibers of transparent materials such as glass, fused silica, or plastic (E). Telecommunication  
applications of fiber optics use optical fibers. A single fiber or a nonspatially aligned fiber  
bundle is used for each information channel. Such fibers are often called optical fibers to  
differentiate them from fibers that are used in noncommunication applications (D).  
fibre  
A generic Fibre Channel term used to cover all transmission media types specified in the Fibre  
Channel Physical Layer (FC-PH) standard such as optical fiber, copper twisted pair, and  
copper coaxial cable.  
Fibre Channel  
FC. Integrated set of standards recognized by American National Standards Institute (ANSI)  
which defines specific protocols for flexible information transfer. Logically, a point-to-point  
serial data channel, structured for high performance.  
Fibre Channel adapter  
FC adapter. See host bus adapter.  
A 3-byte node port (N_Port) identifier which is unique within the address domain of a fabric.  
Each port may choose its own identifier, or the identifier may be assigned automatically  
during fabric login.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
Fibre Channel Association  
FCA. The FCA is a non-profit corporation consisting of over 150 members throughout the  
world. Its mission is to nurture and help develop the broadest market for Fibre Channel  
products through market development, education, standards monitoring, and fostering  
interoperability among members’ products.  
Fibre Channel fabric element  
FCFE. Any device linked to a fabric.  
Fibre Channel fabric element management information base  
FCFE-MIB. A table of variables available to network management stations and resident on a  
switch or director. Through the simple network management protocol (SNMP) these pointers  
can be manipulates to monitor, control, and configure the switch or director.  
Fibre Channel Industry Association  
FCIA. A corporation consisting of over 100 computer industry-related companies. Its goal is  
to provide marketing support, exhibits, and tradeshows for its member companies. The FCIA  
complements activities of the various standards committees.  
Fibre Channel I/O controller  
FCC-IOC. In a director, the integrated controller on the control processor (CTP) card  
dedicated to the task of managing the embedded Fibre Channel port. In a director or switch,  
the FCC-IOC controls the embedded Fibre Channel port and configures the ports’  
application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).  
Fibre Channel IP address  
FC IP. The default FC IP on a new switch is a temporary number divided by the switch’s  
world-wide name (WWN). The system administrator needs to enter a valid IP address.  
Fibre Channel management framework integration  
FCMGMT. A standard defined by the Fibre Alliance to provide easy management for Fibre  
Channel-based devices such as switches, hubs, and host-bus adapters.  
Fibre Channel physical and signaling interface  
FC-PH. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) document that specifies the FC-0  
(physical signaling), FC-1 (data encoding), and FC-2 (frame construct) layers of the Fibre  
Channel protocol (D).  
Fibre Channel standard  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard that provides a common, efficient data  
transport system that supports multiple protocols. The architecture integrates both channel and  
network technologies, and provides active, intelligent interconnection among devices. All data  
transmission is isolated from the control protocol, allowing use of point-to-point, arbitrated  
loop, or switched fabric topologies to meet the needs of an application.  
Glossary–22  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Glossary  
Fibre Connection  
FICON. An IBM set of products and services introduced in 1999 that is based on the Fibre  
Channel Standard. FICON technology uses fiber-optic cables as the data transmission  
medium, and significantly improves I/O performance (including one Gbps bi-directional data  
transfer). FICON is designed to coexist with ESCON™ channels, and FICON-to-ESCON  
control unit connections are supported.  
FICON  
See Fibre Connection.  
FICON Management Server  
An optional feature that can be enabled on the director or switch or switch through the Product  
Manager application. When enabled, host control and management of the director or switch or  
switch is provided through an S/390 Parallel Enterprise or 2/Series Server attached to a  
director or switch or switch port.  
field-replaceable unit  
FRU. Assembly removed and replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails  
(D). See active field-replaceable unit.  
file server  
A computer that stores data centrally for network users and manages access to that data.  
file transfer protocol  
FTP. A transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) -based client/server protocol  
used to transfer files to and from a remote host. Does not perform any conversion or  
translation.  
firewall  
A networking device that blocks unauthorized access to all or parts of a network.  
firewall zoning  
Hardware enforced access between F_Ports enforced at the source port. The hardware verifies  
the destination port against the zone defined for the source port.  
firmware  
Embedded program code that resides and runs on, for example, directors, switches, and hubs.  
Reusable nonvolatile memory that is organized as segments for writing, and as bytes or words  
for reading. FLASH memory is faster than read-only memory, but slower than random access  
memory (D).  
FLOGI  
See fabric login command.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
F_Port  
See fabric port.  
frame  
A variable-length packet of data that is transmitted in frame relay technology.  
FRU  
See field-replaceable unit.  
FTP  
See file transfer protocol.  
full-duplex  
The capability to transmit in two directions simultaneously.  
G
gateway address  
(1) In transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP), a device that connects two  
systems that use the same or different protocols. (2) In TCP/IP, the address of a router to which  
a device sends frames destined for addresses not on the same physical network (for example,  
not on the same Ethernet) as the sender. The hexadecimal format for the gateway address is  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX.  
Gb  
See gigabit.  
GB  
See gigabyte.  
Gbps  
Acronym for gigabits per second.  
generic port  
G_Port. Physical interface on a director or switch that can function either as a fabric port  
(F_Port) or an expansion port (E_Port), depending on the port type to which it connects. See  
also bridge port; expansion port; fabric port; node port; segmented expansion port.  
GHz  
See gigahertz.  
gigabit  
Gb. A unit of measure for data storage, equal to approximately 134,217,728 bytes.  
Approximately one eighth of a gigabyte.  
Glossary–24  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
gigabyte  
GB. A unit of measure for data storage, equal to 1,073,741,824 bytes. Generally approximated  
as one billion bytes (D).  
gigahertz  
GHz. One billion cycles per second (Hertz) (D).  
G_Port  
See generic port.  
graphical user interface  
GUI. A visually oriented interface where the user interacts with representations of real-world  
objects displayed on the computer screen. Interactions with such objects produce actions that  
are intuitive to the user (D).  
ground  
GSM card  
A generic port (G_Port) module card containing shortwave laser ports for multimode  
fiber-optic cables.  
GUI  
See graphical user interface.  
H
half duplex  
The capacity to transmit in two directions, but not simultaneously.  
hardware  
Physical equipment (director, switch, or personal computer) as opposed to computer programs  
or software.  
Hardware Log  
Director or switch Hardware Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application  
that provides a history of FRU removals and replacements (insertions) for an individual  
director or switch. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for fault isolation and  
repair verification. See also Audit Log; Event Log; Link Incident Log; Threshold Alert Log.  
HBA  
See host bus adapter.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
Hertz  
Hz. A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.  
heterogeneous fabric  
A fabric containing open-fabric-compliant products from various vendors. Contrast with  
homogeneous fabric.  
hexadecimal  
A numbering system with base of sixteen; valid numbers use the digits 0 through 9 and  
characters A through F, where A represents 10 and F represents 15 (D).  
high availability  
A performance feature characterized by hardware component redundancy and concurrent  
maintenance. High-availability systems maximize system uptime while providing superior  
reliability, availability, and serviceability.  
homogeneous fabric  
A fabric consisting of only one vendor’s products. Contrast with heterogeneous fabric.  
hop  
(1) Data transfer from one node to another node. (2) Describes the number of switches that  
handle a data frame from its origination point through it’s destination point.  
hop count  
The number of hops a unit of information traverses in a fabric.  
host bus adapter  
HBA. Logic card that provides a link between the server and storage subsystem, and that  
integrates the operating systems and I/O protocols to ensure interoperability.  
host processor  
(1) A processor that controls all or part of a user application network (T). (2) In a network, the  
processing unit in which resides the access method for the network (D).  
See concurrent maintenance.  
hot spare  
See field-replaceable unit.  
hot swap  
See concurrent maintenance.  
hot-swapping  
See concurrent maintenance.  
HTTP  
See hypertext transport protocol.  
Glossary–26  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
hub  
(1) In Fibre Channel protocol, a device that connects nodes into a logical loop by using a  
physical star topology. (2) In Ethernet, a device used to connect the HAFM server and the  
directors it manages.  
hyperlink  
A predefined link for jumping from one location to another, within the same computer or  
network site or even to a location at a completely different physical location. Commonly used  
on the world wide web for navigation, reference, and depth where published text will not  
suffice.  
hypertext transport protocol  
HTTP. A simple protocol that allows world wide web pages to be transferred quickly between  
web browsers and servers.  
Hz  
See Hertz.  
I
ID  
identifier  
certain properties of that data element (D, T). (2) A sequence of bits or characters that  
identifies a program, device, or system to another program, device, or system. See also port  
name.  
IEEE  
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.  
IML  
See initial machine load.  
inband management  
Management of the director or switch through Fibre Channel. An interface connection to a  
port card. Contrast with out-of-band management.  
initial machine load  
IML. Hardware reset for all installed control processor (CTP) cards on the director or switch.  
This reset does not affect other hardware. It is initiated by pushing the IML button on a  
director’s or switch’s operating panel.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
initial program load  
IPL. The process of initializing the device and causing the operating system to start. An IPL  
may be initiated through a menu option or a hardware button.  
initial program load configuration  
IPL configuration. In S/390 mode, information stored in a director or switch’s nonvolatile  
memory that contains default configurations. The director or switch loads the file for operation  
when powered on.  
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
IEEE. An organization of engineers and technical professionals that promotes the  
development and application of electronic technology and allied sciences.  
integrated product  
Hardware product that is mounted in the Fabricenter cabinet. For example, any director or  
switch shipped with in the Fabricenter cabinet is an integrated product.  
interface  
(1) A shared boundary between two functional units, defined by functional, signal, or other  
characteristics. The concept includes the specification of the connection of two devices having  
different functions (T). (2) Hardware, software, or both, that link systems, programs, or  
devices (D).  
Internet protocol  
IP. Network layer for the transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) protocol  
used on Ethernet networks. IP provides packet routing, fragmentation, and reassembly through  
the data link layer (D).  
Internet protocol address  
IP address. Unique string of numbers (in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that identifies a device  
on a network.  
interoperability  
Ability to communicate, execute programs, or transfer data between various functional units  
interoperability mode  
Interop mode. An operating mode set through management software that allows products to  
operate in homogeneous or heterogeneous fabrics.  
interop mode  
See interoperability mode.  
interrupt  
A signal sent by a subsystem to the central processing unit (CPU) that signifies a process has  
either completed or could not be completed.  
Glossary–28  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Glossary  
interswitch link  
ISL. Physical expansion port (E_Port) connection between two directors in a fabric.  
ISL hop. See hop.  
IOPS  
Input/output operations per second.  
IP  
See Internet protocol.  
IP address  
See Internet protocol address.  
IPL  
See initial program load.  
IPL configuration  
See initial program load configuration.  
ISL  
See interswitch link.  
ISL hop  
Interswitch link hop. See hop.  
isolated E_Port  
Isolated expansion port. See segmented expansion port.  
isolated expansion port  
Isolated E_Port. See segmented expansion port.  
ITE  
Information technology equipment.  
J
Java  
An object-oriented programming language derived from C++ that produces code that is  
platform independent. Developed by Sun Microsystems designed for distribution and  
distributable applications development. Java applications require a program called the Java  
Virtual Machine (JVM) to execute. JVMs have been developed for many of the mainstream  
platforms and operating systems.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
Jumper cable  
Optical cable that provides physical attachment between two devices or between a device and  
a distribution panel. Contrast with trunk cable. See also optical cable.  
K
Kb  
See kilobit.  
KB  
See kilobyte.  
kilobit  
Kb. A unit of measure for data storage, equaling 1,024 bits, or two to the tenth power. Kilobits  
are generally approximated as being one thousand bits.  
kilobyte  
KB. A unit of measure for data storage, equaling 1,024 bytes, or two to the tenth power.  
Kilobytes are generally approximated as being one thousand bytes.  
L
laser  
Laser is an acronym for light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation. A device that  
produces a very powerful narrow beam of coherent light of a single wavelength by simulating  
the emissions of photons from atoms, molecules, or ions.  
latency  
Amount of time elapsed between receipt of a data transmission at a switch’s incoming fabric  
port (F_Port) from the originating node port (N_Port) to retransmission of that data at the  
switch’s outgoing F_Port to the destination N_Port. The amount of time it takes for data  
transmission to pass through a switching device.  
LCD  
Liquid crystal display.  
LED  
See light-emitting diode.  
Glossary–30  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
LED. A semiconductor chip that emits visible or infrared light when electricity passes through  
it. LEDs are used on switch or director field-replaceable units (FRUs) and the front bezel to  
provide visual indications of hardware status or malfunctions.  
LIN  
See link incident.  
link  
Physical connection between two devices on a switched fabric. A link consists of two  
conductors, one used for sending and the other for receiving, thereby providing a duplex  
communication path.  
link incident  
LIN. Interruption to link due to loss of light or other causes. See also link incident alerts.  
link incident alerts  
A user notification, such as a graphic symbol in the Product Manager application Hardware  
View that indicates that a link incident has occurred. See also link incident.  
Link Incident Log  
Director or switch Link Incident Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager application  
that provides a history of Fibre Channel link incidents (with associated port numbers) for an  
individual director or switch. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for isolating  
port problems (particularly expansion port (E_Port) segmentation problems) and repair  
verification. See also Audit Log; Event Log; Hardware Log; Threshold Alert Log.  
LMA  
See loader/monitor area.  
load balancing  
Ability to evenly distribute traffic over multiple interswitch links within a fabric. Load  
balancing on Hewlett Packard directors and switches takes place automatically.  
loader/monitor area  
LMA. Code that resides in the loader/monitor area of the control processor (CTP) card.  
Among other functions, LMA code provides I/O functions available through the maintenance  
port, operator panel, server interface, terminal window command functions, power up  
diagnostics, field-replaceable unit (FRU) power-on hours update, and data read/write control,  
and LMA code/licensed internal code (LIC) download functions (D).  
local  
logical partition  
LPAR. A processor hardware subset defined to support the operation of a system control  
program, and can be used without affecting any of the applications in another partition (D).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Glossary  
logical port address  
In a director or switch, the address used to specify port connectivity parameters and to assign  
link addresses for the attached channels and control units.  
logical switch number  
LSN. A two-digit number used by the I/O configuration program (IOCP) to identify a director  
or switch (D).  
logical unit number  
LUN. In Fibre Channel addressing, a logical unit number is a number assigned to a storage  
device which, in combination with the storage device’s node port’s world-wide name,  
represents a unique identifier for a logical device on a storage area network. Peripherals use  
LUNs to represent addresses. A small computer system interface (SCSI) device’s address can  
have up to eight LUNs.  
login server  
Entity within the Fibre Channel fabric that receives and responds to login requests.  
longwave  
Lasers or light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that emit light with wavelengths around 1300 nm.  
When using single mode (9 nm) fiber, longwave lasers can be used to achieve lengths greater  
than 2 Km.  
loopback plug  
In a fiber optic environment, a type of duplex connector used to wrap the optical output signal  
of a device directly to the optical input. Contrast with protective plug. Synonymous with wrap  
plug.  
loopback test  
Test that checks attachment or control unit circuitry, without checking the mechanism itself, by  
returning the output of the mechanism as input.  
LPAR  
See logical partition.  
LSN  
See logical switch number.  
LUN  
See logical unit number.  
Glossary–32  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
M
MAC address  
See media access control address.  
main panel  
(1) The rightmost frame of the windows in HAFM applications. (2) The rightmost frame of the  
embedded web server interface window. See also navigation panel.  
maintenance analysis procedure  
MAP. A written or online set of procedures that guide maintenance personnel through  
step-by-step instructions for hardware fault isolation, repair, and verification (D).  
maintenance port  
Connector on the director or switch where a PC running an American National Standard Code  
for Information Interchange (ASCII) terminal emulator can be attached or dial-up connection  
made for specialized maintenance support.  
managed product  
Hardware product that can be managed with the HAFM application. Hewlett Packard directors  
and switches are managed products. See also device.  
management information base  
MIB. Related set of software objects (variables) containing information about a managed  
device and accessed via simple network management protocol (SNMP) from a network  
management station.  
A session that exists when a user logs on to the HAFM application. HAFM can support  
multiple concurrent management sessions. The user must specify the network address of the  
HAFM application’s server at logon time.  
MAP  
See maintenance analysis procedure.  
matrix  
See active port address matrix.  
Mb  
Megabit.  
MB  
See megabyte.  
Mbps  
Megabits per second.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
MBps  
Megabytes per second.  
media access control address  
MAC address. Hardware address of a node (device) connected to a network.  
megabyte  
MB. A unit of measure for data storage, equal to 1,048,576 bytes. Generally approximated as  
one million bytes.  
memory  
A device or storage system capable of storing and retrieving data.  
menu  
A list of items displayed on a monitor from which a user can make a selection.  
menu bar  
The menu bar is located across the top of a monitor window. Pull-down menus are displayed  
by clicking on the menu bar option with the mouse, or by pressing Alt with the underlined  
letter of the name for the menu bar option (D).  
MIB  
See management information base.  
mirroring  
The writing of data to pairs of drives in an array, creating two exact copies of the drive  
contents. This procedure provides a backup of data in case of a failure.  
modem  
Modem is an abbreviation for modulator/demodulator. A communication device that converts  
digital computer data to signals and signals to computer data. These signals can be received or  
transmitted by the modem via a phone line or other method of telecommunication.  
ms  
Millisecond.  
multimedia  
A simultaneous presentation of data in more than one form, such as by means of both visual  
and audio.  
multimode optical fiber  
A graded-index or step-index optical fiber that allows more than one mode (light path) to  
propagate. Contrast with singlemode optical fiber.  
multiplexer  
A device that allows two or more signals to be transmitted simultaneously on a single channel.  
Glossary–34  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
multiswitch fabric  
Fibre Channel fabric created by linking more than one director or fabric switching device  
within a fabric.  
N
name server  
(1) In TCP/IP, see domain name server. (2) In Fibre Channel protocol, a server that allows  
node ports (N_Ports) to register information about themselves. This information allows  
N_Ports to discover and learn about each other by sending queries to the name server.  
name server zoning  
Node port (N_Port) access management that allows N_Ports to communicate if and only if  
they belong to a common name server zone.  
NAS  
See network-attached storage.  
navigation panel  
The left side of the embedded web server interface window. Click on words in this panel to  
display menu options. See also main panel.  
network  
An arrangement of hardware, software, nodes, and connecting branches that comprises a data  
communication system. The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) seven-layer  
specification partitions a computer network into independent modules from the lowest  
(physical) layer to the highest (application) layer (D).  
network address  
Name or address that identifies a device on a transmission control protocol/Internet protocol  
(TCP/IP) network. The network address can be either an IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
(composed of four three-digit octets in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) or a domain name (as  
administered on a customer network).  
network-attached storage  
NAS. Storage connected directly to the network, through a processor and its own operating  
system. Lacks the processor power to run centralized, shared applications.  
network interface card  
NIC. An expansion board inserted into a computer so the computer can be connected to a  
network. Most NICs are designed for specific types of networks, protocols, and medias,  
although some can serve multiple networks.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
network management  
The broad subject of managing computer networks. There exists a wide variety of software  
and hardware products that help network system administrators manage a network. Network  
management covers a wide area, including security, performance, and reliability.  
never principal  
The setting that prevents the product from becoming the principal switch for a fabric.  
NIC  
See network interface card.  
nickname  
Alternate name assigned to a world-wide name for a node, director or switch in the fabric.  
node  
to a switched fabric. See also device.  
node port  
N_Port. Physical interface within an end device that can connect to an fabric port (F_Port) on  
a switched fabric or directly to another N_Port (in point-to-point communications). See also  
bridge port; expansion port; fabric port; generic port; segmented expansion port.  
node port identifier  
N_Port ID. In Fibre Channel protocol, a unique address identifier by which an N_Port is  
uniquely known. It consists of a domain (most significant byte), an area, and a port, each 1  
byte long. The N_Port ID is used in the source identifier (S_ID) and destination identifier  
(D_ID) fields of a Fibre Channel frame.  
See concurrent maintenance.  
NV-RAM. RAM that retains its content when the device power is turned off.  
N_Port  
See node port.  
N_Port ID  
See node port identifier.  
NV-RAM  
See nonvolatile random access memory.  
Glossary–36  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
O
octet  
An 8-bit quantity, often called a byte or word. An octet can equal a byte as long as the byte  
equals eight bits. See also byte.  
OEM  
See original equipment manufacturer.  
offline  
Referring to data stored on a medium, such as tape or even paper, that is not available  
immediately to the user.  
offline diagnostics  
Diagnostics that only operate in stand alone mode. User operations cannot take place with  
offline diagnostics running.  
offline sequence  
OLS. (1) Sequence sent by the transmitting port to indicate that it is attempting to initialize a  
link and has detected a problem in doing so. (2) Sequence sent by the transmitting port to  
indicate that it is offline.  
offline state  
When the switch or director is in the offline state, all the installed ports are offline. The ports  
transmit an offline sequence (OLS) and they cannot accept a login got connection from an  
attached device. Contrast with online state.  
ohm  
A unit of electrical resistance equal to that of a conductor in which a current of one ampere is  
produced by a potential of one volt across the conductor terminals (D).  
OLS  
See offline sequence.  
online  
Referring to data stored on the system so it is available immediately to the user.  
online diagnostics  
Diagnostics that can be run by the customer engineer while the operational software is  
running. These diagnostics do not impact user operations.  
online state  
When the switch or director is in the online state, all of the unblocked ports are allowed to log  
in to the fabric and begin communicating. Devices can connect to the switch or director if the  
port is not blocked and can communicate with another attached device if both devices are in  
the same zone, or if the default zone is enabled. Contrast with offline state.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
Open Systems Architecture  
OSI. A model that represents a network as a hierarchical structure of functional layers. Each  
layer provides a set of functions that can be accessed and used by the layer above. Layers are  
independent, in that implementation of a layer can be changed without affecting other layers  
(D).  
open systems management server  
OSMS. An optional feature that can be enabled on the director or switch through the Product  
Manager application. When enabled, host control and management of the director or switch  
are provided through an Open System Interconnection (OSI) device attached to a director or  
switch port.  
open systems mode  
The mode that is used for Hewlett Packard or open fabrics. See also operating mode; S/390  
mode.  
operating mode  
In directors or switches, in managed products, a selection between s/390 and open systems  
mode. See also open systems mode; S/390 mode.  
operating system  
OS. Software that controls execution of applications and provides services such as resource  
allocation, scheduling, I/O control, and data management. Most operating systems are  
predominantly software, but partial hardware implementations are possible (D, T).  
Operating System/390  
OS/390™. An integrated, open-enterprise server operating system developed by IBM that  
incorporates a leading-edge and open communications server, distributed data and file  
services, parallel Sysplex™ support, object-oriented programming, distributed computing  
environment, and open application interfaces (D).  
optical cable  
Single fiber, multiple fibers, or a fiber bundle in a structure built to meet optical, mechanical,  
and environmental specifications (D, E). See also Jumper cable; trunk cable. Synonymous with  
fiber-optic cable.  
optical drive backup  
A data backup system that uses rewriteable optical cartridges (ROCs) as the storage medium.  
optical fiber connector  
Synonymous with connector.  
Glossary–38  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Glossary  
ordered set  
In Fibre Channel protocol, four 10-bit characters (a combination of data and special  
characters) providing low-level link functions, such as frame demarcation and signaling  
between two ends of a link. It provides for initialization of the link after power-on and for  
some basic recovery functions.  
original equipment manufacturer  
OEM. A company that has a special relationship with computer producers. OEMs buy  
components and customize them for a particular application. They sell the customized  
computer under their own name. OEMs may not actually be the original manufacturers. They  
are usually the customizers and marketers.  
OS  
See operating system.  
OS/390™  
See Operating System/390.  
OSI  
See Open Systems Architecture.  
OSMS  
See open systems management server.  
out-of-band management  
Transmission of management information, using frequencies or channels other than those  
routinely used for information transfer.  
P
packet  
In Fibre Channel protocol, Logical unit of information (usually in the form of a data frame)  
transmitted on a network. It contains a header (with all relevant addressing and timing  
information), the actual data, and a trailer (which contains the error checking function, usually  
in the form of a cyclic redundancy check), and frequently user data.  
panel  
A logical component of the interface window. Typically, a heading and/or frame marks the  
panel as an individual entity of the window. Size and shape of the panel and its data depend  
upon the purpose of the panel and may or may not be modified.  
PC  
See personal computer.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
persistent binding  
A form of server-level access control that uses configuration information to bind a server to a  
specific Fibre Channel storage volume (or logical device), using a unit number. See also  
access control.  
personal computer  
PC. A portable computer that consists of a system unit, display, keyboard, mouse, one or more  
diskette drives, and internal fixed-disk storage (D).  
point-to-point  
A Fibre Channel protocol topology that provides a single, direct connection between two  
communication ports. The director or switch supports only point-to-point topology.  
port  
Receptacle on a device to which a cable leading to another device can be attached. Ports  
provide Fibre Channel connections (D).  
port address name  
A user-defined symbolic name of 24 characters or less that identifies a particular port address.  
port authorization  
Feature of the password definition function that allows an administrator to extend  
managed by a personal computer (PC). Port authorization affects only operator-level actions  
port name  
Name that the user assigns to a particular port through the Product Manager application. See  
also identifier. Synonymous with address name.  
POST  
See power-on self-test.  
power-on self-test  
POST. Series of diagnostic tests that are run automatically by a device when the power is  
turned on  
preferred domain ID  
Configured value that a switch will request from the Principal Switch. If the preferred value is  
already in use, the Principal Switch will assign a different value.  
preventive service planning bucket  
PSP bucket. Collected problems after early ship of an IBM product.  
Glossary–40  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
principal switch  
In a multiswitch fabric, the switch that allocates domain IDs to itself and to all other switches  
in the fabric. There is always one principal switch in a fabric. If a switch is not connected to  
any other switches, it acts as its own principal switch.  
printed wiring assembly  
PWA. A thin board on which integrated circuits and other electronic components are placed  
and connected to each other via thin copper traces.  
private device  
A loop device that cannot transmit a fabric login command (FLOGI) command to a switch or  
director, nor communicate with fabric-attached devices. Contrast with .public device.  
processor complex  
A system configuration that consists of all the machines required for operation, for example, a  
processor unit, a processor controller, a system display, a service support display, and a power  
and coolant distribution unit.  
Product Manager application  
Application that implements the management user interface for a director or switch. There are  
two Product Manager applications: director or switch Product Manager, and HAFM Product  
Manager. (1) In the HAFM Services application, the software component that provides a  
graphical user interface for managing and monitoring HAFM products. When a product  
instance is opened from the HAFM application Product View or Fabric Manager Topology  
View, the corresponding HAFM Product Manager application is invoked.  
product name  
User-configurable identifier assigned to a managed product. Typically, this name is stored on  
the product itself. A director or switch product name can also be accessed by a simple network  
management protocol (SNMP) manager as the system name.  
Product View  
The top-level display in the HAFM software user interface that displays icons of managed  
products.  
prohibited port connection  
In a director or switch, in S/390 operating mode, an attribute that removes dynamic  
connectivity capability.  
proprietary  
Privately owned and controlled. In the computer industry, proprietary is the opposite of open.  
A proprietary design or technique is one that is owned by a company. It also implies that the  
company has not divulged specifications that would allow other companies to duplicate the  
product. Increasingly, proprietary architectures are seen as a disadvantage. Consumers prefer  
open and standardized architectures, which allow them to mix and match products from  
different manufacturers.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
protective plug  
In a fiber-optic environment, a type of duplex connector (or cover) that provides physical  
protection (D). Contrast with loopback plug.  
protocol  
(1) Set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior of functional units in  
achieving communication. (2) In systems network architecture, the meanings of and  
sequencing rules for requests and responses for managing the network, transferring data, and  
synchronizing network component states. (3) A specification for the format and relative timing  
of data exchanged between communicating devices (D, I).  
.public device  
A loop device that can transmit a fabric login command (FLOGI) to a switch, receive  
acknowledgement from the switch’s login server, register with the switch’s name server, and  
communicate with fabric-attached devices. Public devices communicate with fabric-attached  
devices through the switch’s bridge port (B_Port) connection to a director or switch. Contrast  
with private device.  
pull-down menu  
See drop-down menu.  
PWA  
See printed wiring assembly.  
R
RFI. Electromagnetic radiation which is emitted by electrical circuits carrying rapidly  
changing signals, as a by-product of the normal operation, and which causes unwanted signals  
(interference or noise) to be induced in other circuits.  
RAM  
random access memory  
RAM. A group of computer memory locations that is numerically identified to allow  
high-speed access by the controlling microprocessor. A memory location is randomly accessed  
by referring to its numerical identifier (D). Contrast with read-only memory. See also dynamic  
random access memory; nonvolatile random access memory; static random access memory.  
R_A_TOV  
See resource allocation time-out value.  
Glossary–42  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
read-only memory  
ROM. An information storage chip with permanent memory. Stored information cannot be  
changed or deleted except under special circumstances (D). Contrast with random access  
memory.  
redundancy  
Performance characteristic of a system or product whose integral components are backed up  
by identical components to which operations will automatically failover in the event of a  
component failure. Redundancy is a vital characteristic of virtually all high-availability (24  
hours/7 days per week) computer systems and networks.  
remote notification  
A process by which a system is able to inform remote users and workstations of certain classes  
of events that occur on the system. E-mail notification and the configuration of simple network  
management protocol (SNMP) trap recipients are two examples of remote notification  
programs that can be implemented on director-class switches.  
remote user workstation  
Workstation, such as a personal computer (PC), using HAFM application and Product  
Manager application software that can access the HAFM server over a local area network  
(LAN) connection.  
repeater  
A device that generates and often amplifies signals to extend transmission distance.  
rerouting delay  
An option that ensures that frames are delivered in order through the fabric to their destination.  
resource allocation time-out value  
R_A_TOV. R_A_TOV is a value used to time-out operations that depend on the maximum  
possible time that a frame could be delayed in a fabric and still be delivered.  
RFI  
See radio frequency interference.  
ROM  
See read-only memory. Contrast with random access memory.  
router  
An attaching device that connects two local area network (LAN) segments, which use similar  
or different architectures, at the reference model network layer (D). Contrast with bridge.  
RS-232  
The Electronic Industry Association (EIA)-recommended specification for asynchronous  
serial interfaces between computers and communications equipment. It specifies both the  
number of pins and type of connection, but does not specify the electrical signals (D).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
S
S/390 mode  
The mode that is most useful when attaching to IBM S/390 Enterprise Servers. See also open  
systems mode; operating mode.  
SA/MVS™  
See System Automation for Operating System/390.  
SAN  
See storage area network; system area network.  
SA OS/390™  
See System Automation for Operating System/390.  
scalable  
Refers to how well a system can adapt to increased demands. For example, a scalable network  
system could start with just a few nodes but easily expands to thousands of nodes. Scalability  
is important because it allows the user to invest in a system with confidence that a business  
will not outgrow it. Refers to anything whose size can be changed.  
SCSI  
segment  
A fabric segments when one or more switches cannot join the fabric because of various  
reasons. The switch or switches remain as separate fabrics.  
See segmented expansion port.  
segmented expansion port  
Segmented E_Port. E_Port that has ceased to function as an E_Port within a multiswitch fabric  
due to an incompatibility between the fabrics that it joins. See also bridge port; fabric port;  
generic port; node port.  
serial port  
A full-duplex channel that sends and receives data at the same time. It consists of three wires:  
two that move data one bit at a time in opposite directions, and a third wire that is a common  
signal ground wire.  
server  
A computer that provides shared resources, such as files and printers, to the network. Used  
primarily to store data, providing access to shared resources. Usually contains a network  
operating system.  
Glossary–44  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
SFP transceivers  
See small form factor pluggable transceivers.  
shortwave  
Lasers or light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that emit light with wavelengths around 780 nm or 850  
nm. When using multimode fiber (50 nm) shortwave lasers can be used with Fibre Channel  
links less than 500 m. To achieve longer lengths, single-mode fiber is required. The preferred  
fiber core size is 50 micron as this fiber has large bandwidth so that the distance is limited by  
the fiber attenuation. A 62.5 micron core size is also supported for compatibility with existing  
FDDI installations. Fiber of this type has smaller bandwidth and, in this case, the distance is  
limited by the fiber bandwidth.  
simple mail transfer protocol  
SMTP. A transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that allows the  
user to create, send, and receive text messages. SMTP protocols specify how messages are  
passed across a link from one system to another. They do not specify how the mail application  
accepts, presents, or stores the mail.  
simple network management protocol  
SNMP. A transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP)-derived protocol  
governing network management and monitoring of network devices.  
simple network management protocol community  
SNMP community. Also known as SNMP community string. SNMP community is a cluster of  
managed products (in SNMP terminology, hosts) to which the server or managed product  
running the SNMP agent belongs.  
simple network management protocol community name  
SNMP community name. The name assigned to a given SNMP community. Queries from an  
SNMP management station to a device running an SNMP agent will only elicit a response if  
those queries are addressed with the correct SNMP community name.  
simple network management protocol management station  
SNMP management station. An SNMP workstation personal computer (PC) used to oversee  
the SNMP network.  
simple network management protocol version 1  
SNMP v1. The original standard for SNMP is now referred to as SNMP v1. The Sphereon  
3216 and Sphereon 3232 use SNMP v1.  
simple network management protocol version 2  
SNMP v2. The second version of the SNMP standard. This version expands the functionality  
specified in RFC 1441 through 1452.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Glossary  
singlemode optical fiber  
An optical fiber that allows one wavelength-dependent mode (light path) to propagate.  
Contrast with multimode optical fiber.  
small computer system interface  
SCSI. An interface standard that enables computers to communicate with peripherals  
connected to them. Commonly used in enterprise computing and in Apple Macintosh systems.  
Usually pronounced as “scuzzy.” The equivalent interface in most personal computers is  
enhanced integrated drive electronics (EIDE).  
A narrow SCSI adapter supports up to eight devices, including itself. SCSI address 7 has the  
highest priority followed by 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, with 0 being the lowest priority.  
SFP transceivers. Laser-based optical transceivers for a wide range of networking applications  
requiring high data rates. The transceivers, which are designed for increased densities,  
performance, and reduced power, are well-suited for Fibre Channel applications.  
SMTP  
See simple mail transfer protocol.  
SNMP  
See simple network management protocol.  
See simple network management protocol community.  
See simple network management protocol community name.  
See simple network management protocol management station.  
SNMP v1  
See simple network management protocol version 1.  
SNMP v2  
See simple network management protocol version 2.  
SRAM  
SSP  
See system services processor.  
state  
The state of the switch or director. Possible values include online, offline, testing, and faulty.  
See offline state; online state.  
Glossary–46  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
static random access memory  
SRAM. SRAM is microprocessor-cache random access memory. It is built internal to the  
microprocessor or on external chips. SRAM is fast, but relatively expensive (D). Contrast with  
dynamic random access memory.  
storage area network  
SAN. A high-performance data communications environment that interconnects computing  
and storage resources so that the resources can be effectively shared and consolidated.  
stored addresses  
In S/390 mode, a method for configuring addresses.  
subnet  
A portion of a network that shares a common address component. On transmission control  
protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) networks, subnets are defined as all devices whose IP  
addresses have the same prefix. Dividing a network into subnets is useful for both security and  
performance reasons. IP networks are divided using a subnet mask.  
subnet mask  
A mask used by a computer to determine whether another computer with which it needs to  
communicate is located on a local or remote network. The network mask depends upon the  
class of networks to which the computer is connecting. The mask indicates which digits to  
look at in a longer network address and allows the router to avoid handling the entire address.  
Subnet masking allows routers to move the packets more quickly. Typically, a subnet may  
represent all the machines at one geographic location, in one building, or on the same local  
area network.  
switch  
A device that connects, filters and forwards packets between local area network (LAN)  
segments or storage area network (SAN) nodes or devices.  
switchover  
Changing a backup field-replaceable unit (FRU) to the active state, and the active FRU to the  
backup state.  
switch priority  
Value configured into each switch in a fabric that determines its relative likelihood of  
becoming the fabric’s principal switch. Lower values indicate higher likelihood of becoming  
the principal switch. A value of 1 indicates the highest priority; 225 is the lowest priority. A  
value of 225 indicates that the switch is not capable of acting as the principal switch. The value  
0 is illegal.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
System Automation for Operating System/390  
SA OS/390™. IBM licensed software that provides System/390 Parallel Sysplex™  
management, automation capabilities, and integrated systems and network management. SA  
OS/390 manages host, remote processor, and I/O operations. SA OS/390 integrates the  
functions of Automated Operations Control for Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS™), ESCON™  
Manager, and Target System Control Facility (D).  
system name  
See product name.  
system services processor  
SSP. In a director or switch, the central controlling processor. Controls the RS-232  
maintenance port and the Ethernet port of a Fibre Channel director or switch.  
T
TB  
See terabyte.  
TCP  
See transmission control protocol.  
TCP/IP  
See transmission control protocol/Internet protocol.  
technical support  
Single point of contact for a customer when assistance is needed in managing or  
troubleshooting a product. Technical support provides assistance twenty-four hours a day,  
seven days a week, including holidays. The technical support number is (800) 652 6672.  
Synonymous with customer support.  
Telecommunications Industry Association  
TIA. A member organization of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA), TIA is the trade  
group representing the communications and information technology industries. See also  
Electronic Industries Association.  
telnet  
The Internet standard protocol for remote terminal connection over a network connection.  
Glossary–48  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
terabyte  
TB. One thousand (1,000) gigabytes; one terabyte of text on paper would consume 42,500  
trees. At 12 characters per inch, 1 TB of data in a straight line would encircle the earth 56  
times and stretch some 1.4 million miles equalling nearly three round trips from the earth to  
the moon.  
Director or switch Threshold Alert Log. Log displayed through the Product Manager  
application that provides details of threshold alert notifications for an individual director or  
alert as configured for the product. The information is useful to maintenance personnel for  
fault isolation and repair verification. See also Audit Log; Event Log; Hardware Log; Link  
Incident Log.  
TIA  
See Telecommunications Industry Association.  
topology  
Logical and/or physical arrangement of stations on a network.  
transceiver modules  
Transceiver modules come in longwave, extra longwave, or shortwave laser versions,  
providing a single fiber connection.  
transfer rate  
The speed with which data can be transmitted from one device to another. Data rates are often  
measures in megabits (Mbps) or megabytes (MBps) per second, or gigabits (Gbps) or  
gigabytes per second (GBps).  
transmission control protocol  
TCP. The transport layer for the transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP)  
protocol widely used on Ethernet networks and any network that conforms to U.S. Department  
of Defense standards for network protocol. TCP provides reliable communication and control  
through full-duplex connections (D).  
transmission control protocol/Internet protocol  
TCP/IP. A layered set of protocols (network and transport) that allows sharing of applications  
among devices on a high-speed local area network (LAN) communication environment (D).  
See also transmission control protocol; Internet protocol.  
trap  
Unsolicited notification of an event originating from a simple network management protocol  
(SNMP) managed device and directed to an SNMP network management station.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
trap host  
Simple network management protocol (SNMP) management workstation that is configured to  
receive traps.  
trap recipient  
In simple network management protocol (SNMP), a network management station that receives  
messages through SNMP for specific events that occur on the arbitrated loop device.  
trunk cable  
Cable consisting of multiple fiber pairs that do not directly attach to an active device. This  
cable usually exists between distribution panels and can be located within, or external to, a  
building (D). Contrast with Jumper cable. See also optical cable.  
U
UDP  
See user datagram protocol.  
UL  
ULP  
See upper level protocol.  
unblocked connection  
In a director or switch, the absence of the blocked attribute for a specific port. Contrast with  
blocked connection. See connectivity attribute. See also allowed connection; dynamic  
connection; dynamic connectivity.  
unblocked port  
Devices communicating with an unblocked port can login to the director or switch and  
communicate with devices attached to any other unblocked port (assuming that this is  
supported by the current zoning configuration).  
Underwriters Laboratories  
UL. A laboratory organization accredited by the Occupational Safety and Health  
Administration and authorized to certify products for use in the home and workplace (D).  
unicast  
Communication between a single sender and a single receiver over a network.  
uninterruptable power supply  
UPS. A buffer between public utility power or another power source, and a system that  
requires precise, uninterrupted power (D).  
Glossary–50  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
UNIX  
A popular multi-user, multitasking operating system originally designed to be a small, flexible  
system used exclusively by programmers. UNIX was one of the first operating systems to be  
written in a high-level programming language, namely C. This meant that it could be installed  
on virtually any computer for which a C compiler existed. Due to its portability, flexibility, and  
power, UNIX has become the leading operating system for workstations. Historically, it has  
been less popular in the personal computer market, but the emergence of a new version called  
upper level protocol  
ULP. Protocols that map to and run on top of the Fibre Channel FC-4 layer. ULPs include  
Internet protocol (IP) and small computer system interface (SCSI).  
UPS  
See uninterruptable power supply.  
user datagram protocol  
UDP. A connectionless protocol that runs on top of Internet protocol (IP) networks. User  
datagram protocol/Internet protocol (UDP/IP) offers very few error recovery services, instead  
providing a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network. UDP/IP is primarily  
used for broadcasting messages over an entire network. Contrast with transmission control  
protocol/Internet protocol.  
V
VAC  
See volts alternating current.  
VDC  
See volts direct current.  
virtual machine  
VM®. (1) A virtual data processing system that appears to be at the exclusive disposal of a  
single user, but whose functions are accomplished by sharing the resources of a real data  
processing system. (2) A functional simulation of a computer system and its associated  
devices, multiples of which can be controlled concurrently by one operating system (D, T).  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
virtual storage  
VS. (1) Storage space that may be regarded as addressable main storage by the user of a  
computer system in which virtual addresses are mapped to real addresses. The size of virtual  
storage is limited by the addressing scheme of the computer system and by the amount of  
auxiliary storage available, not by the number of main storage locations. (2) Addressable  
space that is apparent to the user as processor storage space, from which the instructions and  
the data are mapped to the processor storage locations (A, D, I).  
volt  
A measure of the difference in electrical potential between two points in a conductor, equal to  
one ohm resistance carrying a constant current of one ampere, with a power dissipation of one  
watt (D). See volts alternating current; volts direct current.  
volts alternating current  
a circuit where the electricity can travel in either direction. Contrast with volts direct current.  
See volt.  
volts direct current  
VDC. A term for classifying the system in which volts exist. VDC means that the electricity  
has a specific path it must follow. Contrast with volts alternating current. See volt.  
W
warning message  
A message that indicates a possible error has been detected. See also error message.  
watt  
A unit of power in the International System equal to one joule (Newton-meter) per second (D).  
window  
The main window for the HAFM application or Product Manager applications. Each  
application has a unique window that is divided into separate panels for the title, navigation  
control, alerts, and the main or Product View. The user performs all management and  
monitoring functions for these Fibre Channel products through the application window.  
workstation  
A terminal or microcomputer usually connected to a network or mainframe at which a user can  
perform applications.  
world-wide names  
WWN. Eight-byte string that uniquely identifies a Fibre Channel entity (that is, a port, a node,  
a switch, a fabric), even on global networks.  
Glossary–52  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
wrap plug  
Synonym for loopback plug.  
wrap test  
A test that checks attachment or control unit circuitry, without checking the mechanism itself,  
by returning the output of the mechanism as input. A wrap test can transmit a specific  
character pattern through a system and compare the pattern received with the pattern  
transmitted (D).  
write authorization  
Permission for an simple network management protocol (SNMP) management station with the  
proper community name to modify writable management information base (MIB) variables.  
WWN  
See world-wide names.  
Z
zip drive  
A high capacity floppy disk and disk drive developed by the Iomega Corporation. Zip disks  
are slightly larger than conventional floppy disks. The storage capacity for zip disks is  
between 100 and 250 MB of data. The zip drive and disk is used for backing up the HAFM  
server, and is located on the communications tray behind the HAFM server.  
zone  
Set of devices that can access one another. All connected devices may be configured into one  
or more zones. Devices in the same zone can see each other. Those devices that occupy  
different zones cannot. See also active zone set; zone set; zoning.  
zone member  
Specification of a device to be included in a zone. A zone member can be identified by the port  
number of the director or switch to which it is attached or by its port world-wide name  
(WWN). In multiswitch fabrics, identification of end-devices or nodes by WWN is preferable.  
zone set  
A collection of zones that may be activated as a unit. See also active zone set; zone.  
zoning  
Grouping of several devices by function or by location. All devices connected to a  
connectivity product, such as the director or switch, may be configured into one or more  
zones. See also access control; zone.  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Glossary–53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
Glossary–54  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
10/100 Mbps LAN connectors 1–12  
event code tables B–21  
A
additional port function 2–67  
alert symbols  
data collection 1–6  
diagnostic software  
introduction 1–6  
diagnostics  
HAFM 1–22  
Product Manager 1–26  
alerts  
introduction 1–5  
audit logs 3–6  
HAFM 1–21  
port 3–19  
Product Manager 1–24  
software 1–20  
dialog boxes  
port properties 1–29  
diamond, red  
B
bandwidth of ports 1–1  
beaconing  
introduction 1–6  
blocking a port 3–39  
meaning of 1–35  
C
call home feature  
introduction 1–6  
call-home notification  
reporting 1–42  
firmware  
version 1–13  
disk drive 1–12  
domain ID 1–8  
zone member 3–18  
CD-ROM  
drive 1–12  
circle, green  
E_Port segmentation 1–8  
meaning of 1–35  
clock speed 1–12  
configuration data  
backing up 3–48  
managing 3–48  
operating status 1–35  
electrostatic discharge (ESD)  
repair procedures, caution 3–2  
email messages  
introduction 1–6  
restoring 3–49  
connectors and indicators 1–19  
e-mail notification  
reporting 1–42  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Index–1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
embedded web server 1–12  
diagnostics 1–40  
Fibre Connection, see FICON  
ESD  
product management 1–4  
field replaceable units  
See FRUs  
repair procedures, caution 3–2  
Ethernet  
hub 1–12  
firmware  
LAN, connector 1–19  
ethernet LAN connectors 1–12  
event codes  
adding a version 3–41  
deleting a version 3–45  
determining version 3–40  
downloading 3–45  
managing versions 3–40  
FMS  
product management 1–4  
FRU list view 1–31  
displayed 1–31  
description B–1  
fan module events B–15  
power supply events B–11  
system events B–3  
thermal events B–36  
event log 3–6  
external loopback tests 3–28  
FRUs 1–17  
fans 1–18, 5–2  
F
front-accessible 5–1  
illustrations 5–1  
fabric logs 3–5  
fabric manager  
part numbers 5–1  
power supplies 1–18, 5–2  
rear-accessible 5–2  
RRPs 4–1  
SFP transceivers 1–18, 5–1  
status LEDs 1–20  
messages A–1  
fabric tree 1–36  
Fabrics Tab  
zone sets view 3–17  
fabrics view  
topology tab, illustration 1–36  
view area 1–36  
zone sets tab, illustration 1–37  
fans 1–18  
gateway address  
default 2–1, 3–2  
illustrations 5–2  
LEDs 1–20  
part numbers 5–2  
removal 4–6  
audit log 3–3  
diagnostic features 1–21  
event log 3–3  
HAFM application  
introduction 1–3  
messages A–1  
HAFM Server  
description 1–11  
specifications 1–12  
fiber-optic  
cleaning kit 1–44  
components, cleaning 3–33  
protective plug 1–43  
wrap plug 1–43  
Fibre Connection management server, see FMS  
Index–2  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HAFM server  
remote workstation 1–3  
HAFM Services  
fabric 3–5  
HAFM Event 3–3  
hardware 3–7  
description 1–38  
event table 1–38  
status line 1–39  
hard drive 1–12  
hardware log 3–7  
Hardware View 1–24, 3–20  
hardware view 1–27  
displayed 1–27, 1–28  
status conditions 1–27  
status symbol function 1–28  
using 1–27  
introduction 1–5  
link incident 3–9, 3–10  
product status 3–5  
session 3–4  
using information 3–3  
loopback tests  
port, external 3–28  
port, internal 3–26  
maintenance  
approach 1–13  
I
illustrated parts breakdown 5–1  
IML button 1–17, 1–19  
IML procedure 3–35  
inactive port 2–67  
inband management access methods 1–4  
Intel Pentium processor 1–12  
internal loopback tests 3–26  
IP address  
maintenance analysis procedures  
See MAPs  
maintenance port 1–6, 1–20  
management  
HAFM application 1–3  
out-of-band 1–3  
default 2–1, 3–2  
IPL procedure 3–35  
switch 1–3  
web server 1–3  
MAP 0000-Start Map 2–7  
L
MAP 0200-POST, Reset, or IPL Failure Analysis  
2–32  
MAP 0300-Console Application Problem  
Determination 2–33  
MAP 0400-Loss of Console Communication  
2–39  
MAP 0500-Fan and CTP Card Failure Analysis  
2–58  
MAP 0600-Port Failure and Link Incident  
Analysis 2–63  
MAP 0700-Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port  
Problem Determination 2–79  
MAP 0800-Console PC Problem Determination  
2–90  
LAN  
connector 1–19  
LEDs  
fan 1–20  
FRU status 1–20  
port SFPs 1–20  
power supply 1–20  
PWR LED 1–20  
link incident log 3–9, 3–10  
local area network  
logs  
audit 3–6  
event 3–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Index–3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
MAPs 2–1  
zoning 1–8  
collecting data 3–31  
event codes B–1  
Node List View 3–16  
node list view 1–31  
node list view menu 1–32  
nodes, types, list of 3–17  
MAP 0000-Start Map 2–7  
MAP 0100-Power Distribution Analysis  
2–26  
MAP 0200-POST, Reset or IPL Failure  
Analysis 2–32  
MAP 0300-Console Application Problem  
Determination 2–33  
MAP 0400-Loss of Console Communication  
2–39  
MAP 0500-Fan and CTP Card Failure  
Analysis 2–58  
MAP 0600-Port Failure and Link Incident  
Analysis 2–63  
MAP 0700-Fabric, ISL, and Segmented Port  
MAP 0800-Console PC Problem  
Determination 2–90  
null modem cable 1–43  
offline, setting switch 3–37  
online, setting switch 3–37  
open-system management server, see OSMS  
operating status for the Edge Switch 2/32 1–35  
product management 1–4  
out-of-band management  
description 1–3  
P
part numbers 5–1  
parts 5–1  
quick start 2–1  
memory  
HAFM server 1–12  
RAM 1–12  
menu bar, description 1–23  
menus  
default 2–1, 3–2  
Pentium processor 1–12  
Performance View 3–17  
performance view option 1–33  
personal computer, HAFM server 1–11  
menu bar 1–23  
node list view 1–32  
performance view 1–34  
port 1–29  
port list view 1–30  
switch 1–28  
blocking 3–39  
diagnostics 3–19  
LEDs 3–19  
loopback tests, internal 3–26  
segmentation 1–8  
swapping 3–30  
messages  
fabric manager A–1  
HAFM application A–1  
Product Manager A–18  
modem (external) 1–12  
modem cable 1–43  
multiswitch fabric 1–8  
domain ID 1–8  
unblocking 3–39  
port bandwidth 1–1  
Port List View 3–12  
port list view  
E_Port segmentation 1–8  
port segmentation 1–8  
Index–4  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
displayed 1–30  
port list view menu 1–30  
port menu 1–29  
port properties dialog box 1–29  
ports  
displaying statistics 1–34  
WWN, node list view 2–73  
ports list view 1–29  
power off procedure 3–35  
power supplies 1–18  
illustrations 5–2  
switch view 1–28  
view panel 1–27  
protective plug, fiber-optic 1–43  
quick start, MAPs 2–1  
RAM 1–12  
remote workstation  
configurations 1–14  
minimum specifications 1–16  
repair, event codes B–1  
RRPs 4–1  
LEDs 1–20  
part numbers 5–2  
removal 4–4  
replacement 4–5  
fans 4–6  
components 3–33  
product management  
FICON 1–4  
power supplies 4–4  
channel wrap tests 3–19  
procedure 3–29  
enabling or disabling port channel wrapping  
3–14  
portchannelwrapping, enablinganddisabling  
3–25  
swapping ports 3–30  
FMS 1–4  
inband access 1–4  
OSMS 1–4  
Product Manager  
alert symbols 1–26  
diagnostic features 1–24  
Hardware View 1–24, 3–20  
messages A–18  
Node List View 3–16  
Performance View 3–17, 3–24  
Port List View 3–12  
using views 3–12  
repair procedures 3–2  
illustrations 5–1  
LEDs 1–20  
product manager 1–27  
FRU list view 1–31  
menu bar 1–23  
node list view 1–31  
node list view menu 1–32  
performance view 1–33  
port list view 1–29  
port menu 1–29  
longwave 1–18  
part numbers 5–1  
protective plug 1–43  
removal 4–2  
replacement 4–3  
status bar 1–34  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Index–5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
shortwave 1–18  
MAPs 2–1  
wrap plug 1–43  
simple network management protocol  
See SNMP  
multiswitch fabric 1–8  
power off procedure 3–35  
power supplies 1–18  
setting offline 3–37  
setting online 3–37  
SNMP  
introduction 1–3, 1–7  
trap message support 1–41  
software  
diagnostic features 1–20  
installing 3–51  
upgrading 3–51  
status table 1–25  
tools supplied 1–43  
zoning feature 1–7  
specifications, remote workstations 1–16  
specifications, switch 1–9  
square, gray, meaning of 1–35  
statistics on ports 1–34  
status bar 1–34, 1–35  
status bar symbols 1–35  
status table 1–25  
switch menu 1–28  
switch properties dialog box 1–28  
symbols, status bar, table of 1–35  
event codes tables B–3  
tools and test equipment 1–42  
tools, supplied with switch 1–43  
topology tab 1–36  
subnet mask  
default 2–1, 3–2  
swapping ports 3–30  
switch  
audit logs 3–6  
connectors and indicators 1–19  
description 1–2  
error-detection, reporting, and serviceability  
features 1–5  
illustration 1–36  
transmission distance 1–1  
triangle, yellow  
meaning of 1–35  
event codes B–1  
event log 3–6  
fabric logs 3–5  
fans 1–18  
unblocking a port 3–39  
versions  
FRUs 1–17  
director firmware 1–13  
Intel processor 1–12  
Windows 2000 1–12  
view area 1–36  
view panel 1–27  
views  
FRUs, rear accessible 5–2  
hardware log 3–7  
illustrated parts breakdown 5–1  
IML procedure 3–35  
IPL procedure 3–35  
LEDs 1–20  
link incident log 3–9, 3–10  
maintenance port 1–20  
management 1–3  
Hardware 1–24, 3–20  
Node List 3–16  
Performance 3–17, 3–24  
Port List 3–12  
Index–6  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Zone sets 3–17  
WWN, zone member 3–18  
W
Z
web server  
introduction 1–3  
Zip drive 1–12  
zone set  
web server, embedded 1–12  
Windows 2000 1–12  
wrap plug, fiber-optic 1–43  
WWN  
description of 1–7  
zone set tab 1–37  
zone sets tab, illustration 1–37  
Zone sets View 3–17  
zoning 1–7  
node list view 2–73  
edge switch 2/16 service manual  
Index–7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grizzly Planer G0453PX User Manual
GSI Outdoors Fan 2TAF User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Paint Sprayer 95690 User Manual
Hasbro Games 44070 User Manual
Hasbro Games The National American User Manual
Hasbro Motorized Toy Car 3860 User Manual
Hasbro Robotics 83501 User Manual
Havis Shields Automobile Accessories C VS 1600 EXPL User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Server 5992 0902 User Manual
Hyundai Air Conditioner HACM09DB HCCM99DB User Manual